Você está na página 1de 375

MiCOM P740

Numerical Busbar Protection

Technical Manual
P740/EN T/D11

Technical Manual
Content
MiCOM P740

P740/EN T/D11
Page 1/2

NUMERICAL BUSBAR PROTECTION


MiCOM P740
CONTENTS
Safety Section
Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

Hardware Description

P740/EN HW/D11

Functional Description

P740/EN FT/D11

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

Installation

P740/EN IN/D11

Commissioning & Maintenance


Problem Analysis

P740/EN CM/D11
P740/EN PR/D11

Connection diagrams

P740/EN CO/D11

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

Menu Content Tables

P740/EN HI/D11

Version Compatibility

P740/EN VC/D11

P740/EN T/D11

Technical Manual
Content
MiCOM P740

Page 2/2

BLANK PAGE

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740

INTRODUCTION

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction
MiCOM P740

Introduction
MiCOM P740

P740/EN IT/D11
Page 1/18

CONTENTS
1.

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM

2.

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES

3.

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

3.1

Introduction to the relay

3.1.1

Front panel

3.1.2

Relay rear panel

3.2

Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options

10

3.3

Menu structure

11

3.3.1

Central Unit settings

12

3.3.2

Peripheral Units settings

12

3.4

Password protection

13

3.5

Relay configuration

13

3.6

Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)

14

3.6.1

Default display and menu time-out

15

3.6.2

Menu navigation and setting browsing

15

3.6.3

Password entry

15

3.6.4

Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records

16

3.6.5

Setting changes

16

3.7

Front communication port user interface

17

P740/EN IT/D11
Page 2/18

Introduction
MiCOM P740

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740

1.

Page 3/18

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM
MiCOM is a comprehensive solution capable of meeting all electricity supply
requirements. It comprises a range of components, systems and services from
AREVA.
Central to the MiCOM concept is flexibility.
MiCOM provides the ability to define an application solution and, through extensive
communication capabilities, to integrate it with your power supply control system.
The components within MiCOM are:
P range protection relays;
C range control products;
M range measurement products for accurate metering and monitoring;
S range versatile PC support and substation control packages.
MiCOM products include extensive facilities for recording information on the state
and behaviour of the power system using disturbance and fault records. They can
also provide measurements of the system at regular intervals to a control centre
enabling remote monitoring and control to take place.
For up-to-date information on any MiCOM product, visit our website:
www.areva-td.com

P740/EN IT/D11
Page 4/18

2.

Introduction
MiCOM P740

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM GUIDES


The guides provide a functional and technical description of the MiCOM protection
relay and a comprehensive set of instructions for the relays use and application.
The Technical Manual is composed as follows:
Technical Guide, includes information on the application of the relay and a technical
description of its features. It is mainly intended for protection engineers concerned
with the selection and application of the relay for the protection of the power system.
Operation Guide, contains information on the installation and commissioning of the
relay, and also a section on fault finding. This volume is intended for site engineers
who are responsible for the installation, commissioning and maintenance of the
relay.
The chapter content within the Technical Manual is summarised below:

Technical Guide
Handling of Electronic Equipment
Safety Section
P740/EN IT

Introduction
A guide to the different user interfaces of the protection relay describing how to
start using the relay.

P740/EN AP

Application Notes (includes a copy of publication P740/EN BR)


Comprehensive and detailed description of the features of the relay including
both the protection and non-protection element of the P740 scheme including
circuit breaker fail element. Description of the other functions such as event and
disturbance recording, fault location, programmable scheme logic and specific
topology. This chapter includes a description of the current transformer
requirements (saturation detection) and how to apply the settings to the relay.

P740/EN HW Hardware Description


Overview of the operation of the relays hardware. This chapter includes
information on the self-checking features and diagnostics of the relay.
P740/EN FT

Functional Description
Overview of the operation of the relays software.

P740/EN TD Technical Data


Technical data including setting ranges, accuracy limits, recommended
operating conditions, ratings and performance data. Compliance with technical
standards is quoted where appropriate.

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740

P740/EN IN

Page 5/18

Installation (includes a copy of publication P740/EN BR)


Recommendations on unpacking, handling, inspection and storage of the relay.
A guide to the mechanical and electrical installation of the relay is provided
incorporating earthing recommendations.

P740/EN CM Commissioning and Maintenance


Instructions on how to commission the relay, comprising checks on the
calibration and functionality of the relay. A general maintenance policy for the
relay is outlined.
P740/EN PR

Problem Analysis:

P740/EN GC Configuration / Mapping:


Listing of all of the settings contained within the relay together with a brief
description of each.
P740/EN CO External Connection Diagrams
All external wiring connections to the relay.
P740/EN HI

HMI/User Interface (menu content tables)

P740/EN VC Version compatibility


Hardware / Software Version History and Compatibility
Repair Form

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction

Page 6/18

MiCOM P740

3.

USER INTERFACES AND MENU STRUCTURE

3.1

The settings and functions of the MiCOM protection relay can be accessed both from
the front panel keypad and LCD, and via the front and rear communication ports.
Information on each of these methods is given in this section to describe how to get
started using the relay.
Introduction to the relay

3.1.1

Front panel
The front panel of the relay is shown in Figure 1, with the hinged covers at the top
and bottom of the relay shown open. Extra physical protection for the front panel can
be provided by an optional transparent front cover. With the cover in place read only
access to the user interface is possible. Removal of the cover does not compromise
the environmental withstand capability of the product, but allows access to the relay
settings. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the
transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers
are open. If the lower cover is secured with a wire seal, this will need to be removed.
Using the side flanges of the transparent cover, pull the bottom edge away from the
relay front panel until it is clear of the seal tab.
The cover can then be moved vertically down to release the two fixing lugs from their
recesses in the front panel.
Serial N and I*, V Ratings

Top cover

Zn
Vx
Vn

SER N o
DIAG N o

1/5 A 50/60 Hz

V
V

LCD
TRIP

Fixed
function
LEDs

ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE

HEALTHY

User programable
function LEDs

= CLEAR
= READ
= ENTER

Keypad
SK 1

SK 2

Bottom
cover
Battery compartment

Front comms port

Download/monitor port
P0103ENa

FIGURE 1:

RELAY FRONT VIEW (example for MiCOM P742 40 TE)

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 7/18

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in Figure 1:
a 16-character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD).
a 7-key keypad comprising 4 arrow keys ( !, ", # and $ ),
an enter key ( %), a clear key ( & ), and a read key ( ' ).
12 LEDs; 4 fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel and 8
programmable function LEDs on the right hand side.
Under the top hinged cover:
the relay serial number, and the relays current and voltage rating information*.
Under the bottom hinged cover:
battery compartment to hold the 1/2 AA size battery which is used for memory
back-up for the real time clock, event, fault and disturbance records.
a 9-pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay
(up to 15m distance) via an RS232 serial data connection.
a 25-pin female D-type port providing internal signal monitoring and high speed
local downloading of software and language text via a parallel data connection.
The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate
the following conditions:
Trip (Red) indicates that the relay has issued a trip signal. It is reset when the
associated fault record is cleared from the front display. (Alternatively the trip LED
can be configured to be self-resetting)*.
Alarm (Yellow) flashes to indicate that the relay has registered an alarm. This may be
triggered by a fault, event or maintenance record. The LED will flash until the alarms
have been accepted (read), after which the LED will change to constant illumination,
and will extinguish when the alarms have been cleared.
Out of service (Yellow) indicates that the relays protection is unavailable.

3.1.2

Healthy (Green) indicates that the relay is in correct working order, and should be on
at all times. It will be extinguished if the relays self-test facilities indicate that there is
an error with the relays hardware or software. The state of the healthy LED is
reflected by the watchdog contact at the back of the relay.
Relay rear panel
The rear panel of the relay is shown in Figure 2. All current and voltage signals,
digital logic input signals and output contacts are connected at the rear of the relay.
Also connected at the rear is the twisted pair wiring for the rear RS485
communication port, the IRIG-B time synchronising input and the optical fibre rear
communication port which are both optional.

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction

Page 8/18

MiCOM P740

B
2

19

20

D
2

21

10

10

11

12

22

14

13

6
8

10

12

11

3
5

12

11

14

13

16

13

14

15

16

23

15

10

12

18

16

17

18

24

13

16

ANALOG INPUT MODULE

10

12
14

13

16

15
18

18
17

17

17

14

18

17

11

11

15

15

F
2

2
1

1
4

8 LOGICAL OUTPUTS

16 LOGICAL INPUTS
POWER SUPPLY
COPROCESSOR BOARD
(Connexion to CU via optical fibre)
P3710ENa

Figure 2a: P742 - Relay rear view 40TE case

19

20

21

5
7

6
8
10

11

12

22

13

14

15

23

5
7

16

18

24

5
7

6
8
10

16

5
7

6
8
10

16

15

12

5
7

15

6
8
10

5
7

6
8
10

16

15

4
3
5
7

16

15

12
14
13

16

15
18

17

8
10

11
14

13

9
12

18
17

11
14

13

I
2

4
3

12

18
17

11

16

H
2

4
3

14
13

18
17

11
14

13

G
2

4
3

12

18
17

11
14

13

18

17

10

15

15

16

11
14

17

F
2

4
3

12

12
11
13

10

E
2

4
3

D
2

18
17

COPROCESSOR BOARD
(connexion to CU via optic fibre)
24 LOGICAL INPUTS
ANALOG INPUT

Figure 2b: P743 - Relay rear view 60 TE

21 LOGICAL OUTPUTS
POWER SUPPLY

P3711ENa

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 9/18

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

TX

TX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

TX

TX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

TX

TX

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

TX

10

12

11

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

13

CH3

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

TX

RX

CH3

TX

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

TX

TX

RX

CH3

RX

TX

RX

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

1 TO 8 COMMUNICATION BOARDS

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

CH4

10

12

16

16

IRIG-B
8

CH1

RX

CH2

RX

TX

10

12

14
13

TX

11
14

13

TX
RX

16

15

15
18

TX
17

CH4

11

15

TX

TX

14

TX

4
3

M
2

TX

TX

K
2

18

18
17

17

RX

LOGICAL OUTPUT CONTACT BOARD


LOGICAL INPUT CONTACT BOARD

POWER SUPPLY MODULE

CO-PROCESSOR BOARD
OPTIONAL IRIG-B BOARD
P3712ENa

Figure 2c: P741 - Relay rear view 80 TE

Refer to the wiring diagram in Connection Diagrams Chapter (P740/EN CO) for
complete connection details.

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction

Page 10/18
3.2

MiCOM P740

Introduction to the user interfaces and settings options


The relay has three user interfaces:

the front panel user interface via the LCD and keypad.

the front port which supports Courier communication.

The measurement information and relay settings which can be accessed from the
three interfaces are summarised in Table 1.

Keypad/
LCD

Courier

Display & modification of all settings

Digital I/O signal status

Display/extraction of measurements

Display/extraction of fault records

Extraction of disturbance records

Programmable scheme logic settings

Reset of fault & alarm records

Clear event & fault records

Time synchronisation

Control commands
TABLE 1

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740
3.3

Page 11/18

Menu structure
The relays menu is arranged in a tabular structure. Each setting in the menu is
referred to as a cell, and each cell in the menu may be accessed by reference to a
row and column address. The settings are arranged so that each column contains
related settings, for example all of the disturbance recorder settings are contained
within the same column. As shown in Figure 3, the top row of each column contains
the heading which describes the settings contained within that column. Movement
between the columns of the menu can only be made at the column heading level. A
complete list of all of the menu settings is given in Configuration / Mapping Chapter
of the manual.
Column header
Up to 4 protection setting groups
System data

View records

Overcurrent

Earth fault

Overcurrent

Earth fault

Overcurrent

Earth fault

Overcurrent

Earth fault

Column
data
settings

Control & support

FIGURE 3:

Group 1

Group 2

Group 3

Group 4

P0106ENa

Px40 SERIES - MENU STRUCTURE

The menu content tables for P740 are fully described in HMI/User Interface Chapter.
All of the settings in the menu fall into one of three categories: protection settings,
disturbance recorder settings, or control and support (C&S) settings. One of two
different methods is used to change a setting depending on which category the
setting falls into. Control and support settings are stored and used by the relay
immediately after they are entered. For either protection settings or disturbance
recorder settings, the relay stores the new setting values in a temporary scratchpad.
It activates all the new settings together, but only after it has been confirmed that the
new settings are to be adopted. This technique is employed to provide extra security,
and so that several setting changes that are made within a group of protection
settings will all take effect at the same time.

P740/EN IT/D11
Page 12/18
3.3.1

Introduction
MiCOM P740

Central Unit settings


The central Unit settings include the following items:
system data
view records
measurements (1 & 2)
topology
PU configuration & status
date & time
configuration
record control
disturbance recorder
measurement setup
commission tests
opto setup
protection element settings*
busbar element
input labels
output labels

3.3.2

Peripheral Units settings


The central Unit settings include the following items:
system data
view records
measurements
topology
CB condition
CB control
date & time
configuration
CT & VT ratios
record control
disturbance recorder
measurement setup
commission tests
CB monitor
opto setup
protection element settings*
busbar element
backup phase O/C
backup earth O/C
CB fail
supervision
input labels
output labels
* There are four groups of protection settings, with each group containing the same
setting cells. One group of protection settings is selected as the active group, and is
used by the protection elements.

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740
3.4

Page 13/18

Password protection
The menu structure contains three levels of access. The level of access that is enabled
determines which of the relays settings can be changed and is
controlled by entry of two different passwords. The levels of access are summarised
in Table 2.
Access level

Operations enabled

Level 0

No password required Read access to all settings, alarms, event


records and fault records

Level 1

Password 1 or 2

As level 0 plus:
Control commands, e.g.
circuit breaker open/close.
Reset of fault and alarm conditions.
Reset LEDs.
Clearing of event and fault records.

Level 2

Password 2 required

As level 1 plus:

All other settings.


TABLE 2

Each of the two passwords are 4 characters of upper case text. The factory default for
both passwords is AAAA. Each password is user-changeable once it has been
correctly entered. Entry of the password is achieved either by a prompt when a
setting change is attempted, or by moving to the Password cell in the System data
column of the menu. The level of access is independently enabled for each interface,
that is to say if level 2 access is enabled for the rear communication port, the front
panel access will remain at level 0 unless the relevant password is entered at the
front panel. The access level enabled by the password entry will time-out
independently for each interface after a period of inactivity and revert to the default
level. If the passwords are lost an emergency password can be supplied - contact
AREVA with the relays serial number. The current level of access enabled for an
interface can be determined by examining the 'Access level' cell in the 'System data'
column, the access level for the front panel User Interface (UI), can also be found as
one of the default display options.
The relay is supplied with a default access level of 2, such that no password is
required to change any of the relay settings. It is also possible to set the default menu
access level to either level 0 or level1, preventing write access to the relay settings
without the correct password. The default menu access level is set in the Password
control cell which is found in the System data column of the menu (note that this
setting can only be changed when level 2 access is enabled).
3.5

Relay configuration
The relay is a multi-function device which supports numerous different protection,
control and communication features. In order to simplify the setting of the relay,
there is a configuration settings column which can be used to enable or disable
many of the functions of the relay. The settings associated with any function that is
disabled are made invisible, i.e. they are not shown in the menu. To disable a
function change the relevant cell in the Configuration column from Enabled to
Disabled.

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction

Page 14/18

MiCOM P740

The configuration column controls which of the four protection settings groups is
selected as active through the Active settings cell. A protection setting group can
also be disabled in the configuration column, provided it is not the present active
group. Similarly, a disabled setting group cannot be set as the active group.
The column also allows all of the setting values in one group of protection settings to
be copied to another group.
To do this firstly set the Copy from cell to the protection setting group to be copied,
then set the Copy to cell to the protection group where the copy is to be placed. The
copied settings are initially placed in the temporary scratchpad, and will only be used
by the relay following confirmation.

3.6

To restore the default values to the settings in any protection settings group, set the
Restore defaults cell to the relevant group number. Alternatively it is possible to set
the Restore defaults cell to All settings to restore the default values to all of the
relays settings, not just the protection groups settings. The default settings will
initially be placed in the scratchpad and will only be used by the relay after they have
been confirmed. Note that restoring defaults to all settings includes the rear
communication port settings, which may result in communication via the rear port
being disrupted if the new (default) settings do not match those of the master station.
Front panel user interface (keypad and LCD)
When the keypad is exposed it provides full access to the menu options of the relay,
with the information displayed on the LCD.
The !, ", # and $ keys which are used for menu navigation and setting value
changes include an auto-repeat function that comes into operation if any of these
keys are held continually pressed. This can be used to speed up both setting value
changes and menu navigation; the longer the key is held depressed, the faster the
rate of change or movement becomes.
System
frequency

Other default displays

3-phase voltage
Alarm messages

Date and time

C
C

Column 1
System data

Column 2
View records

Data 1.1
Language

Data 2.1
Last record

Data 1.2
Password

Data 2.2
Time and date

Other setting
cells in
column 1

Other setting
cells in
column 2

Data 1.n
Password
level 2

Data 2.n
C - A voltage

Other column headings

C
Note:C key will return
The
to column header
from any menu cell

Column n
Group 4
Overcurrent

Data n.1
I>1 function

Data n.2
I>1 directional

Other setting
cells in
column n

Data n.n
I> char angle
P0105ENa

FIGURE 4:

Px40 SERIES - FRONT PANEL USER INTERFACE

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740
3.6.1

Page 15/18

Default display and menu time-out


The front panel menu has a selectable default display. The relay will time-out and
return to the default display and turn the LCD backlight off after 15 minutes of
keypad inactivity. If this happens any setting changes which have not been confirmed
will be lost and the original setting values maintained.
The contents of the default display can be selected from the following options:
3-phase and neutral current, 3-phase voltage, power, system frequency, date and
time, relay description, or a user-defined plant reference*. The default display is
selected with the Default display cell of the Measuret setup column. Also, from the
default display the different default display options can be scrolled through using the
!and " keys. However the menu selected default display will be restored following
the menu time-out elapsing. Whenever there is an uncleared alarm present in the
relay (e.g. fault record, protection alarm, control alarm etc.) the default display will
be replaced by:
Alarms/Faults
Present
Entry to the menu structure of the relay is made from the default display and is not
affected if the display is showing the Alarms/Faults present message.

3.6.2

Menu navigation and setting browsing


The menu can be browsed using the four arrow keys, following the structure shown
in Figure 4. Thus, starting at the default display the # key will display the first
column heading. To select the required column heading use the !and " keys. The
setting data contained in the column can then be viewed by using the
$ and # keys. It is possible to return to the column header either by holding the
[up arrow symbol] key down or by a single press of the clear key &. It is only
possible to move across columns at the column heading level. To return to the
default display press the # key or the clear key & from any of the column
headings. It is not possible to go straight to the default display from within one of the
column cells using the auto-repeat facility of the # key, as the auto-repeat will stop
at the column heading. To move to the default display, the # key must be released
and pressed again.

3.6.3

Password entry
When entry of a password is required the following prompt will appear:
Enter password
**** Level 1
Note: The password required to edit the setting is the prompt as shown above
A flashing cursor will indicate which character field of the password may be
changed. Press the # and $ keys to vary each character between A and Z.
To move between the character fields of the password, use the ( and " keys.
The password is confirmed by pressing the enter key %. The display will revert to
Enter Password if an incorrect password is entered. At this point a message will be
displayed indicating whether a correct password has been entered and if so what
level of access has been unlocked. If this level is sufficient to edit the selected setting

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction

Page 16/18

MiCOM P740

then the display will return to the setting page to allow the edit to continue. If the
correct level of password has not been entered then the password prompt page will
be returned to. To escape from this prompt press the clear key &. Alternatively, the
password can be entered using the Password cell of the System data column.
For the front panel user interface the password protected access will revert to the
default access level after a keypad inactivity time-out of 15 minutes. It is possible to
manually reset the password protection to the default level by moving to the
Password menu cell in the System data column and pressing the clear key &
instead of entering a password.
3.6.4

Reading and clearing of alarm messages and fault records


The presence of one or more alarm messages will be indicated by the default display
and by the yellow alarm LED flashing. The alarm messages can either be selfresetting or latched, in which case they must be cleared manually. To view the alarm
messages press the read key '. When all alarms have been viewed, but not
cleared, the alarm LED will change from flashing to constant illumination and the
latest fault record will be displayed (if there is one). To scroll through the pages of
this use the ' key. When all pages of the fault record have been viewed, the
following prompt will appear:
Press clear to
reset alarms

To clear all alarm messages press &; to return to the alarms/faults present display
and leave the alarms uncleared, press '. Depending on the password
configuration settings, it may be necessary to enter a password before the alarm
messages can be cleared (see section on password entry). When the alarms have
been cleared the yellow alarm LED will extinguish, as will the red trip LED if it was
illuminated following a trip.
Alternatively it is possible to accelerate the procedure, once the alarm viewer has
been entered using the ' key, the & key can be pressed, this will move the display
straight to the fault record. Pressing & again will move straight to the alarm reset
prompt where pressing & once more will clear all alarms.
3.6.5

Setting changes
To change the value of a setting, first navigate the menu to display the relevant cell.
To change the cell value press the enter key %, which will bring up a flashing cursor
on the LCD to indicate that the value can be changed. This will only happen if the
appropriate password has been entered, otherwise the prompt to enter a password
will appear. The setting value can then be changed by pressing the or " keys. If the
setting to be changed is a binary value or a text string, the required bit or character
to be changed must first be selected using the !and " keys. When the desired new
value has been reached it is confirmed as the new setting value by pressing %.
Alternatively, the new value will be discarded either if the clear button & is pressed
or if the menu time-out occurs.

Introduction

P740/EN IT/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 17/18

For protection group settings and disturbance recorder settings, the changes must be
confirmed before they are used by the relay. To do this, when all required changes
have been entered, return to the column heading level and press the key. Prior to
returning to the default display the following prompt will be given:

Update settings?
Enter or clear
Pressing % will result in the new settings being adopted, pressing & will cause the
relay to discard the newly entered values. It should be noted that, the setting values
will also be discarded if the menu time out occurs before the setting changes have
been confirmed. Control and support settings will be updated immediately after they
are entered, without Update settings? prompt.
3.7

Front communication port user interface


The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector
located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication
and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown
in Figure 5. This port supports the Courier communication protocol only. Courier is
the communication language developed by AREVA to allow communication with its
range of protection relays. The front port is particularly designed for use with the
relay settings program MiCOM S1 which is a Windows 95/NT based software
package.
MiCOM relay

Laptop

SK 2

25 pin
download/monitor port

Battery

9 pin
front comms port
Serial data connector
(up to 15m)

FIGURE 5:

Serial communication port


(COM 1 or COM 2)

FRONT PORT CONNECTION

The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin
connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows:
Pin no. 2
Tx Transmit data
Pin no. 3
Rx Receive data
Pin no. 5
0V Zero volts common

P0107ENb

P740/EN IT/D11

Introduction

Page 18/18

MiCOM P740

None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to
the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below
(if in doubt check your PC manual):
25 Way

9 Way

Pin no. 3

Rx Receive data

Pin no. 2

Tx Transmit data

Pin no. 7

0V Zero volts common

For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the
Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the
PC, as shown in Figure 6. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin
connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one
that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. Note that a common
cause of difficulty with serial data communication is connecting Tx to Tx and Rx to Rx.
This could happen if a cross-over serial connector is used, i.e. one that connects pin
2 to pin 3, and pin 3 to pin 2, or if the PC has the same pin configuration as the
relay.
PC

MiCOM relay

Serial data connector

DCE
Pin 2 Tx
Pin 3 Rx
Pin 5 0V

DTE
Pin 2 Tx
Pin 3 Rx
Pin 5 0V

Note: PC connection shown assuming 9 Way serial port

FIGURE 6:

P0108ENb

PC RELAY SIGNAL CONNECTION

Having made the physical connection from the relay to the PC, the PCs
communication settings must be configured to match those of the relay. The relays
communication settings for the front port are fixed as shown in the table below:
Protocol

Courier

Baud rate

19,200 bits/s

Courier address

Message format

11 bit - 1 start bit, 8 data bits, 1 parity bit


(even parity), 1 stop bit

The inactivity timer for the front port is set at 15 minutes. This controls how long the
relay will maintain its level of password access on the front port. If no messages are
received on the front port for 15 minutes then any password access level that has
been enabled will be revoked.

Hardware Description

P740/EN HW/D11

MiCOM P740

HARDWARE DESCRIPTION

P740/EN HW/D11

Hardware Description
MiCOM P740

Hardware Description

P740/EN HW/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 3/13

CONTENTS
1.

HARDWARE OVERVIEW

1.1

Power supply module

1.2

Main board

1.3

Co-processor board

1.4

Internal Communication board

1.5

Input module

1.6

Input and output boards

1.7

IRIG-B board

2.

HARDWARE MODULES

2.1

Main board

2.2

Co-processor board

2.3

Communication board

2.4

Internal communication buses

2.5

Input module (P742 and P743 only)

10

2.5.1

Transformer board

11

2.5.2

Input board

11

2.5.3

Universal opto isolated logic inputs

11

2.6

Power supply module (including output relays)

12

2.6.1

Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface (K Bus courier))

12

2.6.2

Output relay board

13

2.6.3

Auxiliary power supply

13

2.7

IRIG-B board (P741 only)

13

2.8

Mechanical layout

13

P740/EN HW/D11
Page 4/13

Hardware Description
MiCOM P740

Hardware Description

P740/EN HW/D11

MiCOM P740

1.

Page 5/13

HARDWARE OVERVIEW
The relay hardware is based on a modular design whereby the relay is made up of
several modules which are drawn from a standard range. Some modules are
essential while others are optional depending on the users requirements.
The different modules that can be present in the relay are as follows:

1.1

Power supply module


The power supply module provides a power supply to all of the other modules in the
relay, at three different voltage levels. The power supply board also provides the
RS485 electrical connection (K-bus courier) for the rear communication port. This
communication is used on P741, never on P742 or P743.
On a second board the power supply module contains :

1.2

relays which provide the output contacts (P742 and P743),

an auxiliary power supply (P741).

Main board
The main board performs some functions for the relay (fixed and programmable
scheme logic) and controls the operation of modules which are on its
interconnection bus within the relay. The main board also contains and controls the
user interfaces (LCD, LEDs, keypad and communication interfaces).

1.3

Co-processor board
In P742 and P743, the co-processor board controls the operation of I/O modules
within the relay and manages the communication with the P741 relay.
In P741, the co-processor board controls the communication boards and manages
the communication with others P741 of the system (if present).

1.4

Internal Communication board


Only present within P741 relay.
The communication board manages the communication with the P742 and P743
relays.

1.5

Input module
The input module is only present in P742 and P743 relays. The input module
converts the information contained in the analogue and digital input signals into a
format suitable for the co-processor board. The standard input module consists of
two boards:

a transformer board to provide electrical isolation

a main input board which provides analogue to digital conversion and the
isolated digital inputs.

P740/EN HW/D11

Hardware Description

Page 6/13

1.6

MiCOM P740

Input and output boards


P741

P742

P743

Opto-inputs

8 x UNI(1)

16 x UNI(1)

24 x UNI(1)

Relay outputs

6 n/o and 2 c/o

6 n/o and 2 c/o

15 n/o and 6 c/o

(1) Universal voltage range opto inputs

1.7

n/o normally open


c/o change over

IRIG-B board
This board, which is optional, can be used where an IRIG-B signal is available to
provide an accurate time reference for the relay. IRIG-B board can only be used in
P741 relay and is controlled by the main board.
All modules are connected by a parallel data and address bus which allows the
processor board to send and receive information to and from the other modules as
required. There is also a separate serial data bus for conveying sample data from the
input module to the coprocessor. Following figures show the modules of the relay and
the flow of information between them. There are two independant buses. Through the
first bus, the main board controls the coprocessor board and the IRIG-B board
(optional, only in P741). Through the second bus, the coprocessor board controls the
input/output boards and input module in P742 and P743 relays, it controls the
communication boards in P741 relay. So the coprocessor board is controlled by the
first bus and controls the second bus. Functionnaly, electrically, mechanically both
interconnection buses are very similar.

Hardware Description

P740/EN HW/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 7/13

Relay
Power
Supply

n Communication
Boards
(n=1 to 8)

Universal
Opto
Board

Relay board

Auxiliary
Power Supply

(for Comm. Boards)

Interconnexion buses

Coprocessor
Board

IRIG-B
Board

(Optional)

Interconnexion buses
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY

=
=
=

CLEAR
READ
ENTER

Main board
P3701ENa

Relay
Board

Relay
Board

Universal
Opto
Board

Input
Module

Universal
Opto
Board

P743 Only

Universal
Opto
Board

P743 Only

Relay
Board

P743 Only

Power
Supply

P743 Only

FIGURE 1: MiCOM P741 Architecture

Interconnexion buses

Coprocessor
Board

Interconnexion buses
TRIP
ALARM
OUT OF SERVICE
HEALTHY

=
=
=

CLEAR
READ
ENTER

Main Board
P3702ENa

FIGURE 2: MiCOM P742 & P743 Architecture

P740/EN HW/D11

Hardware Description

Page 8/13

2.

MiCOM P740

HARDWARE MODULES
The relay is based on a modular hardware design where each module performs a
separate function within the relay operation. This section describes the functional
operation of the various hardware modules.

2.1

Main board
The main board is based around a TMS320C32 floating point, 32-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 20MHz. The processor board is
located directly behind the relays front panel which allows the LCD and LEDs to be
mounted on the processor board along with the front panel communication ports.
These comprise the 9-pin D-connector for RS232 serial communications (e.g. using
MiCOM S1 and Courier communications) and the 25-pin D-connector relay test port
for parallel communication.
All serial communication is handled using a two-channel 85C30 serial
communications controller (SCC).
The memory provided on the main processor board is split into two categories,
volatile and non-volatile:
The volatile memory is fast access (zero wait state) SRAM which is used for
the storage and execution of the processor software, and data storage as
required during the processors calculations.

2.2

The non-volatile memory is sub-divided into 3 groups: 2MB of flash memory


for non-volatile storage of software code and text together with default
settings, 256kB of battery backed-up SRAM for the storage of disturbance,
event, fault and maintenance record data and 32kB of E2PROM memory for
the storage of configuration data, including the present setting values.

Co-processor board
The co-processor board is based around a TMS320VC5402 , 16-bit digital signal
processor (DSP) operating at a clock frequency of 100MHz.
The feature of the co-processor board are :

128 K * 16 bits high speed memory for external code execution.

128 K * 16 bits high speed memory for data storage.

Interface with first interconnection bus from main board.

4 K * 16 bits double access memory for communication with main board.

Interface with second interconnection bus towards peripheral boards.

Serial communication interface on optical fiber with 4 full duplex channels.


The communication uses a synchronous protocole with a date rate of 2.5
Mbit/s.
On the co-processor board only 2 of the 4 optical channels are provided.

On board DC-DC converter which gives 3.3V chip power supply from the
interconnection bus 22V rail.

Hardware Description
MiCOM P740

P740/EN HW/D11
Page 9/13

After power on, the main board loads the software in coprocessor board via double
access memory. When software starts, the microprocessor configures the board. After
this, optical communication can begin.
In P741 relay, coprocessor board controls 1 opto board, 1 relay board and up to 8
communication boards via its own interconnection bus.
In P742 and P743 relays, coprocessor board controls opto boards and relay boards
via its own interconnection bus. Coprocessor board provides the sample
synchronisation to input module and receives the samples from input module.
2.3

Communication board
The communication board looks like the coprocessor board. The Differences are :
Four duplex optical channels are provided.

The second interconnection bus is not provided. The communication board


controls no board.

This board is only used within P741 relay. It performs the communication with the
P742 and P743 relays.
Up to 8 communication boards can be interfaced within P741 relay. So up to 32
P742 or P743 relays can be interfaced from a P741 relay.
2.4

Internal communication buses


The relay has two internal interconnection buses :
The first is controlled by the main board. Via its interconnection bus the main
board controls the coprocessor board (P741, P742 & P743) and the IRIG-B
board (P741 only).

The second is controlled by the coprocesseur board. Via its interconnection


bus the coprocessor board controls relay boards (P741, P742 & P743), opto
boards (P741, P742 & P743), input module (P742 & P743), communication
boards (P741).

These two interconnection buses are very similar. Both are based on a 64-way ribbon
cable. The main part of the buses is a parallel link with 6 address lines for board
selection, 16 data lines and control lines. On the main controlled bus, main board
drive address and control lines. On the coprocessor controlled bus, coprocessor
board drive address and control lines.
Other parts of the buses are :
the sample serial link from input module to coprocessor board which loads
analogue channel samples.

power supply which are directly wired between the two interconnection
buses.

serial lines for rear RS485 communication which are also directly wired
between the two interconnection buses. So in any way main board keeps
control of the rear RS485 communication.

P740/EN HW/D11

Hardware Description

Page 10/13
2.5

MiCOM P740

Input module (P742 and P743 only)


The input module provides the interface between the coprocessor board and the
analogue and digital signals coming into the relay. The input module consist of two
PCBs; the main input board and a transformer board.
The P742 and P743 provide four current inputs (3 phases and neutral).
P741 relay dont use this board.
Up to 4 current inputs
CT

Up to 4

CT

Diffn
to
single

Up to 4

Diffn
to
single

Low
pass
filter

Up to 4

Low
pass
filter

16:1
Multiplexer

Buffer

16-bit
ADC

Serial
interface

Serial sample
data bus

Trigger from
processor board

Calibration
E2 PROM

Sample
control

Noise Filter
Threshold
Bus Interface

Parallel bus

FIGURE 3: Main Input Board

8 digital inputs

Hardware Description
MiCOM P740
2.5.1

P740/EN HW/D11
Page 11/13

Transformer board
The transformer board holds up to four current transformers (CTs). The current inputs
will accept either 1A or 5A nominal current (menu and wiring options).
The transformers are used to step-down the currents to levels appropriate to the
relays electronic circuitry and to provide effective isolation between the relay and the
power system. The connection arrangements of the current transformer secondary
provide differential input signals to the main input board to reduce noise.

2.5.2

Input board
The main input board is shown as a block diagram in Figure 3. It provides the
circuitry for the digital input signals and the analogue-to-digital conversion for the
analogue signals. Hence it takes the differential analogue signals from the CTs on the
transformer board, converts these to digital samples and transmits the samples to the
coprocessor board via the sample serial data bus. On the input board the analogue
signals are passed through an anti-alias filter before being multiplexed into a single
analogue-to-digital converter chip. The A D converter provides 16-bit resolution
and a serial data stream output. The digital input signals are opto isolated on this
board to prevent excessive voltages on these inputs causing damage to the relay's
internal circuitry.

2.5.3

Universal opto isolated logic inputs


The P741, P742 and P743 relays are fitted with universal opto isolated logic inputs
that can be programmed for the nominal battery voltage of the circuit of which they
are a part. i.e. thereby allowing different voltages for different circuits e.g. signalling,
tripping. They nominally provide a Logic 1 or ON value for Voltages 80% of the
set voltage and a Logic 0 or OFF value for the voltages 60% of the set voltage.
This lower value eliminates fleeting pickups that may occur during a battery earth
fault, when stray capacitance may present up to 50% of battery voltage across an
input. Each input also has selectable filtering which can be utilised. This allows use of
a pre-set filter of cycle which renders the input immune to induced noise on the
wiring: although this method is secure it can be slow, particularly for inter-tripping.
This can be improved by switching off the cycle filter in which case one of the
following methods to reduce ac noise should be considered. The first method is to use
double pole switching on the input, the second is to use screened twisted cable on the
input circuit.

P740/EN HW/D11

Hardware Description

Page 12/13

2.6

MiCOM P740

Power supply module (including output relays)


The power supply module contains two PCBs, one for the power supply unit itself and
the other for the output relays (P742 and P743) or for an auxiliary power supply
(P741). The power supply board also contains the input and output hardware for the
rear communication port which provides an RS485 communication interface (K-Bus
Courier).

2.6.1

Power supply board (including RS485 communication interface (K Bus courier))


One of three different configurations of the power supply board can be fitted to the
relay. This will be specified at the time of order and depends on the nature of the
supply voltage that will be connected to the relay. The three options are shown in
table 1 below.
Nominal dc range

Nominal ac range

24 48V

dc only

48 110V

30 100V rms

110 250V

100 240V rms

Table 1: Power supply options


The output from all versions of the power supply module are used to provide isolated
power supply rails to all of the other modules within the relay. Three voltage levels
are used within the relay, 5.1V for all of the digital circuits, 16V for the analogue
electronics, e.g. on the input board, and 22V for driving the output relay coils and for
coprocessor and communication boards 3.3V power supply (through on board DCDC converter).
All power supply voltages including the 0V ground line are distributed around the
relay via the 64-way ribbon cables. One further voltage level is provided by the
power supply board which is the field voltage of 48V. This is brought out to terminals
on the back of the relay so that it can be used to drive the optically isolated digital
inputs.
The two other functions provided by the power supply board are the RS485
communications interface and the watchdog contacts for the relay. The RS485
interface is used with the relays rear communication port to provide communication
using K Bus Courier. The RS485 hardware supports half-duplex communication and
provides optical isolation of the serial data being transmitted and received.
All internal communication of data from the power supply board is conducted via the
output relay board which is connected to the parallel bus.
The watchdog facility provides two output relay contacts, one normally open and one
normally closed which are driven by the coprocessor board. These are provided to
give an indication that the relay is in a healthy state.

Hardware Description
MiCOM P740
2.6.2

P740/EN HW/D11
Page 13/13

Output relay board


The output relay board holds eight relays, six with normally open contacts and two
with changeover contacts. The relays are driven from the 22V power supply line. The
relays state is written to or read from using the parallel data bus.
In model P743, additional output contacts may be provided, through the use of up to
two extra relay boards. In this case only 5 normally open contacts are used per
board.

2.6.3

Auxiliary power supply


In P741 the power supply module contains main power supply and an auxiliary
power supply. The auxiliary power supply adds power on 22 V rail for the up to 8
communication boards within the relay.
The three input voltage options are the same as for main supply. The relay board is
provided as an alone board.

2.7

IRIG-B board (P741 only)


The IRIG-B board is an order option which can be fitted to provide an accurate timing
reference for the relay. This can be used wherever an IRIG-B signal is available. The
IRIG-B signal is connected to the board via a BNC connector on the back of the relay.
The timing information is used to synchronise the relays internal real-time clock to an
accuracy of 1ms. The internal clock is then used for the time tagging of the event,
fault maintenance and disturbance records.

2.8

Mechanical layout
The case materials of the relay are constructed from pre-finished steel which has a
conductive covering of aluminium and zinc. This provides good earthing at all joints
giving a low impedance path to earth which is essential for performance in the
presence of external noise. The boards and modules use a multi-point earthing
strategy to improve the immunity to external noise and minimise the effect of circuit
noise. Ground planes are used on boards to reduce impedance paths and spring
clips are used to ground the module metalwork.
Heavy duty terminal blocks are used at the rear of the relay for the current and
voltage signal connections. Medium duty terminal blocks are used for the digital logic
input signals, the output relay contacts, the power supply and the rear communication
port. ST connectors are used for the optical communication. A BNC connector is used
for the optional IRIG-B signal. 9-pin and 25-pin female D-connectors are used at the
front of the relay for data communication.
Inside the relay the PCBs plug into the connector blocks at the rear, and can be
removed from the front of the relay only. The connector blocks to the relays CT
inputs are provided with internal shorting links inside the relay which will
automatically short the current transformer circuits before they are broken when the
board is removed.
The front panel consists of a membrane keypad with tactile dome keys, an LCD and
12 LEDs mounted on an aluminium backing plate.

Functional Description

P740/EN FT/D11

MiCOM P740

FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

P740/EN FT/D11

FunctionalDescription
MiCOM P740

Functional Description

P740/EN FT/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/10

CONTENTS

1.

SOFTWARE OVERVIEW

1.1

Real-time operating system

1.2

System services software

1.3

Platform software

1.4

Communication software

1.5

Protection & control software

2.

RELAY SOFTWARE

2.1

Operating system

2.2

System services software

2.3

Communication software

2.4

Platform software

2.4.1

Record logging

2.4.2

Settings database

2.4.3

Database interface

2.5

Protection and control software

2.5.1

Overview - protection and control distribution

2.5.2

Topology software

2.5.3

Signal processing

2.5.4

Programmable scheme logic

2.5.5

Event and Fault Recording

10

2.5.6

Disturbance recorder

10

P740/EN FT/D11
Page 2/10

Functional Description
MiCOM P740

Functional Description

P740/EN FT/D11

MiCOM P740

1.

Page 3/10

SOFTWARE OVERVIEW
The busbar protection is a distributed system composed of two different software: the
first one is used in central unit (P741) and the second one in peripheral units (P742 &
P743). The whole of functions implemented in P740 relays can be split into five
elements:
1.

the operating system,

2.

the system services software,

3.

the platform software,

4.

the communication software,

5.

the protection and control software.

Protection & Control software


Measurements & event,
fault & disturbance records

Disturbance
recorder task

Programmable &
fixed scheme logic

Protection
algorithms

Signal processing &


saturation detection

Topology
algorithms

Platform software

Settings
database

Protection &
control settings
Data exchanged
between CU & PU:
Curent samples
& signal quality ;
Trip order ;
Internal courrier com. ;
Date & time.

Communication software

Sample data,
Logic inputs &
Outputs contacts

Front panel interface


(LCD & Keypad)

Event, Fault,
Disturbance,
Maintenance
record logging.

Local & remote


communications
interface - Courier

Control of interfaces to keypad,


LCD, LEDs, Front & Rear comm. ports

System services software

Relay hardware

FIGURE 1: Software Overview

P3704ENa

P740/EN FT/D11

Functional Description

Page 4/10
1.1

MiCOM P740

Real-time operating system


As explain in the hardware overview, each relay contains one main board and one
coprocessor board. These two boards use two different operating system:

1.2

For main board software: a real time operating system is used to provide a
framework for the different parts of the relays software to operate within.
To this end the software is split into tasks. The real-time operating system is
responsible for scheduling the processing of these tasks such that they are
carried out in the time available and in the desired order of priority.

For coprocessor board software: a sequencer manages all the functions


implemented on the coprocessor board. Each function is executed at fixed
frequency; consequently the CPU load of the coprocessor is fixed and
independent of the networks frequency.

System services software


The system services software provides the low-level control of the relay hardware. For
example, the system services software controls the boot of the relays software from
the non-volatile flash EPROM memory at power-on, and provides driver software for
the user interface via the LCD and keypad, and via the serial communication ports.
The system services software provides an interface layer between the control of the
relays hardware and the rest of the relay software.

1.3

Platform software
The platform software deals with the management of the relay settings, the user
interfaces and logging of event, alarm, fault and maintenance records. All of the
relay settings are stored in a database within the relay which provides direct
compatibility with Courier communications.
The platform software notifies the protection & control software of all setting changes
and logs data as specified by the protection & control software.

1.4

Communication software
The communication software manages optical fibre communication between the
central unit and the peripheral units. This includes the control of data exchanged
transmitted and the synchronisation of peripheral units. With this object, the
communication software interfaces with the sequencer used in coprocessors boards.

1.5

Protection & control software


The protection and control software performs the calculations for all of the protection
algorithms for all the protections algorithms of the P740 relays. This includes digital
signal processing such as saturation detection, Fourier filtering and ancillary tasks
such as the measurements. The protection & control software interfaces with the
platform software for settings changes and logging of records, and with the system
services software for acquisition of sample data and access to output relays and
digital opto-isolated inputs.

Functional Description
MiCOM P740

2.

P740/EN FT/D11
Page 5/10

RELAY SOFTWARE
The relay software was introduced in the overview of the relay at the start of this
chapter. The software can be considered to be made up of five sections:

the operating system

the system services software

the communication software

the platform software

the protection & control software

This section describes in detail the latter two of these, the platform software and the
protection & control software, which between them control the functional behaviour of
the relay. Figure 2 shows the structure of the relay software.
2.1

2.2

Operating system

Real-time operating system for main board: the real-time operating system is used to
schedule the processing of the tasks to ensure that they are processed in the time
available and in the desired order of priority. The operating system is also
responsible in part for controlling the communication between the software tasks
through the use of operating system messages.

Sequencer for coprocessor and communication boards: the sequencer executed all
functions at fixed frequency depending of the priority of the functions. The highest
frequency, 2400Hz, is the frequency of sample acquisition, signal processing and trip
decision. To start analog acquisition at the same time on all peripheral units, the
sequencers of all peripheral units and central unit are synchronized and control the
analog acquisition interfacing with system services software.
System services software
As shown in figure 3, the system services software provides the interface between the
relays hardware and the higher-level functionality of the platform software and the
protection & control software. For example, the system services software provides
drivers for items such as the LCD display, the keypad and the remote communication
ports, and controls the boot of the processor and downloading of the processor code
into SRAM from non-volatile flash EPROM at power up.

2.3

Communication software
In accordance with sequencer used in coprocessor board, the communication
software sends frames at fixed frequency equal to 2400Hz. Likewise the contents of
the frames is independent of the frequency and of the status of the protections. The
frames are split in fixed parts according to the priority of each application. For
example trip order and current sample are respectively transmitted at 2400Hz and
1200Hz whereas the internal courier communication or date & time are exchange at
low frequency.

P740/EN FT/D11

Functional Description

Page 6/10

MiCOM P740

PERIPHERAL UNIT
Coprocessor board

Main board

Local and global


measurements

Fixed scheme
logic

Programmable
scheme logic

Overcurrent
protection

Saturation detection
algorithm

Local Topology

Event & fault


recording

Logic of breaker
failure

Disturbance recorder
of peripheral unit

Signal processing & local confirmation


threshold for busbar protection

PERIPHERAL UNIT
PERIPHERAL UNIT
Optical
Fibre

PERIPHERAL UNIT

CENTRAL UNIT
Coprocessor &
communications boards
Sum of current for busbar protection

Fixed scheme
logic

Global
topology

Main board
Programmable
scheme logic

Event & fault


recording

Disturbance recorder
of central unit
P3705ENa

FIGURE 2: MiCOM P740 system overview

Functional Description
MiCOM P740

2.4

P740/EN FT/D11
Page 7/10

Platform software
The platform software has three main functions:

2.4.1

to control the logging of records that are generated by the protection


software, including alarms and event, fault, and maintenance records.

to store and maintain a database of all of the relays settings in non-volatile


memory.

to provide the internal interface between the settings database and each of
the relays user interfaces, i.e. the front panel interface and the front and
rear communication ports, using Courier communication protocol.

Record logging
The logging function is provided to store all alarms, events, faults and maintenance
records. The records for all of these incidents are logged in battery backed-up SRAM
in order to provide a non-volatile log of what has happened. The relay maintains four
logs: one each for up to 32 alarms, 250 event records, 5 fault records and 5
maintenance records. The logs are maintained such that the oldest record is
overwritten with the newest record. The logging function can be initiated from the
protection software or the platform software is responsible for logging of a
maintenance record in the event of a relay failure. This includes errors that have been
detected by the platform software itself or error that are detected by either the system
services or the protection software function.

2.4.2

Settings database
The settings database contains all of the settings and data for the relay, including the
protection, disturbance recorder and control & support settings. The settings are
maintained in non-volatile E2 PROM memory. The platform softwares management
of the settings database includes the responsibility of ensuring that only one user
interface modifies the settings of the database at any one time. This feature is
employed to avoid conflict between different parts of the software during a setting
change. For changes to protection settings and disturbance recorder settings, the
platform software operates a scratchpad in SRAM memory. This allows a number of
setting changes to be applied to the protection elements, disturbance recorder and
saved in the database in E2 PROM. (See also Introduction Chapter on the user
interface). If a setting change affects the protection & control task, the database
advises it of the new values.

2.4.3

Database interface
The other function of the platform software is to implement the relays internal
interface between the database and each of the relays user interfaces. The database
of settings and measurements must be accessible from all of the relays user
interfaces to allow read and modify operations. The platform software presents the
data in the appropriate format for each user interface.

P740/EN FT/D11

Functional Description

Page 8/10
2.5

MiCOM P740

Protection and control software


The protection and control software is responsible for processing all of the protection
elements and measurement functions of the relay. To achieve this it has to
communicate with the system services software, the communication software and the
platform software as well as organize its own operations. The protection software has
the highest priority of any of the software tasks in the relay in order to provide the
fastest possible protection response.

2.5.1

Overview - protection and control distribution


The figure 2 shows the parts of AREVA software and their allocation on the different
boards of the peripheral and central units.
The P740 relays contained two global protections, busbar protection and circuit
breaker failure, and one local function, overcurrent protection. Overcurrent protection
is implemented on peripheral unit and is totally independent of the central unit. On
the contrary, busbar protection and circuit breaker failure are distributed between
central unit and peripheral units. Local functions such as saturation detection
algorithm, logic of circuit breaker failure and local confirmation threshold are
performed on each peripheral unit. Sum of current, logic of differential protection
and circuit breaker failure are processed on central unit.

2.5.2

Topology software
Topology algorithm determines dynamically the electric scheme of the substation
from the auxiliary contact of circuit breaker and isolators. The results of local topology
performed on peripheral unit are sending to central unit which determines global
topology of the substation. At the end of process, central unit know the node of
current and zone to trip according to the fault location.

2.5.3

Signal processing
The sampling frequency of analogue signal is fixed to 2400Hz apart from the electric
network frequency.
To ensure that the frequency is identical on each PU, analog acquisition is based on
interruption signal from communication software. Central unit send frames on optical
fibers in diffusion towards all peripheral units. So they received data at the same
instant, this reception signal starts the acquisition of analog signal.
The main signal processing algorithms are:

Flux calculation and prediction algorithm to detect CT saturation

Zero sequence supervision

Detection of signal variation

Local threshold to block busbar protection on external fault

All this information are transmitted to central unit with the sample of current, they
represent signal quality. The sum of current is processed in central unit each 1200Hz
but the signal processing is executed at 2400Hz on peripheral unit.

Functional Description
MiCOM P740

P740/EN FT/D11
Page 9/10

The protection and control calculates the Fourier components for the analogue
signals. The Fourier components are calculated using a one-cycle, 48-sample
Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT). The DFT is always calculated using the last cycle of
samples from the 2-cycle buffer, i.e. the most recent data is used. The DFT used in
this way extracts the power frequency fundamental component from the signal and
produces the magnitude and phase angle of the fundamental in rectangular
component format. The DFT provides an accurate measurement of the fundamental
frequency component, and effective filtering of harmonic frequencies and noise. This
performance is achieved in conjunction with the relay input module which provides
hardware anti-alias filtering to attenuate frequencies above the half sample rate. The
Fourier components of the input current signals are stored in memory so that they can
be accessed by all of the protection elements algorithms. The samples from the input
module are also used in an unprocessed form by the disturbance recorder for
waveform recording and to calculate true rms values of current.
2.5.4

Programmable scheme logic


The purpose of the programmable scheme logic (PSL) is to allow the relay user to
configure an individual protection scheme to suit their own particular application. This
is achieved through the use of programmable logic gates and delay timers.
The input to the PSL is any combination of the status of the digital input signals from
the opto-isolators on the input board, the outputs of the protection elements, e.g.
protection starts and trips, and the outputs of the fixed protection scheme logic. The
fixed scheme logic provides the relays standard protection schemes. The PSL itself
consists of software logic gates and timers. The logic gates can be programmed to
perform a range of different logic functions and can accept any number of inputs.
The timers are used either to create a programmable delay, and/or to condition the
logic outputs, e.g. to create a pulse of fixed duration on the output regardless of the
length of the pulse on the input. The outputs of the PSL are the LEDs on the front
panel of the relay and the output contacts at the rear.
The execution of the PSL logic is event driven; the logic is processed whenever any of
its inputs change, for example as a result of a change in one of the digital input
signals or a trip output from a protection element. Also, only the part of the PSL logic
that is affected by the particular input change that has occurred is processed. This
reduces the amount of processing time that is used by the PSL. The protection and
control software updates the logic delay timers and checks for a change in the PSL
input signals every time it runs.
This system provides flexibility for the user to create their own scheme logic design.
However, it also means that the PSL can be configured into a very complex system,
and because of this setting of the PSL is implemented through the PC support MiCOM
S1.

P740/EN FT/D11
Page 10/10
2.5.5

Functional Description
MiCOM P740

Event and Fault Recording


A change in any digital input signal or protection element output signal causes an
event record to be created. When this happens, the protection and control task sends
a message to the supervisor task to indicate that an event is available to be processed
and writes the event data to a fast buffer in SRAM which is controlled by the
supervisor task. When the supervisor task receives either an event or fault record
message, it instructs the platform software to create the appropriate log in battery
backed-up SRAM. The operation of the record logging to battery backed-up SRAM is
slower than the supervisors buffer. This means that the protection software is not
delayed waiting for the records to be logged by the platform software. However, in
the rare case when a large number of records to be logged are created in a short
period of time, it is possible that some will be lost if the supervisors buffer is full
before the platform software is able to create a new log in battery backed-up SRAM.
If this occurs then an event is logged to indicate this loss of information.

2.5.6

Disturbance recorder
The disturbance recorder operates as a separate task from the protection and control
task. It can record the waveforms for up to 8 analogue channels and the values of up
to 32 digital signals. For peripheral unit the recording time is user selectable up to a
maximum of 10 seconds and for central unit the record duration is fixed to 600ms.
The disturbance recorder is supplied with data by the protection and control task once
per cycle. The disturbance recorder collates the data that it receives into the required
length disturbance record. It attempts to limit the demands it places on memory
space by saving the analogue data in compressed format whenever possible. This is
done by detecting changes in the analogue input signals and compressing the
recording of the waveform when it is in a steady-state condition. The compressed
disturbance records can be decompressed by MiCOM S1 which can also store the
data in COMTRADE format, thus allowing the use of other packages to view the
recorded data.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

APPLICATION NOTES

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/103

CONTENTS

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1

Protection of Substation Busbars

1.2
1.2.1

P740 Scheme
Protection features

5
6

1.2.2

Non-Protection Features

2.

APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

2.1

Configuration Columns

2.2
2.2.1

Busbar Biased Current Differential Protection


Operating principle

11
11

2.2.2

Application of Kirchoffs law

11

2.3
2.3.1

Central Unit
Differential Protection Configuration

13
13

2.3.2

Bias Characteristic and Differential current setting

14

2.3.3

Scheme supervision by "check zone element

14

2.3.4

Sensitive earth fault element

15

2.3.5

Current Circuit Supervision

19

2.3.6

Threshold coherency.

19

2.3.7

Signal Quality

20

2.3.8

Tripping Criteria

21

2.4
2.4.1

Peripheral Unit
Busbar Elements

21
21

2.4.1.1

Busbar Protection Configuration

21

2.4.1.2

Busbar Trip Confirmation (87BB)


or Central Breaker Fail Trip Confirmation (50BF)

22

2.4.2

Non-directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection

22

2.4.2.1

IDMT Characteristics

25

2.4.3

Non-Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection

25

2.4.4

External Fault Detection by High-Set Overcurrent or Earth Fault Element

26

2.4.4.1

Application Example

26

2.4.5

Supervision

27

2.4.6

Zero Sequence Current (O) Supervision.

28

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 2/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

3.

CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL (CBF)

29

3.1

Distributed Tripping, Control and Indication Elements (Peripheral Units) 29

3.2
3.2.1

Circuit Breaker Fail Criteria


Current Criterion

30
30

3.2.2

Logic Criterion

30

3.2.2.1

Overcurrent Criterion

30

3.3
3.3.1

Processing A Circuit Breaker Failure Condition


Internally Initiated CBF i.e. Tripping from the Differential Element 87BB

30
32

3.3.1.1

Description of the Logic for Internally Initiated CBF

33

3.3.1.1.1

Initial Trip

33

3.3.1.1.2

Re-Trip after time tBF1

33

3.3.1.1.3

Back Trip after time tBF2

33

3.3.2

Externally Initiated 50BF

34

3.3.2.1

Local re-trip after time tBf3

35

3.3.2.2

General zone trip after time tBF4

35

3.3.3

Separate external 50BF protection to the busbar protection

35

4.

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS

36

4.1
4.1.1

CT Mismatch
Adjusting the Scheme Base Ratio

37
37

4.2
4.2.1

CT Requirements
Notation

38
38

4.2.2

Feeders connected to sources of significant power (i.e. lines and generators)

39

4.2.3

Out of service feeders or those with low power contribution (low infeed)

39

4.2.4

CT Specification according to IEC 185, 44-6 and BS 3938 (British Standard)

39

4.2.5

Support of IEEE C Class CTs

41

4.3

CT Saturation detection

42

4.4

CT Location

45

5.

CIRCUIT BREAKER FUNCTION

46

5.1
5.1.1

Circuit breaker state monitoring


Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Features

46
46

5.2
5.3
5.4

Circuit Breaker Control


Trip relays
Suggested Trip Circuit Supervision using psl editor

47
49
49

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 3/103

6.

ISOLATION AND REDUCED FUNCTION MODE

52

6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4

Central processing unit (P741)


Peripheral Units (P742 and P743)
System operation under failed communications situation
Waiting Configuration

52
53
57
57

7.

TOPOLOGY

58

7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.5.1
7.5.2
7.5.3
7.5.4

Topology Configurator
58
Nodal Assignment
59
Topology Communication
59
Topology data
59
Topology processing
60
CTs on one side of bus coupler, CB closes before status acquisition.
60
CTs on both sides of bus coupler, CB closes before status acquisition.
61
CTs on one side of bus coupler, CB closed and fault evolves between CT and CB.62
CTs on both sides of coupler, CB closed and fault evolves between CT and CB. 64

8.

PSL CONFIGURATION AND INTEGRATION

65

8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6

Factory default settings


Logic input mapping
Relay output mapping
Relay output conditioning
LED mapping
LED output conditioning
Fault recorder start mapping

65
65
66
67
68
68
68

9.

COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN PU AND CU

69

9.1
9.2
9.3

Communications link
Direct optical fibre link, 850nm multi-mode fibre
Optical budgets

69
69
70

10.
UNDERTAKING A NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIAL BUSBAR PROTECTION
PROJECT 71
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5

General Substation information


Short Circuit Levels
Switchgear
Cubicle specifications
Substation Architecture

71
71
71
72
72

11.

STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS

73

12.

MEASUREMENTS

84

12.1
12.2
12.3

Measured currents
Sequence currents
Settings

84
84
84

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 4/103

MiCOM P740

12.3.1

Common Conventional Ratio (Ibp)

85

12.3.2
12.3.3
12.3.4

Default Display
Local Values
Remote Values

85
85
85

13.

EVENT & FAULT RECORDS

86

13.1
13.1.1
13.1.2
13.1.3
13.1.3.1
13.1.3.2
13.1.3.3
13.1.3.4
13.1.3.5
13.1.4
13.1.5
13.1.6

Types of Event
Change of state of opto-isolated inputs
Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
Relay alarm conditions
Protection element starts and trips
General events
Fault records
Maintenance reports
Setting Changes
Resetting of event/fault records
Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 Support Software
Event Filtering

89
89
89
90
90
90
91
91
91
91
92
93

14.

DISTURBANCE RECORDER

94

15.

COMMISSIONING TEST MENU

97

15.1
15.2
15.3
15.4
15.5
15.5.1
15.5.2
15.6
15.7
15.8
15.9
15.10
15.11
15.12

Opto I/P status


Relay O/P status
Test Port status
LED status
Test mode
Test mode for PU
Test mode for CU
Test pattern
Contact test
Test LEDs
Busbar Monitoring (only in CU)
Busbar (BB) & Circuit Breaker Fail (CBF) Disable (only in CU)
Position Pattern (only in PU)
Position Test (only in PU)

98
98
99
99
99
99
100
100
100
100
101
101
101
101

16.

MONITOR TOOL

102

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

1.

INTRODUCTION

1.1

Protection of Substation Busbars

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 5/103

The busbars in a substation are possibly one of the most critical elements in a power
system. If a fault is not cleared or isolated quickly, not only could substantial damage
to the busbars and primary plant result, but also a substantial loss of supply to all
consumers who depend upon the substation for their electricity. It is therefore
essential that the protection associated with them provide reliable, fast and
discriminative operation.
As with any power system the continuity of supply is of the utmost importance,
however, faults that occur on substation busbars are rarely transient but more usually
of a permanent nature. Circuit breakers should, therefore, be tripped and not subject
to any auto-reclosure.
The busbar protection must also remain stable for faults that occur outside of the
protected zone as these faults will usually be cleared by external protection devices. In
the case of a circuit breaker failure, it may be necessary to open all of the adjacent
circuit breakers, this can be achieved by issuing a backtrip to the busbar protection.
Security and stability are key requirements of a busbar protection scheme. Should the
busbar protection maloperate under such conditions substantial loss of supply could
result unnecessarily.
Many different busbar configurations exist. A typical arrangement is a double busbar
substation with a transfer bar. The positioning of the primary plant can also vary and
also needs to be considered which in turn introduces endless variations, all of which
have to be able to be accommodated within the busbar protection scheme.
Backup protection is also an important feature of any protection scheme. In the event
of equipment failure, such as signalling equipment or switchgear for example it is
necessary to provide alternative forms of fault clearance. It is desirable to provide
backup protection, which can operate with minimum time delay and yet discriminate
with other protection elsewhere on the system.
1.2

P740 Scheme
Using the latest numerical technology, MiCOM relays include devices designed for
application to a wide range of power system plant such as motors, generators,
busbars, feeders, overhead lines and cables.
Each relay in the range is designed around a common hardware and software
platform in order to achieve a high degree of commonality between products. One
such product is the P740 busbar protection scheme. The scheme has been designed
to cater for the protection of a wide range of busbar configurations. The scheme
comprises of three relays the Central Unit - P741, and the Peripheral Units P742
and P743. Which, together with the topology configurator software, allows flexibility
for all configurations.
The P740 range also includes a comprehensive range of non-protection features to
aid with power system analysis and fault analysis.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 6/103
1.2.1

MiCOM P740

Protection features
There are three modules that make up the P740 scheme. The P741 is the Central
Unit (CU), whilst the P742 and P743 are both variants of the Peripheral Unit (PU).
The central unit co-ordinates the scheme, receiving signals from all the peripheral
units associated with the protected busbar(s) and acting on these signals, initiating a
buszone protection trip when necessary. One peripheral unit is associated with each
CT location, usually one per incomer/feeder and one/two for each bus coupler/bus
section depending of number of CT (1 or 2). The peripheral units acquire the
analogue signals from the associated CT and the binary signals from the auxiliary
contacts of the primary plant (CB and isolator(s)). The peripheral units also
incorporate the main circuit breaker failure logic together with backup protection.
The difference between the P742 and P743 is the amount of I/O that each can
accommodate. The P743 allows for increased I/O, this is found to be particularly
useful in double busbar applications. Especially where single pole breakers and a
transfer bar are employed, in these applications the I/O requirements are large in
comparison to those required for a single busbar application where a P742 may be
more suitable.
The main features of the P740 scheme are summarised below:

Current differential busbar protection Phase segregated biased differential


protection (*) provides the main protection element for the scheme. This
protection provides high-speed discriminative protection for all fault types
(Note:

* Sometimes referred to as low impedance type)

Sensitive differential earth fault protection provided for high impedance


earthed systems and incorporates bias current control to guarantee stability
under external faults

Non-directional phase fault over current protection provides two stage backup
protection

Non-directional earth fault protection provides two stage backup protection

Low Burden Allows the protection to be installed in series with other


equipment on a common CT secondary

Accommodates different CT classes , ratios and manufacturer

Circuit breaker failure protection two stage breaker fail logic that can be
initiated internally or externally.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740
1.2.2

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 7/103

Non-Protection Features
The non-protection features for the scheme are summarised below:

Scheme can be centralised/distributed if space is not available to locate the


busbar protection centrally it is possible to decentralise the scheme and locate
the units within other protection cubicles.

Local, zone and scheme measurements various measurements are available


locally via the relay LCD or remotely via the serial communication link

Event, fault and disturbance recording Comprehensive post fault analysis


available via event lists, disturbance records and fault records which can be
accessed locally via the relay LCD or remotely via the serial communication link
(PU -> CU)

Real time clock/time synchronisation Time synchronisation available via


IRIG-B input (option in Central Unit)

Four settings groups Independent remotely selectable setting groups to allow


for customer specific applications

CB and isolator state monitoring indication of the circuit breaker/isolator


position via the auxiliary contacts, scheme acts accordingly should discrepancy
conditions be detected

CB control available locally via the HMI

Commissioning test facilities

Continuous self monitoring extensive self checking routines to ensure


maximum reliability

Communications supervision detects communication failure between units


and enables remedial action to be taken e.g. switch to communication
independent backup protection locally and disregard feeder at a zone level

Graphical programmable scheme logic allowing user defined protection and


control logic to be tailored to the specific application

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 8/103

2.

MiCOM P740

APPLICATION OF INDIVIDUAL PROTECTION FUNCTIONS


The following sections detail the individual protection functions in addition to where
and how they may be applied. Each section also provides an extract from the
respective menu columns to demonstrate how the settings are actually applied to the
relay.
Each relay in the P740 series has a Configuration column. As this affects all of the
protection functions it is described in the following section.

2.1

Configuration Columns
The configuration column for the Central Unit is shown in the following table:MENU TEXT

DEFAULT SETTING

AVAILABLE SETTING

Restore Defaults

No Operation

No Operation
All Settings
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4

Setting Group

Select via Menu

Select via Menu


Select via Optos

Active Settings

Group 1

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Save Changes

No Operation

No Operation
Save
Abort

Copy From

Group 1

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Copy to

No Operation

No Operation
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Setting Group 1

Enabled

Enabled/Disabled

Setting Group 2

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Setting Group 3

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Setting Group 4

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Diff Busbar Prot

Enabled

Enabled/Disabled

Optos Setup

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Input Labels

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Output Labels

Visible

Visible/Invisible

CONFIGURATION

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
MENU TEXT

Page 9/103
DEFAULT SETTING

AVAILABLE SETTING

Recorder Control

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Disturb Recorder

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Measure't Setup

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Comms Settings

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Commission Test

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Setting Values

Primary

Primary/Secondary

PU in service

PU7 to PU39 (0 = on) (1 = off)

PU connected

PU from address 7 to address 39

CONFIGURATION

Table 1
In the central unit an additional configuration column PU Conf & Status is present
to configure the hardware to the software topology.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT SETTING

AVAILABLE SETTING

PU CONF & STATUS


PU in service

Listing the PUs in service. For example a topology scheme


may define 12 PU:
5 PU for current phase and 7 PU for future.
This would be set to 5.

PU connected

This give a list of PUs connected and synchronized with the


CU. After reboot the CU waits for the list of connected PUs
to equal the PUs in service before enabling the busbar
protection.
If there is a discrepancy the CU will not start and the scheme
will be locked.

PU topo valid

This gives a list of PUs with valid topology data. After


rebooting the CU checks the topology configuration on all
PUs and reports the result in this cell.
If there is a discrepancy the central unit will not start and the
scheme will be locked.

Reset Circt Flt

After a circuitry fault has been detected, the user must accept
and clear the error, using the command from this cell.

Circuitry Fault

List of zones blocked for circuitry fault

Circ Fault Phase

Phase in circuitry fault

Table 2

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 10/103

MiCOM P740

The configuration column for the Peripheral Unit is shown in table 3 below:MENU TEXT

DEFAULT SETTING

AVAILABLE SETTING

Restore Defaults

No Operation

No Operation
All Settings
Setting Group 1
Setting Group 2
Setting Group 3
Setting Group 4

Setting Group

Select via Menu

Select via Menu


Select via Optos

Active Settings

Group 1

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Save Changes

No Operation

No Operation
Save
Abort

Copy From

Group 1

Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Copy to

No Operation

No Operation
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4

Setting Group 1

Enabled

Enabled/Disabled

Setting Group 2

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Setting Group 3

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Setting Group 4

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

BB Trip Confirm

Enabled

Enabled/Disabled

Optos Setup

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Overcurrent Prot

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

earth Fault Prot

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

CB Fail & I>

Enabled

Enabled/Disabled

Input Labels

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Output Labels

Visible

Visible/Invisible

CT & VT Ratios

Visible

Visible/Invisible

Recorder Control

Invisible

Visible/Invisible

Disturb Recorder

Invisible

Visible/Invisible

Measure't Setup

Invisible

Visible/Invisible

CONFIGURATION

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 11/103

MENU TEXT

DEFAULT SETTING

AVAILABLE SETTING

Commission Tests

Invisible

Visible/Invisible

Setting Values

Secondary

Primary/Secondary

CONFIGURATION

Table 3
The aim of the configuration column is to allow general configuration from a single
point in the menu. Items that are disabled or made invisible do not appear in the
main relay menu.
2.2

Busbar Biased Current Differential Protection


The primary protection element of the P740 scheme is phase segregated biased
current differential protection. The technique used is purely numerical and uses
nodal analysis throughout the scheme, on a per zone and per scheme basis. The
analysis is carried out in the central unit therefore communication between the central
unit and all peripheral units is essential. This is achieved via a direct optical
connection utilising a 2.5 Mbits/sec data rate.

2.2.1

Operating principle
The basic operating principle of the differential protection is based on the application
of Kirchhoffs law. This compares the amount of current entering and leaving the
protected zone. Under normal operation, the amount of current flowing into the area
concerned is equal in to the amount of the current flowing out of the area. Therefore
the currents cancel out. In contrast, when a fault occurs the differential current that
arises is equal to the derived fault current.

S1

S2

S3

Ii1

Ii2

Ii3

x
x
x
x

Io1

Io2

Ii = | Iin |
Io = | Ion |

Io3

Ibias = I i + Io
Idiff = I i - I o

Io4

Substation Simplified Scheme

Import Ii

Export Io

P3766ENa

Figure 1:
2.2.2

Differential busbar protection principle

Application of Kirchoffs law


Several methods of summation can be used for a differential protection scheme:

Vector sum

Instantaneous sum

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 12/103

MiCOM P740

The algorithms applied in MiCOM P740 use the instantaneous sum method. This
method has the advantage of cancelling the harmonic and DC components of
external origin in the calculation and in particular under transformer inrush
conditions.
The other advantage of using an instantaneous sum lies in the speed of decision,
which in turn is dictated by the sampling frequency.
Differential currents may also be generated under external fault conditions due to CT
error. To provide stability for through fault conditions the relay adopts a biasing
technique, which effectively raises the setting of the relay in proportion to the through
fault current thereby preventing relay maloperation.
The bias current is the scalar sum of the currents in the protected zone. Each of these
calculations is done on a per phase basis for each node and then summated.
Figure 2 shows the characteristics of the P740 scheme phase differential element.

i diff (t)

i1

Trip

s
bia
e
g
nta

i2

=
-k

20

to

90

i3

rc
Pe

i4

ID > 2

ID > 1

i diff (t) = i1 + i2 + i3 + i4 =
i bias (t) = i 1
Figure 2:

i2

i3

Restrain

Is

i bias (t)

Si

i4

i
P3721ENa

P740 Scheme Characteristic

The characteristic is determined from the following protection settings:


ID>2

High-set differential current threshold setting which controls the set slope of
the bias characteristic (Is + k Ibias)

IS

The origin of the bias characteristic slope

Percentage bias setting (slope)

When an external fault condition causes CT saturation, a differential current is


apparent and is equal to the current of the saturated CT. The measured differential
current may be determined as an internal fault and initiate an unwanted trip of the
bus bar. In order to avoid a risk of tripping under these circumstances, MiCOM P740
uses an ultra fast innovative algorithm based on the prediction of the next samples
and the calculation of the image of the flux of the CT core. This signal-processing
algorithm makes it possible to block a trip sample within a window of 3 samples. A
settable timer Block Duration is used to block the differential element in case of CT
saturation detection (settable from 0 to 2s, default value 150 ms).

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 13/103

2.3

Central Unit

2.3.1

Differential Protection Configuration


Following is a copy of the Differential Elements 87BB column on the relay menu,
which is found in the central unit P741. All configuration settings applicable to this
element are found in this column. A different configuration column is found in the
P742 and P743. This is shown in section 2.4.1.
The differential element has independent settings for phase and earth (sensitive)
faults, which are used for all zones. The check zone element uses only the minimum
pick up level setting ID>2. Ibp is the common base current, refer to section 4.2.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEPSIZE

BUSBAR ELEMENTS - DIFF BUSBAR PROT Diff Phase Fault


Current Is

0.1*Ibp

0.02*Ibp

1*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

Phase slope k

40%

20%

90%

1%

ID>2 Current

1.2*Ibp

0.1*Ibp

4*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

ID>1 Current

0.05*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

0.5*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

ID>1 Alarm
Timer

5s

0s

100s

0.1s

Diff Earth Fault


Diff Earth Fault Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

IBiasPh>Cur.

2*Ibp

0.1*Ibp

10*Ibp

0.1*Ibp

Earth Cur. ISN

0.06*Ibp

0.02*Ibp

1*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

Earth Slope kN 20%

20%

90%

1%

IDN>2 Current 0.1*Ibp

0.03*Ibp

2*Ibp

0.05*Ibp

IDN>1 Current

0.05*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

0.5*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

IDN>1 Alarm
Timer

5s

0s

100s

0.1s

Table 4

Busbar element configuration column for the Central Unit.


Note 1:
2:

Only values for Group 1 settings are shown. Identical


columns/rows exist for setting groups 2, 3 and 4.
Ibp refer to Section 4.1.1 for more information.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 14/103

2.3.2

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

Bias Characteristic and Differential current setting


The operation of the busbar differential protection is based on the application of an
algorithm having a biased characteristic, (Figure 2) in which a comparison is made
between the differential current and a bias or restraining current. A trip is only
permitted if this differential current exceeds the set slope of the bias characteristic.
This characteristic is intended to guarantee the stability of protection during external
faults where the scheme has current transformers with differing characteristics, likely
to provide differing performance.
The algorithm operands are as follows:

Differential Current
idiff(t) = i

Bias or restraining current


ibias(t) = i

Origin of the bias characteristic


Is

Slope of the bias characteristic


k

Tripping permitted by bias element for:


idiff(t) > Is + k x ibias(t)

The main differential current element of MiCOM P740 will only be able to operate if the
differential current reaches a threshold ID>2. In general, this setting will be adjusted above
the highest normal full load current.
2.3.3

Scheme supervision by "check zone element


The use of a "check zone" element is based on the principle that in the event of a fault
on one of the substation busbars, the differential current measured in the faulty zone
will be equal to that measured in the entire scheme.
One of the most frequent causes of maloperation of differential busbar protection
schemes is an error in the actual position of an isolator or CB in the substation to that
replicated in the scheme (auxiliary contacts discrepancy). This would produce a
differential current in one or more current nodes. However, if an element monitors
only the currents "entering" and "leaving" the substation, the resultant will remain
negligible in the absence of a fault, and the error will lie with the zones assumption
of the plant position at this particular point in time.
For security, the P740 scheme will only trip a particular busbar zone if that zone
differential element AND the check zone are in agreement to trip.
The principal advantage of this element is total insensitivity to topological
discrepancies. Under such circumstances the "check zone" element will see two
currents with equal amplitude but of opposite sign in adjacent zones.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 15/103

The check zone is the sum of all the current nodes entering and leaving the substation (bus section, dead zone, blind spot).
Scheme differential current = sum of all differential current nodes:
idiff(t) CZ = idiff
INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT

Z12

BB1

BB2

Z1

Z2

CZ= S Idiff
P3723ENa

Figure 3:

Check Zone Element

Examples showing how the topology accommodates such conditions using the check
zone are shown in section 7.4.
The Check Zone will operate if the sum of all differential current nodes is greater than
ID>2.
2.3.4

Sensitive earth fault element


The sensitive earth fault element is included for high impedance earthed systems and
has bias current control to guarantee stability under external faults or when there are
significant errors in the measurement CTs. The element is usually disabled for
effectively earthed systems with low impedance or solid earthing. The sensitive earth
fault settings are shown in table 4 and are also repeated below.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

Earth Fault

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

IBiasPh> Cur.

2*Ibp

0.1*Ibp

10*Ibp

0.1*Ibp

Earth Cur. ISN

0.06*Ibp

0.02*Ibp

1*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

Earth slope kN

20%

20%

90%

1%

IDN>2 Current

0.1*Ibp

0.03*Ibp

2*Ibp

0.05*Ibp

IDN>1 Current

0.05*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

0.5*Ibp

0.01*Ibp

IDN>1 Alarm
Timer

5s

0s

100s

0.1s

Earth Faults

Table 5

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 16/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 17/103

The current control and blocking matrix is shown in Table 6.


There is a separate characteristic for the sensitive earth fault element. This is shown
in Figure 4.

i diff (t)

i1

s-

i2
i3

ta
en
c
r
Pe

i4

ID > 2

ID > 1

i diff (t) = i1 + i2 + i3 + i4 =
i bias (t) = i 1

i2

Trip

i3

k=

20

to

90

ia
eb

Restrain

Is

i bias (t)

Si

i4

i
P3721ENa

INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT
Figure 4:

Sensitive earth fault characteristic

This element is automatically enabled/disabled via the load (flowing) current. The
point at which the sensitive earth fault protection is enabled/disabled (IbiasPh>Cur.)
is settable in the range 0.1 to 10 times Ibp, where Ibp is the scheme base current. This
threshold is usually set to be equal to the minimum phase to phase short circuit
current.
Under earth fault conditions the risk of CT saturation is minimal and therefore the
slope of the characteristic can be set low, however, should the fault evolve to a phase
fault, it is important that the normal characteristic be restored.
Table 6 shows the current control for the SEF element.
Before
fault
detection

External
single
phase
fault

Internal
single
phase
fault

External
phase to
phase
fault

Internal
phase to
phase
fault

ibias A > phase A bias


current threshold
ibias B > phase B bias
current threshold
ibias C > phase C bias
current threshold

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

0 or 1

SEF blocking order :


a + b+ c

0 or 1

0 or 1

IDN>1, ISN,
(it is assumed that these

0 before
saturation

0 or 1

PROTECTION
ELEMENT

CURRENT CONTROL

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 18/103

MiCOM P740

PROTECTION
ELEMENT

Before
fault
detection

External
single
phase
fault

Internal
single
phase
fault

thresholds are set less


than the minimum earth
fault current)
IDN>2
(this threshold can be set
greater or less than
maximum earth fault
current)

Table 6

External
phase to
phase
fault

Internal
phase to
phase
fault

1 during
saturation
0

0 or 1

0 before
saturation

1 during
saturation

Sensitive earth fault current control / blocking elements configuration


column
Note:

In the above table a 1 signifies that the setting has been


exceeded in the case of thresholds and a 0 vice versa. A 1
in the SEF blocking order shows that the logic statement Ibias A
and Ibias B and Ibias C is true and 0 shows that it is false. A 1
(or true condition) blocks/disables the SEF protection, as
described below whilst a 0 (or false condition) keeps the SEF
protection active/enabled.

It can be seen that for an internal phase to earth fault only the phase on which the
fault has occurred will exceed the setting IbiasPh>Cur but a block will not be issued
as PhA + PhB + PhC = 0. The IDN>1 and ISN settings will be exceeded and if
appropriate evolve to issue a IDN>2 trip.
For an external phase fault the SEF will be disabled via blocking order.
It can be seen that for an internal phase to phase fault the bias current will be
sufficient to enable the SEF blocking order. The SEF protection is then blocked and
no trip issued from this element irrespective of SEF setting thresholds being exceeded.
The main phase differential protection is then able to react to the fault and issue a
trip accordingly.
For an external phase to phase fault the SEF will be disabled via the blocking order.
The sensitive differential earth fault protection is delayed by 20ms to prevent any
maloperation during CT saturation condition.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
2.3.5

Page 19/103

Current Circuit Supervision


During normal operation the differential current in the scheme should be zero or
negligible. Any anomaly is detected via a given threshold ID>1.
An unbiased Overcurrent element is used to supervise the current circuit. A
differential current will result if the secondary circuit of a CT becomes open circuited;
the amplitude of this current is proportional to the load current flowing in the circuit
monitored by the faulty current circuit.
The setting is chosen to be as low as possible (minimum suggested setting is 3% of
the base current Ibp) but also allow for standing differential current for example due to
CT mismatch and varying magnetising current losses. 5 to 20% is a typical
application range.
The element is typically time delayed for 5 seconds (set greater than the maximum
clearance time). Instead the time delay allows the relevant protection element (which
should be substantially faster) to clear the fault instead i.e. ID>2 in the case of an
internal phase fault.

2.3.6

Threshold coherency.
The measuring elements have several level detectors for differential current. The
protection reacts to any setting inconsistency in the detection of these levels in a
specific order. The supervision threshold, ID>1 being the first threshold, with all the
other thresholds above it needing confirmation by it. If the thresholds are not
exceeded in the correct sequence then an error is detected and an alarm and, or,
blocking signal is issued.
The differential element is blocked until the thresholds ID>1, IS and ID>2 are
exceeded in the correct sequence.
I bp

I D>2

Is

0.5

0.1

0.01

0.02

I D>1

Is

I D>2

Settings as multiples of I bp
P3767ENa

Figure 5:

Threshold Coherency

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 20/103

MiCOM P740

The thresholds must be set so that:


(ID>1) ! (IS) ! (ID>2) and (IDN>1) ! (ISN) ! (IDN>2)
Table 7 below shows operation depending on the threshold coherency.
ID>1

IS + k.Ibias

ID>2

Normal

Circuitry fault

Block and circuitry fault alarm


after tCF

External fault
or circuitry
fault

External fault with CT saturation


or block circuitry fault alarm
after tCF

Circuitry fault

Block and circuitry fault alarm


after tCF

Internal fault

Trip

Table 7

Operation
-

Threshold Coherency Conditions

ID>1

IS + k.Ibias

ID>2

Status

Incoherent setting

Incoherent setting

Incoherent setting

Table 8
2.3.7

Status

Threshold Incoherent Setting

Signal Quality
An additional check is carried out to confirm that the signals used to determine the
previous criteria are satisfactory.
This includes checking for CT saturation conditions (information from peripheral unit,
refer to Section 4.3), that no plant discrepancies exist (via check zone as discussed
earlier), and that a change (increase) in current flow has been detected by at least
two peripheral units (I detection). The latter condition is used, as internal or external
faults will cause a change in levels in at least two circuits whereas an CT fail only
affect a single circuits levels (faulty CT).
When a trip is issued for a bus zone by the central unit a signal is sent to all
peripheral units associated with the faulted bus zone. The peripheral units carry out a
further local confirmation via local Overcurrent protection, I>BB or IN>BB, before
allowing a trip to take place. This is covered in Section 2.4.1.2.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
2.3.8

Page 21/103

Tripping Criteria
Before a trip signal is issued five trip criteria at the top level, i.e. the Central Unit, and
one at the local level, i.e. the Peripheral Units, must be met.
These criteria are:

Top level (Central Unit)

Bias characteristic and Differential current setting exceeded (Idiff> Is + k Ibias)

Idiff > (ID>2)

Check Zone Operation

Setting Coherency: (ID>1) ! (IS) ! (ID>2) and (IDN>1) ! (ISN) ! (IDN>2)

Signal quality (CT supervision, CT saturation, AD converter, etc)

Local Level (Peripheral Unit)


Local confirmation by an instantaneous Overcurrent element
(enabled/disabled) (I>BB or IN>BB)

2.4

Peripheral Unit

2.4.1

Busbar Elements

2.4.1.1 Busbar Protection Configuration


Following is a copy of the Differential Elements 87BB column on the relay menu,
which is found in the peripheral units P742 and P743. A different configuration
column is found in the P741. This is shown in section 2.3.1. All configuration
settings applicable to this element are found in this column.
Note:
MENU TEXT

In is the CT nominal current.


DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

I>BB Current Set

1.2*In

0.05*In

4*In

0.01*In

IN>BB Current

0.2*In

0.05*In

4*In

0.01*In

BB Trip Confirm

Table 9

Peripheral Unit differential protection elements configuration column.

The settings required for the local confirmation of a busbar trip are included in this
column.
Note:

Only values for Group 1 settings are shown.


columns/rows exist for setting groups 2, 3 and 4.

Identical

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 22/103

MiCOM P740

2.4.1.2 Busbar Trip Confirmation (87BB) or Central Breaker Fail Trip Confirmation (50BF)
The peripheral units can be enabled to control the trip command issue by the central
unit (87BB or 50BF) if a local fault threshold, either phase or earth (i.e. I>BB or
IN>BB), is exceeded.
This criterion provides additional scheme stability. Should the command proceed,
and a trip be issued to the circuit breaker this element can confirm the evolution of a
circuit breaker failure condition. If the element is still operated after a set time delay
a breaker failure condition must exist.
2.4.2

Non-directional Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection


Non-directional Phase fault Overcurrent protection is provided as an alternative form
of back-up protection. The P742 and P743 relays have two Overcurrent stages for
backup protection. The first stage is selectable IDMT or definite time whilst the
second stage is definite time only. The Overcurrent protection can be selectively
enabled or disabled.
The Overcurrent elements will need to be co-ordinated with any other protection
elements on the system, in order to provide discriminative fault clearance. The
Overcurrent protection menu column is shown in Table 9. Note In is the CT nominal
current.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

BB TRIP CONFIRM
BACKUP OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function

Disabled

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E


Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V
Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

I>1 Current Set 3*In

0.1* In

32* In

0.01* In

I>1 Time Delay 1s

0s

100s

0.01s

I>1 TMS

0.025

1.2

0.025

I>1 Time Dial

0.5

15

0.1

100

0.1

I>1 Reset Char DT

DT/Inverse

I>1tReset

I>2 Function

Disabled

Disabled/Blocking Busbar/High Set O/C/Both

I>2 Current Set 20* In

0.10* In

32* In

0.01* In

I>2 Time Delay 1s

0s

10s

0.01s

Table 10

Phase Fault Overcurrent Protection Configuration Column

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 23/103

For the IDMT characteristics the following options are available.


The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

t =T (

K
+ L)
(I / Is) 1
EQEQ

The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

t=

TD
K
(
+ L)
7
(I / Is) 1
EQEQ

operation time

constant

measured current

current threshold setting

constant

ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC curves)

Time multiplier setting for IEC/UK curves

TD =

Time multiplier setting for IEEE/US curves

Figure 6:

IDMT Characteristic Curves

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 24/103

Figure 7:

MiCOM P740

IEEE Characteristic Curves

IDMT characteristics
IDMT Curve description

Standard

K constant

constant

L constant

Standard Inverse

IEC

0.14

0.02

Very Inverse

IEC

13.5

Extremely Inverse

IEC

80

Long Time Inverse

UK

120

Moderately Inverse

IEEE

0.0515

0.02

0.114

Very Inverse

IEEE

19.61

0.491

Extremely Inverse

IEEE

28.2

0.1217

Inverse

US-C08

5.95

0.18

Short Time Inverse

US-C02

0.02394

0.02

0.01694

Table 11

IDMT Characteristics

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 25/103

2.4.2.1 IDMT Characteristics


Note that the IEEE and US curves are set differently to the IEC/UK curves, with regard
to the time setting. A time multiplier setting (TMS) is used to adjust the operating time
of the IEC curves, whereas a time dial setting is employed for the IEEE/US curves.
Both the TMS and Time Dial settings act as multipliers on the basic characteristics but
the scaling of the time dial is approximately 10 times that of the TMS, as shown in the
previous menu. The menu is arranged such that if an IEC/UK curve is selected, the
> Time Dial cell is not visible and vice versa for the TMS setting.
2.4.3

Non-Directional Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection


The P742 and P743 relays include backup non-directional earth fault protection. The
earth fault element has two stages of protection. The earth fault element needs to be
co-ordinated with any other protection elements on the system, in order to provide
discriminative fault clearance. The inverse time characteristics available for the earth
fault protection, are the same as those for the Overcurrent element. The earth fault
settings are shown below.
Note:
MENU TEXT

n is the CT nominal current.


DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

Disabled

Disabled, DT, IEC S Inverse, IEC V Inverse, IEC E


Inverse, UK LT Inverse, IEEE M Inverse, IEEE V
Inverse, IEEE E Inverse, US Inverse, US ST Inverse

OVERCURRENT
O/C EARTH FAULT
N>1 Function

N>1 Current Set 0.3*n

0.1*n

32*n

0.01*n

N>1 Time Delay 1s

0s

100s

0.01s

N>1 TMS

0.025

1.2

0.025

N>1 Time Dial

0.5

15

0.1

N>1 Reset Char

DT

DT/Inverse

N>1tReset

100

0.1

N>2 Function

Disabled

Disabled/Blocking Busbar/High Set O/C/Both

N>2 Current Set 20* n

0.10*n

32* n

0.01* n

N>2 Time Delay 1s

0s

10s

0.01s

Table 12

Earth Fault Overcurrent Protection Configuration Column

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 26/103
2.4.4

MiCOM P740

External Fault Detection by High-Set Overcurrent or Earth Fault Element


There are feeders where, if the power is sufficiently low in relation to the maximum
short circuit power of the busbar, it can be impossible to distinguish between an
internal or external fault by measuring the current magnitude.
The feeders in question are mainly transformer feeders where the short circuit
reactance poses significant limitations. Thus, knowing the feeders maximum
possible contribution to the busbar fault current, it is easy to infer that exceeding this
value will indicate an external fault. In certain cases it is just the presence of a current
that will indicate an external fault.
Normally the P740 scheme may detect a fault, but a saturation condition is also
detected before this is allowed. In this scenario saturation may not occur until after
the scheme has eliminated a saturation condition and allowed a trip to be issued for
the external fault.
An ultra high-speed detection is carried out by each of the peripheral units (P742 and
P743) and can generate a blocking signal from the moment of the first sample at
0.42 ms.
This function can be activated independently for phase faults (>2) and for earth
faults (N>2). A setting example for these thresholds is shown in Figure 8.

2.4.4.1 Application Example


Example of use of high speed detectors
I>2 and/or IN>2 to block the 87BB
element before CT saturation

3000/5A

3000/5A

3000/5A

150/5A
25VA
5P10

150/5A
25VA
5P10
I>2 enabled
IN>2 enabled

ph-ph <300A
ph-N 0A

1500/5A

TR11
115/13,8K
25 MVA
X = 12%

ph-ph 30 000A
ph-N 7 500A

I>2 enabled
IN>2 enabled
Blocking order
to 87BB element

TR12
115/13,8K
25 MVA
X = 12%

P3770ENa

Figure 8:

Transformer Feeder example

An example where this facility is required, where there is a high risk of CT saturation,
is shown in the above example.
The problem, lies in the transformer feeder circuits TR11 and TR12 both 115/13.8kV,
rated power 25 MVA with a reactance of 12%. Both feeders are equipped with
150/5 A CTs. (If rating is 25 MVA I=125A @115 kV). Maximum busbar short circuit
current is 30kA phase to phase and 7.5kA phase to earth.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 27/103

The contribution of each transformer feeder under internal fault conditions is as


follows:1.

Less than 300 A for phase to phase faults Would the contribution from the
transformers be a maximum of 1045 A ie 1/X% x Ifull load

2.

0 A for phase to earth faults.

When an external fault occurs on one of the transformer feeders, the fault MVA will
be the same as that for an internal fault but the feeder will be subjected to an
excessively high Overcurrent condition as compared to normal load conditions at
rated current.
In the example shown, under the external fault condition, the short-circuit phase to
phase current is 200 times the primary rated current. (150 A x 200=30 kA). Taking
into account the CT and initial flux estimated at 80% of that at full load, saturation
will be detected at 10 times In, where In is the CT nominal current in this case in
primary values (150 A x 10 = 1500 A)
With saturation = 1500 A and short-circuit = 30000 A = 20 x saturation.
If the assumption is taken that there is no remnant flux, saturation will be detected
1.4 ms after the appearance of the fault. At which time the current will have reached
0.4 times the maximum value i.e. 1200 A.
Data relating to transformer flux derived from typical magnetising characteristics.
Conclusion: An ultra fast Overcurrent detector in the P742 and P743 when used on
HV/MV transformer feeders makes it possible to pre-empt CT saturation and establish
an external fault condition. The setting used for this detection is >2 for phase faults
and N>2 for earth faults. The detection of I>2 used a settable drop-off timer
(Block Duration).
In this example a setting of 1305 A can be used for both phase and earth faults.
2.4.5

Supervision
Following is a copy of the SUPERVISION column on the relay menu, which is found in
the peripheral units P742 and P743. All configuration settings applicable to this
element are found in this column.
In is the CT nominal current.

Note:
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

Error Factor KCE 0.40

0.01

0.01

Alarm Delay TCE 5

10

0.1

SUPERVISION ELEMENTS
O Supervision

Table 13

Supervision Configuration Column

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 28/103
2.4.6

MiCOM P740

Zero Sequence Current (O) Supervision.


The four current inputs to the peripheral units are used to verify that the calculated
zero sequence current is within the correct range for CT supervision purposes. This
then provides continuous supervision of the local current transformer and of the relay
measurement chaining (CTs, ADC, etc).
The residual current 3o is derived from the three phases a + b + c and compared
to the measured value of N from the neutral CT input.
|3O - N |
During an earth fault the two values should be the same and the sum should
therefore be equal to zero or below the threshold (CTS N> Set) and the CT
supervision alarm will not be issued.
If a CT becomes disconnected a difference between the derived and measured value
will appear, i.e. a CT problem has been detected and after a user settable time delay
(CTS Time delay) the alarm will be issued.
This calculation is then compared to a further criterion to verify and monitor CT
connections and associated current circuits.
|3O - N |> 0.05 n + KCE x (|a| + |b| + |c| + |N| )
(Where KCE is a calculation error coefficient and In is the nominal current)
The calculation error coefficient in the above formula is set between 0.01 and 1
thereby allowing for small discrepancies and preventing false blocking of the
differential elements whilst the constant value of 0.05 In provides stability under no
load or low load conditions.
Main causes for alarms from zero sequence current calculations are:

Commissioning with load current detection of connection errors (input


inverted/rated current incorrect)

Maintenance with load current By pass of analogue input, when a separate


neutral CT is made available.

Failure of an analogue channel e.g. A/D converter failure

Once detected the alarm will be issued after a user settable time delay (Alarm Delay
TCE).
Because the peripheral units sample at 2400Hz discrepancies between the measured
and derived values are identified and responded to very quickly. If any anomalies
arise for either of the above calculations the differential elements associated with the
faulty peripheral unit are instantaneously blocked. The blocking signal remains in
place for 10ms with an alarm signal sent after the time delay. The time delay is
usually set above the time required to trip under fault conditions.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

3.

Page 29/103

CIRCUIT BREAKER FAIL (CBF)


Following is a copy of the CB FAIL column on the relay menu, which is found in the
peripheral units P742 and P743. The P740 scheme has integral CB fail protection
within its logic but can also accept external initiation from other protection. All
configuration settings applicable to this element are found in this column: MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

Control by

I<

I<; 52a or both

I< Current Set

0.05*In

0.05*In

1*In

0.01*In

I> Status

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

I> Current Set

1.2*In

0.05*In

4*In

0.01*In

IN> Current Set 0.2*In

0.05*In

4*In

0.01*In

CB Fail Timer 1 0.05

10

0.01

CB Fail Timer 2 0.2

10

0.01

CB Fail Timer 3 0.05

10

0.01

CB Fail Timer 4 0.2

10

0.01

CB FAIL

INTERNAL TRIP

EXTERNAL TRIP

Table 14

Circuit Breaker Fail Configuration Column

Note:

CB Fail 2 Timer > CB Fail 1 Timer


and
CB Fail 4 Timer > CB Fail 3 Timer

The detailed logic of the circuit breaker failure element follows.


3.1

Distributed Tripping, Control and Indication Elements (Peripheral Units)


As the P740 scheme has been designed for use as either a centralised or distributed
scheme, the hardware corresponds to one circuit breaker and can accommodate 1 or
2 trip coils:

1 main trip coil

1 back-up trip coil

Furthermore these can be either 3 single-phase trip coils or 1 three-phase trip coil.
These can be combined for example 3 single-phase trip coils on the main system and
1 three-phase trip coil for the back-up system.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 30/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

3.2

Circuit Breaker Fail Criteria

3.2.1

Current Criterion
The criterion normally used for the detection of an open circuit breaker pole is the
disappearance of the current i.e. undercurrent element. This function is generally
preferred above other elements due to the response time. In P740 this method of
detection is utilised and has the threshold I<.

3.2.2

Logic Criterion
This criterion is based on checking the state of the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts.
i.e. to see if the 52a contact is open for open circuit breaker conditions.

3.2.2.1 Overcurrent Criterion


One of the most common causes of busbar mal-tripping is error introduced in the
back tripping of adjacent sections. To prevent such an error it is possible to condition
the operation of 50BF protection only when there is presence of a significant current
i.e. a short-circuit on the concerned feeder. This confirmation is provided by the I>
threshold which is set by default at 1.2 times the nominal rated current of the CT
and/or by the threshold setting of residual current IN> set by default to 0.2 times the
rated current.
3.3

Processing A Circuit Breaker Failure Condition


Due to the nature of the busbar protection, the substation topology can manage the
system under circuit breaker failure conditions (50BF).
There are several options for circuit breaker failure protection installations. Generally
these depend on the substation construction and wiring:

Internally initiated CBF i.e. Initiation from the differential element, 87BB, trip

Externally initiated, for example by the feeder protection, but using the busbar
protections integral 50BF protection to execute tripping procedure

Separate 50BF protection to the busbar protection

The breaker failure logic uses fast acting undercurrent elements to provide the
required current check. These elements reset within 15ms, thereby allowing the use
of the P740 relay at all voltage levels.
Since the Overcurrent element within the peripheral units may also be used in
blocking schemes to provide back-up protection, it is possible to reset the Overcurrent
start signals after the breaker fail time delay has elapsed. This ensures that the
upstream back-up protection can be maintained by removal of the blocking signal.
This would also ensure that the possible risk of re-trip on re-closure of the circuit
breaker is minimised.

Figure 9:

CB Fail Logic

6
7

Fault Detection

1
2
3

I<

I<

I<

52a Enable

Trip signal to local CB Bus Coupler


from Busbar protection

IN>

I>

I>

I>

Dead pole detection

3 phases Trip ( TpABC)

52a Phase C

52a Phase B

52a Phase A

IN

IC

IB

IA

IC

IB

IA

TpB
TpC

TpA

=1

Tn2

Tn2

Tn2

Tn2

Tn1

Tn1

Tn1

&

&

&

TBF1 Back trip time delay

TBF1

TBF2-T BF1
0

TBF2 Back trip time delay

I, IN> Retrip & back trip confirmation

&

&

&

&

&

&

&

250ms

BB/FF Busbar Trip


on feeder fault

&

13

12

11

10

P3738ENa

250ms

Local retrip on
Busbar Fault

Busbar2 Trip on
Busbar1 Fault

Retrip Phase C
Feeder Fault

Re trip Phase B
Feeder Fault

Re trip Phase A
Feeder Fault

&

=1

CB FAIL ALARM

MiCOM P740

=1

=1

=1

=1

=1

=1

TBF4 Back trip time delay

TBF4- TBF3

TBF4- TBF3

TBF4- TBF3

I, IN> Retrip & back trip confirmation

=1

=1

=1

TBF3 Retrip time delay

TBF3

TBF3

TBF3

External trip signal from peripheral unit


(21, 87T, etc.)

Application Notes
P740/EN AP/D11
Page 31/103

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 32/103

MiCOM P740

DDB Ext. CB Fail

>1

DDB O/C Protection

DDB BF Trip Request


Trip signal towards CU

DDB Ext. 3ph Trip


DDB External Trip A

>1

DDB CBF Ext Backtrip

DDB External Trip B

>1

12

DDB CBF Int Backtrip

DDB External Trip C

>1

13

DDB Int Retrip 3ph

DDB Ext. Retrip ph A

CB Fail
Logic

DDB CB Aux. 3ph (52a)


DDB CB Aux. A (52a)

>1

DDB CB Aux. B (52a)

>1

10

DDB Ext. Retrip ph B

DDB CB Aux. C (52a)

>1

11

DDB Ext. Retrip ph C

Trip signal from CU

(See Fig 9)

7
P3739ENa

Figure 9bis: CB Fail Logic (DDB Inputs & Outputs)


3.3.1

Internally Initiated CBF i.e. Tripping from the Differential Element 87BB
When a tripping order is generated by the busbar protection (87BB or 50BF) but not
executed due to a circuit breaker failure condition, the following circuit breakers are
required to be tripped instead:

The remote end circuit breaker if the faulty circuit breaker is that of a feeder
(line or transformer). This intertripping is optional (via PSL) and may not be
required on feeders, which may be serviced automatically via the distance or
other line protection.

All the circuit breakers in the adjacent busbar zone if the faulty circuit breaker is
that of a bus coupler or bus section.

The tripping order from the busbar protection is referenced as TpABC, it is always
three-phase and initiates timers tBF1 and tBF2. The first timer is associated with the
local re-trip function while the second timer is associated with the conveyance of the
signal to the central unit for tripping of the adjacent zone in the cases of bus
coupler/bus section circuit breaker failure.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 33/103

3.3.1.1 Description of the Logic for Internally Initiated CBF


BBx
Trip signal
from CU
Main busbar protection trip signal

I>BB

&

Local
Circuit
Breaker

T pABC: Tripping signal from 87BB

(note 2)

Local overcurrent element 87BB confirmation

I<

& tBF1

&

Local
Retrip

Dead pole detection threshold

I>

(note 2)

L ocal overcurrent element CBF confirmation

tBF2-tBF1

&

Back trip
(Note 1)

Note 1: Signal to CU for back-trip (including adjacent zone(s) if failed CB is bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker
Note 2: I>BB and I> could be enabled or disabled (scheme shown is with the 2 functions

enhanced)

P3771ENa

Figure 10: CB Fail Element Logic Internally Initiated


3.3.1.1.1 Initial Trip
A trip signal is issued by the central unit and then confirmed by the local peripheral
unit. If the threshold for the local Overcurrent protection setting for busbar protection
(I>BB) is exceeded then the local circuit breaker trip coil is energised and
subsequently the local circuit breaker is tripped.
3.3.1.1.2 Re-Trip after time tBF1
The peripheral units dead pole detection threshold (I<) and external protection
initiation (I>) trigger the first breaker failure timer (tBF1). This signal in turn is passed
through an AND gate with the signal from the local Overcurrent protection for busbar
protection (I>BB) (if a circuit breaker failure condition has evolved this will still be
present) and a re-trip command is issued. Re-trip output contacts should be assigned
using the PSL editor (including in default PSL settings).
3.3.1.1.3 Back Trip after time tBF2
A signal from the first circuit breaker timer triggers the second breaker failure timer
(tBF2). This in turn is passed through an AND gate with the signal from the local
overcurrent protection for busbar protection (I>BB), if a circuit breaker failure
condition has persisted this will still be present, and a general bus-zone trip signal
issued via the central unit. In summary tBF1 is used for re-trip and tBF2 for general
bus zone trip
Because the busbar protection scheme uses the system topology, during circuit
breaker failure conditions, circuit breaker operations are executed according to on
the current state of the system. It is therefore of paramount importance that should
an internally initiated scheme be implemented, the circuit breaker tripping order,
must be thoroughly defined within the scheme topology to guarantee correct scheme
operation.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 34/103

MiCOM P740
CU 87BB
Back Trip Order (4)

CB Fail signal (3)

BB1

BB2

Trip Order (1)

Other
Protection

Main Trip
or Retrip

CB
Failed
(2)

Back Trip

PU
50BF
PU
50BF

PU
50BF
P3758ENa

Figure 11: Circuit Breaker Failure Logic


Fault in Z2 and CBA failed:
Back trip Z2 to Z1
PU

PU

PU

PU

Z1
PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

Z1

Z2

CBA
PU

PU

PU

PU

Z2
PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

Z3

PU

Z4

PU

Z3

Z4

CBB
PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

PU

Fault in Z3 and CBB failed:


Back trip to remote end

Remote Substation

P3740ENa

Remote Substation

P3741ENa

Figure 11bis: Examples


3.3.2

Externally Initiated 50BF


BBx

External
Protection
Initiation

Local
Circuit
Breaker

Tp A, Tp B or Tp C: Tripping signal from external protection

I<

& tBF3

&

Local
Retrip

(Note 2)

Dead pole detection threshold

I>
L ocal oversurrent element CBF confirmation

tBF4-tBF3

&

Back trip
(Note 1)

Note 1: Signal to CU for back-trip (including adjacent zone(s) if failed CB is bus section or bus coupler circuit breaker
Note 2: Optional, refer to section 3.3.2.1
Note 3: I > could be enable or disable

P3772ENa

Figure 12: CB Fail Element Logic Externally Initiated

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 35/103

Taking into account the relationship between the busbar protection and the circuit
breaker failure protection certain operators prefer an integrated solution where the
breaker failure may be initiated by external protection but executed in the busbar
scheme. Tripping is then worked out in the section or zone.
On an overhead line for example the external commands may be generated by the
distance protection (21). Generally these commands are on a per phase basis and
therefore the tripping commands must be to. In the diagrams these signals are
labelled TpA, TpB, TpC (Tripping pole A, B or C).
The logic is similar to that for internally initiated CB fail protection but utilises tBf3 for
re-trip and tBF4 for back-trip functions.
3.3.2.1 Local re-trip after time tBf3
This re-trip command can be applied via either the main or back up trip coil.
possible to choose between the 3 following modes:

It is

Local re-trip activated/deactivated via PSL. The relay used for this function can
use the same fixed logic for the busbar protection or other independent relays.

A re-trip can be applied after a time tBF3. This is typically set at 50ms when a
single phase trip and re-trip is used. This prevents loss of phase selectivity by
allowing the main protection trip to execute via the main CB trip coil before retrip command is executed by the back-up CB trip coil.

Single or three phase re-trip is possible. If the feeder protection executes singlephase tripping, the three-phase re-trip must be carried out in time tBF3 and this
must be adjusted to have a value higher than the normal operation time of the
circuit breaker. Typical setting under this condition is 150ms.

3.3.2.2 General zone trip after time tBF4


When both the local trip and re-trip have failed, the countdown continues with a
second timer adjusted to have a value of tBF4 - tBF3. The end of this time thus
corresponds to total time tBF4, beyond which a persistent circuit breaker failure
condition is declared.
Information is then relayed to the Central unit for routing to the other peripheral
units, and the associated circuit breakers, in the adjacent zone(s) for a general threephase back-trip.
3.3.3

Separate external 50BF protection to the busbar protection


This is the most common solution utilising conventional wiring. The 50BF relay is
completely independent of all others. When a circuit breaker failure condition occurs
the external protection trips all adjacent circuit breakers as defined in the separate
scheme (DDB Ext. CB fail).
In view of the connection between the functions of the busbar protection and the
circuit breaker failure protection some operators prefer one of the more integrated
system solutions previously mentioned.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 36/103

4.

MiCOM P740

CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
Following is a copy of the CT ratio column in the peripheral unit menu. Only P742
and P743 units have the CT ratio menu as they are connected to the primary plant.
All configuration settings specific to the current transformers can be found in this
column:MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

CT RATIO
Note: Practical largest range 50/In to 5000/In in the same substation
Phase CT Primary 1000A

1A

30000A

1A

Phase CT Sec'y In 1A

1A

5A

4A

CT Class

5P
X
TPX
TPY
TPZ

RBPh / RBN

0.5

10

0.1

BRITISH
STANDARD
Knee voltage Vk

250/In

100/In

5000/In

10/In

IEC
Rated Burden VA

25

100

IEC
25 / In2
Rated Burden
Ohm
(calculated value)

5 / In2

100 / In2

1 / In2

IEC
10
Rated short-circuit
factor Kscc

10

50

Secondary RCT

0.5

0.1

50

0.1

Eff Burden Ohm

25 / In2

1 / In2

200 / In2

1 / In2

0.1

200

0.01

(IEC185)
(BS3938)
(IEC44-6)
(IEC44-6)
(IEC44-6)

Power Parameters

Eff Burden VA
25
(calculated value)
Table 15

Peripheral Unit CT Configuration Column

It is important that the CT settings are entered in full as these are required to calculate
additional parameters for use in the saturation detection algorithms that run within
the peripheral units.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
4.1

Page 37/103

CT Mismatch
A P740 scheme can accommodate different CT ratios throughout the protected zone.
This mismatch must, therefore, be accounted for by the scheme. This is achieved by
using a base ratio to which the central unit converts all of the analogue values when
undertaking scheme calculations.
The interface permits a range of 1 A to 30000 A. In practice the range 50 A to
5000 A is most common and should not be exceeded. In practice, a common base
current of 1000 A is usually selected.

4.1.1

Adjusting the Scheme Base Ratio


As has been mentioned in Section 4.1 using a base current and adjusting all
analogue values to this current when undertaking scheme calculations, i.e. differential
current calculation, means that CT mismatch can be accommodated.
As scheme calculations are carried out in the central unit the setting for this base
current is only found in this unit. To set the scheme base ratio the setting for the
common base current, or common setting base, in the central unit must be adjusted
in the Measurement Set-up menu column in the Central Unit.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

1A

10000 A

1A

Common conventional ratio


Ibp Current Set
Table 16

1000 A

Scheme base current setting in CU

This current setting corresponds to primary values and can be set to between 1A and
10,000A. In practice a common base current of the highest primary nominal current
of main CT is recommended, as this is easy to manipulate.
Changing the base current in this cell adjusts the base for the entire scheme and no
further setting changes need to be carried out.

2000/5

3000/5

P.U.

1000/5

P.U.
5/3 ibase

500/5

P.U.

5/2 ibase

5/1 ibase

P.U.
5/0.5 ibase

C.U.
Available i

base

4000A / 3000A / 2000A /1000A

P3773ENa

Figure 13: Accommodating CT mismatch using the scheme base current

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 38/103

MiCOM P740

As can be seen in the above example all analogue values are converted to the base
value via relevant ratio.
e.g. Ibp taken as 1000 A as recommended

Feeder 1 equipped with the 3000/5 CT.


All values need to be adjusted by 5/3 Ibp.

Feeder 2 equipped with the 500/5 CT.


All values need to be adjusted by 5/0.5 Ibp .

For a current of 1250 A


Feeder 1

Isecondary = (1250 x 5)/3000 = 2.083 A

Converted to base current


Icorrected = 2.083 x 3 x 1000/5 = 1250 A
Feeder 2

Isecondary = (1250 x 5)/500 = 12.5 A

Converted to base current


Icorrected = 12.5 x 0.5 x 1000/5 = 1250 A
This shows that even though the values obtained at the CT secondary are different,
when the base current correction is applied the value is the same and therefore
correct on a scheme basis.
These values are then used for all scheme calculations.
4.2

CT Requirements

4.2.1

Notation
IF max

maximum fault current (same for all feeders)

IF max int

maximum contribution from a feeder to an internal fault (depends on


the feeder).

Inp

CT primary rated current

In

nominal secondary current (1A or 5A)

RCT

CT secondary winding Resistance

RB

Total external load resistance

Vk

CT knee point voltage

SVA

Nominal output in VA,

KSSC

Short-circuit current coefficient (generally 20)

General recommendations for the specification of protection CTs use common rules
of engineering which are not directly related to a particular protection.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
4.2.2

Page 39/103

Feeders connected to sources of significant power (i.e. lines and generators)


The primary rated current is specified above a 1/20th of the maximum contribution of
the feeder to internal faults.
i.e.

Inp = IF max int/20

e.g. A power line likely to import electricity at 20 kA gives rated primary current Inp
as 1000 A.
This recommendation is used for the majority of line or transformer protection
applications.
4.2.3

Out of service feeders or those with low power contribution (low infeed)
Because of CT construction, thermal behaviour, and electrodynamics the CT primary
rated current cannot be as low as required compared to the maximum fault current.
In the case of a CT with primary bushings and not wound there is not a precise limit
but a practical one. The primary rated current could not be lower than the 1/200th
of the maximum short-circuit current crossing the CT at the time of an external fault
i.e.

Inp = IF max /200

This is possible using the fast overcurrent detection I>2 to distinguish between an
internal or external fault in case of CT saturation below than 2 ms
e.g. For a sub station whose maximum short-circuit current would be 30 kA, the CTs
on the least powerful feeders are to be specified for a rated primary current Inp =
150 A, even if the normal consumption of the feeder is much lower than this value
(Sub-station transformer feeder)
4.2.4

CT Specification according to IEC 185, 44-6 and BS 3938 (British Standard)


1.

Class X according to British Standard: Minimum knee point voltage for


saturation
Vk min = 0.5 x secondary IF max x (RCT + RB)

The recommended specification makes it possible to guarantee a saturation time >


1.4 ms with a remnant flux of 80 % of maximum flux (class X or TPX). This provides a
sufficient margin of security for CT saturation detection, which operates in less 2 ms.
2.

Class 5P to IEC 185. Conversion of class X (BS) with the 5P equivalent (IEC)

3.

Class TPX and TPY according to IEC 44-6. IEC defines a composite error as a
percentage of a multiple of the rated current (IN) on a definite load SVA.
e.g.

CT 1000/5 A 50VA 5P 20.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 40/103

MiCOM P740

This definition indicates that the composite error must be lower than 5%, for a
primary current of 20Inp when the external load is equal to 2 ohms (50VA to In). If
secondary resistance, RCT, is known it is easy to calculate the magnetising EMF
developed with the fault current (20In). Actually if the error is 5% (= 5A) with this
EMF, the point of operation is beyond the knee point voltage for saturation. By
convention one admits that the knee point voltage, Vk, is 80% of this value. For a
conversion between a class 5P (IEC) and a class X (BS) CT one uses the relation:
Vk=0.8 X [(SVA x Kssc)/In + (RCT x Kscc x In) ]
SVA = (In x Vk/0.8 Kssc) RCT x In2
In particular cases, calculation could reveal values too low to correspond to industrial
standards. In this case the minima will be: SVA min = 10 VA 5P 20 which
corresponds to a knee point voltage of approximately Vkmin = 70 V at 5A or 350V at
1A. Class TPY would permit lower values of power, (demagnetisation air-gap).
Taking into account the weak requirements of class X or TPX one can keep
specifications common.
For accuracy, class X or class 5P current transformers (CTs) are strongly
recommended. The knee point voltage of the CTs should comply with the minimum
requirements of the formulae shown below.

k (RCT + RB)

Vk

Required knee point voltage

Dimensioning factor

RCT

CT secondary resistance

RL

Circuit resistance from CT to relay

RB

Burden resistance

Vk
Where:

k is a constant depending on:


If

Maximum value of through fault current for stability (multiple of


In)

X/R

Primary system X/R ratio

Thus the following expression can be derived.


Vk

IF.(1+X/R).(RCT + RB)

The following CT requirement can be developed for the P740 scheme


Vk

>

With RB = 2 RL

0.5 x (secondary If max) x (RCT + RB)

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
4.2.5

Page 41/103

Support of IEEE C Class CTs


MiCOM Px40 series protection is compatible with ANSI/IEEE current transformers as
specified in the IEEE C57.13 standard. The applicable class for protection is class
C, which specifies a non air-gapped core. The CT design is identical to IEC class P,
or British Standard class X, but the rating is specified differently. The following table
allows C57.13 ratings to be translated into an IEC/BS knee point voltage
IEEE C57.13 C Classification (volts)
C50

C100

C200

C400

C800

Vk

Vk

Vk

Vk

Vk

0.04

56.5

109

214

424

844

200/5

0.8

60.5

113

218

428

848

400/5

0.16

68.5

121

226

436

856

800/5

0.32

84.5

137

242

452

872

1000/5

0.4

92.5

145

250

460

880

1500/5

0.6

112.5

165

270

480

900

2000/5

0.8

132.5

185

290

500

920

3000/5

1.2

172.5

225

330

540

960

CT Ratio

RCT (ohm)

100/5

Table 17

IEC/BS Knee Point Voltage Vk offered by C class CTs

Assumptions:
1.

For 5A CTs, the typical resistance is 0.002 ohms/secondary turn

2.

IEC/BS knee is typically 5% higher than ANSI/IEEE knee

Given:
3.

IEC/BS knee is specified as an internal EMF, whereas the C class voltage is


specified at the CT output terminals. To convert from ANSI/IEEE to IEC/BS
requires the voltage drop across the CTs secondary winding resistance to be
added.

4.

IEEE CTs are always rated at 5A secondary

5.

The rated dynamic current output of a C class CT (Kssc) is always 20 x In


Vk

= (C x 1.05) + (In. RCT. Kssc)

Where:
Vk

= Equivalent IEC or BS knee point voltage

= C Rating

In

= 5A

RCT

= CT secondary winding resistance

Kssc = 20 times

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 42/103
4.3

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

CT Saturation detection
Innovative methods are used to detect CT saturation in the P740. The values
associated with the CT saturation algorithms are entered into the Peripheral Units CT
ratio menu column shown in table 14 and are used to define the CTs characteristic.
The algorithms for CT saturation detection are executed in the peripheral units.
The first algorithm to be examined is the detection of variation of current.
The PU calculates the derived current and compares it to the magnitude of the
waveform. With 2400Hz sampling, maximum variation between 2 successive samples
of sinusoidal current can not exceed 14% of the magnitude.

The magnitude of the current is the maximum value of the current measure during
the last period with a minimum of 50% of nominal current. A variation is detected is
derived current exceed 20% of this magnitude.
This instantaneous value is maintained 150ms for the first variation then 50ms for the
next ones, as shown as figure 14.

Figure 14:

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 43/103

The second algorithm, by integration of the secondary current, presumes of


maximum flux in the core.
The flux calculation starts when the first variation of current is detected, then if the
calculated flux reached 20% of the maximum flux, a CT saturation is presumed as
shown in figure 15.

Figure 15: Determination of Signal Quality in Peripheral Unit


CT saturation detection starts at the first variation of current detected and stop if there
is no variation during 100ms. CT saturation is detected when there are a variation of
current and a presumption of maximum flux detected, as shown figure 4. When CT
saturation appears, blocking order is sent to CU to lock the relevant zones.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 44/103

MiCOM P740

P3774ENa

Figure 16: Determination of Signal Quality in Peripheral Unit


Blocking of the differential protection via the high speed external fault element is
discussed in Section 2.4.4.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
4.4

Page 45/103

CT Location
There are no restrictions imposed as to the location of current transformers within the
system, however, when the topological model is created the position and orientation
of the current transformers must be defined correctly to ensure the correct operation
of the protection.
A suggested current transformer location is to position the current transformer for the
busbar protection, line side of the circuit breaker whilst the line protection current
transformers are positioned busbar side of the circuit breaker. This then covers the
largest possible busbar zone providing an overlap with the line protection therefore
eliminating any possible blind spots. This is shown in Figure 17.

P3775ENa

Figure 17: CT Location

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 46/103

MiCOM P740

5.

CIRCUIT BREAKER FUNCTION

5.1

Circuit breaker state monitoring


An operator at a remote location requires a reliable indication of the state of the
switchgear. Without an indication that each circuit breaker is either open or closed,
the operator has insufficient information to decide on switching operations. The relay
incorporates circuit breaker state monitoring, giving an indication of the position of
the circuit breaker, or, if the state is unknown, an alarm is raised.

5.1.1

Circuit Breaker State Monitoring Features


MiCOM relays can be set to monitor normally open (52a) and normally closed (52b)
auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker. Under healthy conditions, these contacts will
be in opposite states. Should both sets of contacts be open, this would indicate one of
the following conditions:

Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective

Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective

CB is in isolated position

Should both sets of contacts be closed, only one of the following two conditions would
apply:

Auxiliary contacts / wiring defective

Circuit Breaker (CB) is defective

If any of the above conditions exist, an alarm will be issued after a 200ms time delay.
A normally open / normally closed output contact can be assigned to this function via
the programmable scheme logic (PSL). The time delay is set to avoid unwanted
operation during normal switching duties.
In the PSL CB AUX could be used or not, following the four options:

None

Both 52A and 52B

(2 optos)

Both 52A and 52B

(6 optos)

Where None is selected no CB status will be available. This will directly affect any
function within the relay that requires this signal, for example CB control, Topology,
etc.
If both 52A and 52B are used then status information will be available and in
addition a discrepancy alarm will be possible, according to the following table. 52A
and 52B inputs are assigned to relay opto-isolated inputs via the PSL.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 47/103

Auxiliary Contact Position

5.2

CB State Detected

Action

52A

52B

Open

Closed

Breaker Open

Circuit breaker healthy

Closed

Open

Breaker Closed

Circuit breaker healthy

Closed

Closed

CB Failure

Alarm raised if the condition


persists for greater than 200ms

Open

Open

State Unknown

Alarm raised if the condition


persists for greater than 200ms

Circuit Breaker Control


The relay includes the following options for control of a single circuit breaker:

Local tripping and closing, via the relay menu

Local tripping and closing, via relay opto-isolated inputs

It is recommended that separate relay output contacts are allocated for remote circuit
breaker control and protection tripping. This enables the control outputs to be
selected via a local/remote selector switch as shown below. Where this feature is not
required the same output contact(s) can be used for both protection and remote
tripping.
+ ve

Pr o te c tio n
trip
R e m o te
c o n tro l
trip

Trip
0
c lo s e

R e m o te
c o n tro l
c lo se

Lo c a l
R e m o te

Trip

Remote Control of Circuit Breaker

C lo se

ve

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 48/103

MiCOM P740

The following table is taken from the relay menu and shows the available settings
and commands associated with circuit breaker control.
Menu text

Default setting

Setting range
Min

Step size

Max

CB CONTROL
Prot Trip Pulse

0.2s

0.05s

2s

0.01s

Trip Latched

Disabled

Enabled, Disabled

Reset Trip Latch

No

Yes, No

CB Control by

Disabled

Disabled, Local, Remote,


Local+Remote, Opto, Opto+local,
Opto+Remote, Opto+Rem+local

Man Close Pulse

0.5s

0.1s

10s

0.01s

Man Trip Pulse

0.5s

0.1s

5s

0.01s

Man Close Delay

10s

0.01s

600s

0.01s

A manual trip will be permitted provided that the circuit breaker is initially closed.
Likewise, a close command can only be issued if the CB is initially open. To confirm
these states it will be necessary to use the breaker 52A and/or 52B contacts via PSL. If
no CB auxiliary contacts are available no CB control (manual or auto) will be
possible.
Once a CB Close command is initiated the output contact can be set to operate
following a user defined time delay (Man Close Delay). This would give personnel
time to move away from the circuit breaker following the close command. This time
delay will apply to all manual CB Close commands.
The length of the trip or close control pulse can be set via the Man Trip Pulse and
Man Close Pulse settings respectively. These should be set long enough to ensure
the breaker has completed its open or close cycle before the pulse has elapsed.
Note :

The manual close commands for each user interface are found in the System
Data column of the menu.

If an attempt to close the breaker is being made, and a protection trip signal is
generated, the protection trip command overrides the close command.
If the CB fails to respond to the control command (indicated by no change in the state
of CB Status inputs) a CB Fail Trip Control or CB Fail Close Control alarm will be
generated after the relevant trip or close pulses have expired. These alarms can be
viewed on the relay LCD display or can be assigned to operate output contacts for
annunciation using the relays programmable scheme logic (PSL).

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
5.3

Page 49/103

Trip relays
Relays 1, 2, and 3 of PU are used for tripping relays : busbar protection, overcurrent
protection and back-trip breaker failure from CU. Even if relay 1, 2, and 3 are not
used is PSL, there are closed if there is trip command from these functions. However
these relays can be affected in PSL for additional functions (breaker-failure retrip for
example).
The settings [CB CONTROL, Prot Trip Pulse] is parameter for Dwell timer used to
assure a minimum tripping duration on relay 1, 2, and 3.

5.4

Suggested Trip Circuit Supervision using psl editor


The scheme shown in Figure 18 is designed to provide full H7 compliant trip circuit
supervision.
The object of this arrangement is to ensure that all wiring in the trip circuit is
monitored, regardless of circuit breaker state. Furthermore the open circuit or short
circuit failure of any component in the supervision path would not cause a circuit
breaker trip.

P3776ENa

Figure 18: Trip Circuit Supervision


As previously mentioned the resistors should be sized so that shorting of any one
device will not lead to a trip:

With R1 and R2 in parallel and R3 shorted on CB operation if 52a and 52b


overlap, current must be small

With just R2 in circuit, current is typically 2mA

With R3 + (R1 // R2) in circuit, current is typically 2mA

P3777ENa

Figure 19: Trip Circuit Supervision CB Closed

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 50/103

MiCOM P740

Figure 19 shows the trip circuit supervision current path with breaker closed. It can
be seen that all the wires in the trip circuit, plus the trip coil are supervised.

P3778ENa

Figure 20: Trip Circuit Supervision CB Open


Figure 20 shows the trip circuit supervision current path with breaker open. It can be
seen that all the wires in the trip circuit, plus the trip coil are supervised. This provides
full pre-closing supervision
Suggested resistor values are shown in the table below.
Opto
Voltage
Range (DC)

Tested to meet
Minimum Voltage
(80% of lower DC
voltage rating)

48/54

38.4

110/125

88.0

220/250

176.0

Table 18

Resistor Values (ohms)

R1=R2=1.2K
R3=0.6K
R1=R2=2.5K
R3=1.2K
R1=R2=5K
R3=2.5K

Drain Current in
circuit/ through
trip coil

2mA
2mA
2mA

Trip circuit supervision resistor requirements

Due to the fact that under the circuit conditions shown, the effect of the trip coil
inductance in the circuit causes the drop off voltage of the opto-input circuit output to
become unstable at 24.1V. Therefore this circuit should only be employed for optoinput applications between 48 and 250V.
For guaranteed operation it is recommended that the opto-inputs be set to the
voltage settings below:
Applied
voltage (DC)

Relay Voltage Setting

48/54

24

110/125

48

220/250

110

Table 19

Trip circuit supervision opto input voltage settings

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 51/103

For correct operation of the trip circuit supervision the following logic must be
implemented in the PSL:
400

Opto Input 52a

Pick-Up

Relay Contact

400
Any Trip

Latching

Pick-Up

LED

INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT
Figure 21: PSL for Trip Circuit Supervision

P3733ENa

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 52/103

6.

MiCOM P740

ISOLATION AND REDUCED FUNCTION MODE


The scheme permits maintenance on the busbar and, or busbar protection whilst
maintaining some form of protection if possible. Two levels in the Central Unit and
two levels in the Peripheral Units allow this to be possible. A command to one or
more of the affected units via the commissioning test menu will then force the scheme
to a selected (reduced) operating mode. The levels are as follows.

6.1

Central processing unit (P741)


A central instruction for a reduced operation mode of the busbar protection on two
levels can be applied selectively zone by zone.

Busbar monitoring the busbar protection is monitored (87BB) only (i.e. trip
inhibited, measurements enabled). All other protection remains in service and
trips can still be issued for CBF conditions.

21-50BF ...

PU

Trip orders for relevant CBs by 50BF


Trip orders by 87BB blocked

CU
P3734ENa

Figure 22: Central Unit: Busbar monitoring


Additionally, all protection functions are disabled when the system is awaiting
configuration downloads (topology is missing).

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 53/103
Busbar & CBF disabled - both the busbar and circuit breaker fail conditions are
monitored but all trips are inhibited.
INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT

At least both
isolators or
CB closed

21-50BF ...

PU

No Trip orders
for relevant CBs
(Trip by 50BF & 87BB blocked)

CU
P3735ENa

Figure 23: CU Busbar and Circuit Breaker Fail disabled


Under the condition shown in Figure 23, the circuit breaker is closed as is one of the
busbar isolators thereby connecting the feeder to a busbar. However all I/O is
disconnected and the protection is out of service. The peripheral unit still relays
information regarding the analogue values to the central unit but as the i/o is
effectively disconnected the scheme cannot respond to changes in plant position so
the differential element is deactivated for that zone.
If this case is true for all feeders the protection is in busbar and circuit breaker fail
disabled mode only (87BB) i.e. all trips inhibited, measurements enabled.
6.2

Peripheral Units (P742 and P743)


Three levels of command can be applied selectively to each peripheral unit.

Normal operating conditions

I/O disabled

Out of Service

There also exists a forcing function, which makes it possible, via the front panel
user interface, to modify the image of the switchgear positions of the associated bay.
This acts as a tool for commissioning, which makes it possible to check CT
orientation, as well as the LV wiring, by effectively modelling the primary plant
positions without having to interfere with the control circuits, can be used in
conjunction with the above operating modes.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 54/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

Figure 24: PU I/O disabled


In the mode shown in Figure 24 all inputs to and tripping contacts (RL1, RL2, RL3)
from the relay are effectively disconnected. The topology algorithm remembers the
plant positions prior to switching to maintenance status. As the peripheral unit
continues to monitor the analogue values the central unit will maintain a balanced
condition with the remainder of the system still in normal operation. However, the
local Overcurrent protection is still enabled and able to react to a fault condition by
creating a CB fail condition and back tripping the zone(s).

Figure 25: PU Out of Service


In this mode the feeder is totally disconnected from the system. All I/O (tripping
contact only) is disconnected and no information is passed back to the central unit for
inclusion in zone calculations and hence the protection scheme. Hence the central
unit can keep the zone elements in service as the contribution of this feeder will be
zero. Whilst in this mode the peripheral unit can be tested locally for example
secondary injections tests can be carried out.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 55/103

Figure 26: Forcing plant position state


Under certain conditions it may be desirable to force the positions of the primary
plant to enable scheme testing to be carried out, for example during commissioning.
This can be done via the user interface.
In the first example the forced scheme theoretically connects the feeder to busbar 2,
whilst in practice it is connected to busbar 1. Zone 1 will see a differential current
equal to iload whilst zone 2 will see a differential current equal to +iload this will give a
check zone ( idiff ) equal to zero.
In the second example the forced scheme theoretically totally disconnects the feeder.
An end zone or extra node, is created by the topology in order to fully replicate the
scheme. This lies between the feeder CT and the circuit breaker. However, it must be
remembered that in practice the feeder is still connected to busbar 1. Zone 1 will see
a differential current equal to iload. This extra node will see a differential current
equal to +iload and which when included in the check zone ( idiff ) will give a
result equal to zero.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 56/103

MiCOM P740

Extra nodes (end zones) are covered in topology processing section 7.4.
Local
50/51

I/O

Tripping

Meas

In service

Not
Applicable

Disabled
only input

No 87BB
trips

Enabled

Monitored

Disabled

Not
Applicable

Disabled
only input

No 87BB
or 50BF
trips

Enabled

Blocked

Blocked

Not
Applicable

Disabled

Disabled

Disabled

Enabled

Enabled

In service

Inputs
disabled
Only
tripping
relays RL1,
RL2, RL3
disabled

Disabled
on this
feeder.
Enabled
for
remainder
of scheme

Disabled
on this
feeder.
Enabled
for
remainder
of scheme

Enabled (no
contribution
from this
feeder)

Enabled

Out of
service
(for feeder
fault)

Inputs
disabled
Only
tripping
relays RL1,
RL2, RL3
disabled

Disabled
on this
feeder.
Enabled
for
remainder
of scheme

Disabled
on this
feeder.
Enabled
for
remainder
of scheme

Enabled

Enabled

Cleared
via 50BF
backtrip.

Part
enabled.
Plant
positions
forced to
req status

Disabled
on this
feeder.
Enabled
for
remainder
of scheme

Disabled
on this
feeder.
Enabled
for
remainder
of scheme

87BB

50BF

BB Monitoring

Monitored

BB & CBF
disabled

CU

System
configuration
& download
PU
I/O disabled

Out of Service

Forcing

Enabled

Table 20

Reduce function mode summary

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

6.3

Page 57/103

System operation under failed communications situation


With each start or reboot of CU, all the zones are set to BB and CBF disabled mode
as described above. They will remain in this mode until all peripheral units are
recognised as being in service and synchronised. (PU CONF & STATUS/PU in
service).
If a PU that was considered to be out of service but suddenly communicates with the
CU, the CU automatically places all zones to a waiting system configuration mode
while waiting for an input from the user to either assign the PU in service or
disconnect additional PUs.
During operation, if the communication with a PU is broken, the zone connected to
the CT of the non-communicating PU is temporarily suspended.
If the
communication is restored, the differential protection is restored for the zone. On the
other hand, if the break in communications persists longer than permitted (ID>1
Alarm Timer), the zone protection is suspended.
For the reinstatement of the zone the user must intervene:

If communication is restored the user must reset alarm by the same command
to reset circuitry fault (PU CONF & STATUS -> Reset circuitry)

If the failed feeder needs to be withdrawn from service in order to replace a


faulty fibre the PU must be removed from the list of PUs in service.

On the PU, an alarm will indicate loss of communication with the CU.
On the CU, an alarm will indicate that one or more PUs are no longer synchronised.
In the PU CONF & STATUS column, it is possible to view the list of synchronised PU
(PU connected) after having altered the list of PU in service (PU in service).
If at the time of the initial startup, the topology of the substation was implemented
including futures (for example 15 PU including 6 extensions), it is possible to boot the
system only activating the existing 9 PUs in the cell PU in service.
When the future 6 PUs are connected, it will be sufficient to connect them and
indicate that they are now in service in the CU menu columns.
6.4

Waiting Configuration
Alarm Config error occurs when the configuration is incorrect:

Topology download in relay does not correspond to this relay address


(be careful to erase topology by sending a default setting file)

For CU: check the coherency of threshold:


ID>2 > IS > ID>1 and IDN>2 > ISN > IDN>1

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 58/103

7.

MiCOM P740

TOPOLOGY
The topological analysis of the state of the sub-station in real time is one of the
primary factors of the reliability of numerical differential busbar protection. Thus in
the case of a power system fault, this analysis determines the sections of the
substation concerned with the fault and only takes those sections out of service. The
algorithms available for topological analysis make this level of discrimination
possible and it is these algorithms that are utilized in the P740 scheme.

7.1

Topology Configurator
For the P740 scheme the system topology is determined by replication of the circuit,
i.e. the connections between the various pieces of plant on the system, via a graphical
interface. This topological replication is carried out from a single line diagram of the
system, which is used to recreate the system using the topology configurator software.
This is carried out by AREVA personnel at an authorised AREVA competence centre.

P740 Scheme Editor

P740 Synoptic

The topology configurator uses standard symbols for creating the system model by
simply dragging and dropping in the configurator screen.
Bar

Link

Node
Current Transformer

Feeder

Circuit Breaker (CB)

Isolator

Figure 27: Topology configurator objects


The switchgear/busbars are then labelled and assigned to relevant peripheral units.
When the topology has been fully defined it is compiled and then downloaded to
each PU and the CU.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740
7.2

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 59/103

Nodal Assignment
Three files are created from the topological model. The first identifies each piece of
primary plant such as circuit breakers, isolators, current transformer (CT), bus section
and feeders. The second file identifies the connections between each piece of primary
plant and the third calculates the topological nodal assignment thus making it
possible to link to each peripheral unit with associated primary plant of the system.
Algorithms search to determine the electrical topology. These operate in real time in
the hardware of the P740 scheme. They start with the information obtained
regarding the state of the primary plant. A state table is created and associated with
each device. According to the algorithm, this state table gathers the data related to
the physical states of the primary plant taken by the unit.
The results of these algorithms are then subjects of a further algorithm, developed
from operational research. This algorithm identifies commonality between nodes and
merges nodes where appropriate. The new node includes all common nodes.
The principal characteristics of this algorithm mean that the scheme has the following
benefits:

Adaptability to various sub-station configurations

Permanent identification of current nodes

Permanent identification of physical links for each zone

Reference to the neighbouring circuit breakers for each point of the circuit

These algorithms offer flexibility to the operator not met in non-numeric conventional
systems.
The global substation topology is updated every 33ms.
The above improve the overall function and discrimination of the protection scheme
and therefore reliability of the network.
7.3

Topology Communication
The peripheral units relay the information regarding their associated topological
model to the central unit. The central unit gathers the information from all attached
peripheral units and calculates the topological scheme for these as well as carrying
out the calculations for the system topology.

7.4

Topology data
Topology results are displayed in Central Unit and locally in Peripheral Units.
For the Central Unit, zones included in each current node are displayed in Topology
1 column and current transformer (or Peripheral Unit) included in each current node
are displayed in Topology 2 column.
For the Peripheral Unit, link between current transformer and zones are displayed in
Topology column.
Note: If the topology scheme is equipped with a transfer bus outside the protection
zone, this link is never reported in Topology column because current
transformer is connected to feeder.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 60/103
7.5

MiCOM P740

Topology processing
The following scenarios demonstrate how the dynamic topology processing
accommodates anomalies and discrepancies in the scheme.

7.5.1

CTs on one side of bus coupler, CB closes before status acquisition.


Zone 1

BB1

ILOAD through CB

BB2

Zone 2

EN 1

Idiff Z2 = +

Idiff Z1 = 0

Iload

Idiff EN1
=-iload

CB CLOSED
but auxiliary
contact OPEN

P3742ENa

Check Zone Idiff = idiff = idiff Z1 + idiff EN1 + idiff EN2 + idiff Z2 = 0
Figure 28: CTs on one side of bus coupler, CB closes before status
acquisition
As the CB has closed but the status has not yet been refreshed the topology still
believes the CB to be open.
Treating this as an open bus coupler circuit breaker the topology algorithm will have
created an end node (EN1). This is located between the CT and the circuit breaker.
This then fully replicates the scheme upto the open bus coupler CB on both sides.
Note that in this example zone 2s limits now extend upto the circuit breaker.
If the circuit breaker was open no load current would flow through the circuit breaker
and hence the extra node. The differential current in the two main zones would equal
zero, as the current flowing into the zones would still equal the current flowing out,
and the current measured in the extra node would also be equal to zero.
However, if the circuit breaker is actually closed, the load current will flow through the
circuit breaker and the extra node. The differential current in main zone 1 will still
equal zero, as the current flowing into the zone will still equal the current flowing out,
but the current measured in the extra node and in main zone 2 will be equal in
magnitude but opposite in sign. (iload)
Zone 1 would not operate and when the check zone element is calculated, the
differential currents seen in zone 2 and the extra node (idiffEN), which result from the
discrepancy in the plant status, can be seen to be cancelled out.
Check zone Idiff = idiff = idiffZ1+ idiffEN1 + idiffZ2 = 0 + (-iload) + (+iload) =
Again the system retains its stability for discrepancies in plant status.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
7.5.2

Page 61/103

CTs on both sides of bus coupler, CB closes before status acquisition.

Zone 1

BB1

ILOAD through CB

EN 1

EN 2

Idiff EN1
=-iload

Idiff EN1
=+iload

BB2

Zone 2
Idiff Z2 = 0

Idiff Z1 = 0

CB CLOSED
but auxiliary
contact OPEN

P3743ENa

Check Zone Idiff = idiff = idiff Z1 + idiff EN1 + idiff EN2 + idiff Z2 = 0
Figure 29: CTs on both sides of bus coupler, CB closes before status
acquisition
As the CB has closed but the status has not yet been refreshed the topology still
believes the CB to be open.
Treating this as an open bus coupler the topology algorithm will have created two
end nodes (EN1 and EN2). These are located between the CTs and the circuit
breaker. These then fully replicate the scheme upto the open bus coupler CB on both
sides.
If the circuit breaker was open no load current would flow through the circuit breaker
and hence the two extra nodes. The differential current in the two main zones would
equal zero, as the current flowing into the zones would still equal the current flowing
out, and the current measured in the extra nodes would also be equal to zero.
However, if the circuit breaker is actually closed, the load current will flow through the
circuit breaker and hence the two extra nodes. The differential current in the two
main zones will still equal zero, as the current flowing into the zone(s) will still equal
the current flowing out, but the current measured in the extra nodes will be equal in
magnitude but opposite in sign. (iload)
The main zones would not operate and when the check zone element is calculated,
the differential currents seen in the extra nodes (idiffEN), which result from the
discrepancy in the plant status and which are taken into account for the check zone
calculation, can be seen to be cancelled out.
Check zone Idiff = idiff = idiffZ1+ idiffEN1 + idiffEN2 + idiffZ2 =0 + (-iload) + (+iload) =
Hence, the system retains its stability even when there are discrepancies in plant
status.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 62/103
7.5.3

MiCOM P740

CTs on one side of bus coupler, CB closed and fault evolves between CT and CB.

Zone 1
Idiff Z1 = 0

BB1

Zone 2

BB2

Idiff Z2 = ifault

P3744ENa

Figure 30: CTs on one side of bus coupler, CB closed and fault evolves
between CB & CT
Treating this as a closed bus section circuit breaker the topology algorithm will have
extended the limits of the main zones to the bus coupler CT. This then fully replicates
the scheme.
Under normal operating conditions when the circuit breaker is closed load current
would flow through the circuit breaker and differential current in the two main zones
would equal zero, as the current flowing into the zones would still equal the current
flowing out.
However, if a fault was to occur between the CT and the circuit breaker the current
will flow from zone 1 into zone 2 which feeds the fault. The differential current in
main zone 1 will still equal zero, as the current flowing into the zone will still equal
the current flowing out, but the differential current measured in zone 2 will be equal
to that of the fault current.
In this case zone 2 would operate as will the check zone element.
Check zone Idiff = idiff = idiffZ1 + idiffZ2 = 0 + ifault = ifault > (ID>2)

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 63/103

However, when zone 2 trips the fault will still be present. The topology then analyses
the remainder of the system as follows.

Zone 1

BB1

Idiff EN1 = ifault

BB2

Zone 2

EN 1

Idiff Z1 = 0

P3745ENa

Figure 31: Zone 2 tripped, fault still present


Treating this as an open bus coupler circuit breaker as before the topology algorithm
will have created an end node (EN1) which is located between the CT and the circuit
breaker. This then fully replicates the scheme upto the open bus coupler CB.
Remember that in this example zone 2s limit extended upto the circuit breaker but
this zone has been tripped already.
As the topology algorithm updates scheme every 33ms this is the maximum time to
the creation of the extra node after auxiliary contact change of state.
The circuit breaker is now open and current would flow through the CT and into the
extra node to feed the fault. The differential current in the main zone would equal
zero, as the current flowing into the zone is still equal to the current flowing out,
whereas the current measured in the extra node will be equal to the fault current ifault.
Check zone Idiff = idiff = idiffZ1 + idiffEN = 0 + ifault = ifault
End zone Idiff = ifault
Hence, the system reacts to the continuing presence of the fault in the end zone and
trips the zone 1 as the check zone Idiff > (ID>2) and the end zone Idiff > (ID>2).
In this example it can be seen that the opposite zone is tripped first but the dynamic
topology reacts to the changed scheme and subsequently trips the adjacent main
zone.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 64/103
7.5.4

MiCOM P740

CTs on both sides of coupler, CB closed and fault evolves between CT and CB.

Zone 1

BB1

Virtual Zone
= Z3

BB2

Idiff Z1= 0

Zone 2
Idiff Z2= 0

P3746ENa

Figure 32: CTs both sides of bus coupler,


CB closed fault evolves between CT & CB
Treating this as a closed bus section circuit breaker the topology algorithm will have
created a virtual zone that surrounds the circuit breaker with the bus coupler CTs as
its limits called zone 3 in the event report and measurements. This then fully
replicates the scheme.
Under normal operating conditions when the circuit breaker is closed load current
would flow through the circuit breaker and hence the virtual zone. The differential
current in the two main zones would equal zero, as the current flowing into the zones
would still equal the current flowing out. This is also the case for the virtual zone
around the bus coupler.
However, if a fault was to occur in the virtual zone, current would flow into the virtual
zone and feed the fault. The differential current in the two main zones will still equal
zero, as the current flowing into the zone(s) will still equal the current flowing out, but
the differential current measured in the virtual zone will be equal to that of the fault
current.
The main zones would not operate but the virtual zone or zone 3, which surrounds
the bus coupler and has limits at the bus coupler CTs would operate. When the
check zone element is calculated, the differential current seen in the virtual zone or
zone 3, which results from the presence of the fault in the dead zone, will confirm the
presence of a fault and initiate a simultaneous trip of both main zones.
Check zone Idiff = idiff = idiffZ1+ idiffZ3 + idiffZ2 = ifault
Hence, the system reacts to a fault occurring between the CT and the CB
simultaneously tripping both adjacent zones.
When required, the bus coupler can operate first for a fault in the virtual zone or zone
3 and then the faulty zone 1 will remain in service. For such operation a special
topology scheme should be used.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

8.

Page 65/103

PSL CONFIGURATION AND INTEGRATION


A standard PSL will be supplied, preloaded as with other relays in the MiCOM range.
The programmable scheme logic (PSL) is multi-functional and includes the following
options:

Enables the mapping of opto-isolated inputs, relay output contacts and the
programmable LED's.

Provides relay output conditioning (delay on pick-up/drop-off, dwell time,


latching or self-reset).

Fault Recorder start mapping, i.e. which internal signals initiate a fault record.

Enables customer specific scheme logic to be generated through the use of the
PSL editor inbuilt into the MiCOM S1 support software.

It is strongly recommended that due to the nature of busbar protection this PSL is not
modified after factory testing, unless modifications are carried out by competent
AREVA personnel. Further information regarding editing and the use of PSLs can be
found in the MiCOM S1 user manual. Note that changes to these defaults can only
be carried out using the PSL editor and not via the relay front plate.
The standard PSL is shown in Configuration/Mapping Chapter. The following section
details the default settings of the PSL.
8.1

Factory default settings

8.1.1

Logic input mapping


P741

P742

P743

L1 Reset Lached

L1 Reset Latches

L2 Reset Latches

L2 Ext. Start
Disturbance Recorder

L2 Reset Latches

L2 Reset Latches

L3 Reset Circuitry Fault

L3 Q1 closed

L3 Q1 close

L4 Ext. Check Zone

L4 Q1 open

L4 Q1 open

L5 Not used

L5 Q2 closed

L5 Q2 closed

L6 Not used

L6 Q2 open

L6 Q2 open

L7 Not used

L7 CB Aux 3ph (52a)

L7 CB Aux 3ph (52a)

L8 Not used

L8 CB Aux 3ph (52b)

L8 CB Aux 3ph (52b)

L9 Q3 closed

L9 Q3 closed

10

L10 Q3 open

L10 Q3 open

11

L11 Not Used

L11 Not Used

12

L12 Ext 3Ph Trip

L12 Ext 3Ph Trip

13

L13 CB not available

L13 CB not available

14

L14 Ext CB Fail

L14 Ext CB Fail

15

L15 Man CB Close cmd

L15 Man CB Close cmd

16

L 16 Not Used

L 16 Not Used

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 66/103

MiCOM P740
P741

P743

17

L17 Not Used

18

L18 Not Used

19

L19 Not Used

20

L20 Not Used

21

L21 Not Used

22

L22 Not Used

23

L23 Not Used

24

L24 Not Used

Table 21
8.1.2

P742

Logic input mapping

Relay output mapping


P741

P742

P743

R1 Fault phase A

R1 Main trip Phase A

R1 Main trip Phase A

R2 Fault phase B

R2 Main trip Phase B

R2 Main trip Phase B

R3 Fault phase C

R3 Main trip Phase C

R3 Main trip Phase C

R4 Z1 trip

R4 Local CB failed

R4 Local CB failed

R5 Z2 trip

R5 Local CB not available R5 Local CB not available

R6 Circuitry fault

R6 CB fail 3ph retrip

R6 CB fail 3ph retrip

R7 Z1 off

R7 Trip + end fault

R7 Trip + end fault

R8 Z2 off

R8 CB & isolator
supervision

R8 CB & isolator
supervision

R9 Not Used

10

R10 Not Used

11

R11 Not Used

12

R12 Not Used

13

R13 Not Used

14

R14 Not Used

15

R15 Not Used

16

R16 Not Used

17

R17 Not Used

18

R18 Not Used

19

R19 Not Used

20

R20 Not Used

21

R21 Not Used

Table 22

Relay output mapping

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740
8.1.3

Page 67/103

Relay output conditioning


P741

P742

P743

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Pick-Up 0ms

Not Used

10

Not Used

11

Not Used

12

Not Used

13

Not Used

14

Not Used

15

Not Used

16

Not Used

17

Not Used

18

Not Used

19

Not Used

20

Not Used

21

Not Used

Table 23

Relay output conditioning

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 68/103
8.1.4

MiCOM P740

LED mapping
P741

P742

P743

Fault Phase A

Q1 Position Closed

Q1 Position Closed

Fault Phase B

Q2 Position Closed

Q2 Position Closed

Fault Phase C

Q3 Position Closed

Q3 Position Closed

Trip 87BB

Not Used

Not Used

Trip 50BF

Local CB not available

Local CB not available

Circuitry Fault

Trip 87BB

Trip 87BB

Not used

Dead Zone Signal

Dead Zone Signal

Not used

Not used

Not used

P741

P742

P743

Latched

Not latched

Not latched

Latched

Not latched

Not latched

Latched

Not latched

Not latched

Latched

Not Used

Not Used

Latched

Not Latched

Not Latched

Not latched

Latched

Latched

Not Used

Latched

Latched

Not Used

Not Used

Not Used

Table 24
8.1.5

LED output conditioning

Table 25
8.1.6

LED mapping

LED output conditioning

Fault recorder start mapping


P741

P742

P743

Any Trip

Any Trip

Any Trip

Table 26

Fault recorder start mapping

Should a specific modification be required to the standard PSL, this should be


specified at order and it will, where possible, be incorporated into the scheme build
and tested accordingly.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

9.

Page 69/103

COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN PU AND CU


The P740 scheme can be either centralised in one cubicle or distributed in cubicles
housing other protection depending on the availability of space. Either way the
peripheral units still need to communicate with the central unit and vice versa. Each
central unit has upto 8 communication boards each accommodating inputs from 4
peripheral units. Thus each central unit can accommodate up to 32 peripheral units.

9.1

Communications link
The following communication media is used for the communication channel within
the P740 scheme. The data rate is 2.5 Mbits/sec.

9.2

Direct optical fibre link, 850nm multi-mode fibre


The units are connected directly using two 850nm multi-mode optical fibres for each
signalling channel. Multi-mode fibre type 62.5/125m is suitable and standard
BFOC/2.5 type fibre optic connectors are used. These are commonly known as ST
connectors (ST is a registered trademark of AT&T).
BB1

BB2

P742

P742
P742

P742

P742

P742
P742

Peripheral units

P742

P742

P741
P742

Optical fibre

P742
P741

Central unit

Figure 33: Module Interconnection


This is typically suitable for connection up to 1km.

P742
P742

Optical fibre

P742
P742

P742

Peripheral units

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 70/103
9.3

MiCOM P740

Optical budgets
When using fibre optics as a method of communication the type of fibre used and the
distance between devices needs to be considered. The following table shows the
optical budgets of the communications interface.
Parameter

850nm Multi mode

Min. transmit output level (average power)

-19.8dBm

Receiver sensitivity
(average power)

-25.4dBm

Optical budget

5.6dB

Less safety margin (3dB)

2.6dB 3dB

Typical cable loss

2.6dB/km

Max. transmission distance

1km

Table 27

Optical Budget

The total optical budget is given by transmitter output level minus the receiver
sensitivity and will indicate the total allowable losses that can be tolerated between
devices. A safety margin of 3dB is also included in the above table. This allows for
degradation of the fibre as a result of ageing and any losses in cable joints. The
remainder of the losses will come from the fibre itself. The figures given are typical
only and should only be used as a guide.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

10.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 71/103

UNDERTAKING A NUMERICAL DIFFERENTIAL BUSBAR PROTECTION


PROJECT
The substation construction will influence the protection scheme installed. It is
advisable that a scheme evaluation is conducted as soon as possible, preferably at
the same time as the definition of the equipment specification.
Only a few system parameters are required and it is vital that these are included.

10.1

10.2

10.3

General Substation information

Number of independent zones

Number of feeders, bus couplers, bus sections

Positions of bus sections

Positions of switchgear plant i.e. circuit breakers, isolators

Positions of CTs

Planned future extensions with circuit breaker, isolator and current transformer
(CT)

Short Circuit Levels

Maximum external fault current (phase to phase and phase to ground faults)

Minimum internal fault current (phase to phase and phase to ground faults)

Switchgear

Nominal CT ratio

Highest nominal primary current (CT In Max)

Lowest nominal primary current (CT In Min)

CT Knee point voltage (Vk)

CT secondary resistance (RCT)

Length and cross section of the conductors between CT and peripheral unit. (In
the absence of precise information, an estimate taken from the lowest CT ratio
will suffice).

Auxiliary contacts of disconnecting switches and tripping orders for circuit


breaker failure (irrespective of the how the CB fail scheme is to be implemented
i.e. internally or externally initiated).

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 72/103
10.4

MiCOM P740

Cubicle specifications
Cubicle specification is contract specific.
However, AREVA propose the following:

10.5

Single cubicle: 800x800x2000

Double cubicle: 1600x800x2000

Model: Schroff type Proline

Color: RAL 7032

Substation Architecture
Due to the flexibility of the differential busbar protection there is an infinite number of
busbar configurations that can be accommodated via the topology. Each may have
very different architecture and, therefore, vary in complexity.
You will find in the following pages example topologies of layouts most frequently
encountered. For each example, the number of central units and peripheral units
necessary to protect the busbars is specified.
Generally, the elements of the protection architecture will be identified in a similar
manner to the principal parts of the sub-station e.g. by the letters A and B.
Note:

A cubicle needs to be considered for a centralised solution


whereas if the peripheral units are distributed and the scheme is
distributed there is no requirement for a dedicated cubicle.

In both cases, and before any delivery, the topology will be thoroughly tested on
appropriate test platforms.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

11.

Page 73/103

STANDARD CONFIGURATIONS
The following information relates only to the more common standard schemes. For
further information on the accommodation of other busbar configurations consult
your AREVA representative.

P3782ENa

Figure 34: Single busbar application with bus section isolator


The above example shows a single busbar with a bus section isolator. It is split into
two zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. This configuration requires
1 central unit and n + 1 peripheral units (the additional peripheral unit being for the
bus section isolator). The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend on
the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3783ENa

Figure 35: Single busbar application with bus section circuit breaker
The above example shows a single busbar with a bus section circuit breaker. It is split
into two zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. The bus section circuit
breaker has CTs on either side. This configuration requires 1 central unit and n + 2

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 74/103

MiCOM P740

peripheral units (the additional peripheral units being for the bus section CTs). The
type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend on the i/o requirements of the
bay in question.
It is recommended that the CTs for feeder protection are sited such as to overlap with
the CTs defining the limits of each busbar protection zone.

P3784ENa

Figure 36: Breaker and a half scheme


The above example shows a breaker and a half scheme. The recommended solution
is to have two separate schemes. There are n feeders connected to each busbar.
Each scheme will require 1 central unit and n peripheral units. An other solution is to
use only one central unit and n peripheral units. The type of peripheral unit used for
each bay will depend on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3785ENa

Figure 37: Double busbar application with bus coupler


The above example shows a double busbar with a bus coupler. It is split into two
zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. The bus coupler circuit breaker
can have either a single CT (solution 1) on one side or CTs on both sides (solution 2).

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 75/103

This configuration requires 1 central unit and n + 1 peripheral units for solution 1 or
n + 2 peripheral units for solution 2. (The additional peripheral units being for the
bus coupler CTs). The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend on the
i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3786ENa

Figure 38: Traditional double busbar application with bus coupler and bus
section
The above example shows a double busbar with both a bus section and a bus
coupler. It is split into four zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. The
bus coupler and bus section circuit breakers can have either a single CT (solution 1
and 2) on one side or CTs on both sides (solution 1a or 2a). This configuration
requires 1 central unit and n plus the following number of peripheral units. The total
number of peripheral units required allows for a peripheral unit for the bus section
isolator on the upper bar.
Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution 1

"

"

Solution 1a

"

"

Solution 2

"

"

Solution 2a

"

"

n+3

n+5

n+4

n+4

Solution

Number of
peripheral units
required

If a second bus coupler is added i.e. one bus coupler either side of the bus section
Using solution 1
for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

Using solution
1a for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 76/103

MiCOM P740

Solution

Number of
peripheral units
required
Table 28

Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

n+4

n+7

n+5

n+6

Number of required PUs for figure 37

The number of additional peripheral units being dependant on the number of bus
section/bus coupler CTs. The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend
on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3787ENa

Figure 39: Double busbar application with bus coupler and bus section with
additional bus section isolators
The above example shows a double busbar with both a bus section and a bus
coupler. The bus section also has additional bus section isolators and allows for bus
section bypass. The scheme is split into four zones. There are n feeders connected to
the busbar. The bus coupler and bus section circuit breakers can have either a single
CT (solution 1 and 2) on one side or CTs on both sides (solution 1a or 2a). This
configuration requires 1 central unit and n plus the following number of peripheral
units. The total number of peripheral units required allow for a peripheral unit for the
bus section isolators.
Solution

Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution 1

"

"

Solution 1a

"

"

Solution 2

"

"

Solution 2a

"

"

n+3

n+5

n+4

n+4

Number of
peripheral units
required

If a second bus coupler is added i.e. one bus coupler either side of the bus section

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 77/103
Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Using solution 1
for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

Using solution
1a for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

n+4

n+7

n+5

n+6

Solution

Number of
peripheral units
required
Table 29

Number of required PUs for figure 38

The number of additional peripheral units being dependant on the number of bus
section/bus coupler CTs. The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend
on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3788ENa

Figure 40: Double busbar application with bus coupler and double bus
section circuit breaker arrangement
The above example shows a double busbar with both a bus section and a bus
coupler. There are circuit breakers on both the upper and lower bars. The scheme is
split into four zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. The bus coupler
and bus section circuit breakers can have either a single CT (solution 1 and 2) on one
side or CTs on both sides (solution 1a or 2a). This configuration requires 1 central
unit and n plus the following number of peripheral units. The total number of
peripheral units required allows for a peripheral unit for the bus section isolator on
the upper bar.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 78/103

MiCOM P740

Solution

Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on
each BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on
each BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on
each BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on
each BS

Solution 1

"

"

Solution 1a

"

"

Solution 2

"

"

Solution 2a

"

"

n+3

n+6

n+5

n+4

Number of
peripheral units
required

If a second bus coupler is added i.e. one bus coupler either side of the bus section
Using solution 1
for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

Using solution
1a for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

n+4

n+8

n+6

n+6

Number of
peripheral units
required
Table 30

Number of required PUs for figure 39

The number of additional peripheral units being dependant on the number of bus
section/bus coupler CTs. The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend
on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3789ENa

Figure 41: Double busbar application with a bus coupler. The transfer
busbar is not included in the protection zone.
The above example shows a double busbar with a bus coupler and a transfer busbar.
As the transfer busbar is not included in the protected zone it can be considered
similarly to figure 37, but an additional peripheral unit must be included for the
transfer bay.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 79/103

It is split into two zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. The bus
coupler circuit breaker can have either a single CT (solution 1) on one side or CTs on
both sides (solution 2). This configuration requires 1 central unit and n + 2
peripheral units for solution 1 or n + 3 peripheral units for solution 2. (The
additional peripheral units being for the bus coupler CTs and the transfer bay). The
type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend on the i/o requirements of the
bay in question.

P3790ENa

Figure 42: Double busbar application with a bus coupler. The transfer
busbar is included in the protection zone.
The above example shows a double busbar with a bus coupler and a transfer busbar.
The transfer busbar is included in the protected zone. It can be considered similarly to
figure 36, where an additional peripheral unit has been included for the transfer bay.
The only difference being the positioning of the CTs and therefore the peripheral
units.
Again it is split into two zones. With an additional zone for the transfer bay, there are
n feeders connected to the busbar. The bus coupler circuit breaker can have either a
single CT (solution 1) on one side or CTs on both sides (solution 2). This
configuration requires 1 central unit and n + 2 peripheral units for solution 1 or n +
3 peripheral units for solution 2. (The additional peripheral units being for the bus
coupler CTs and the transfer bay). The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will
depend on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 80/103

MiCOM P740

P3791ENa

Figure 43: Triple busbar application with bus coupler and bus section
The above example shows a triple busbar with both a bus section and a bus coupler.
The bus section also has additional bus section isolators and allows for bus section
bypass. The scheme is split into six zones. There are n feeders connected to the
busbar. The bus coupler and bus section circuit breakers can have either a single CT
(solution 1 and 2) on one side or CTs on both sides (solution 1a or 2a). This
configuration requires 1 central unit and n plus the following number of peripheral
units. The total number of peripheral units required allows for a peripheral unit for
the bus section isolators.
Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on BS

Solution 1

"

"

Solution 1a

"

"

Solution 2

"

"

Solution 2a

"

"

n+3

n+5

n+4

n+4

Solution

Number of
peripheral units
required

If a second bus coupler is added i.e. one bus coupler either side of the bus section
Using solution 1
for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

Using solution
1a for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

n+4

n+7

n+5

n+6

Number of
peripheral units
required
Table 31

Number of required PUs for figure 42

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 81/103

The number of additional peripheral units being dependant on the number of bus
section/bus coupler CTs. The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend
on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P3792ENa

INCLUDEPICTUREM

ERGEFORMAT
Figure 44: Double bus bar with two circuit breakers per feeder
The above example shows a double busbar with two circuit breakers on each feeder.
The scheme is split into two zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar.
This configuration requires 1 central unit and 2n peripheral units. In each bay the
two peripheral units will share the CT, but each circuit breaker will be assigned to a
separate peripheral unit.

P3793ENa

Figure 45: Mesh Corner


The above example shows a mesh corner arrangement. The scheme is split into four
zones. This configuration requires 1 central unit and 12 peripheral units.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 82/103

MiCOM P740

P3794ENa

Figure 46: Six main bus for s/s CB bus-sections and CB by-pass
The above example shows a six busbar arrangement with both a bus section and a
bus coupler. It is also possible to include bypass facilities. The scheme is split into six
zones. There are n feeders connected to the busbar. The bus coupler, bus section
and bypass circuit breakers can have either a single CT (solution 1, 2 and 3) on one
side or CTs on both sides (solution 1A, 2A and 3A).
This configuration requires 1 central unit and n plus the following number of
peripheral units.
Solution

Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on
each BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on
each BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on
each BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on
each BS

Solution 1

"

"

Solution 1a

"

"

Solution 2

"

"

Solution 2a

"

"

n+4

n+8

n+7

n+5

Number of
peripheral units
required

If bypass facilities are to be included


Using solution 3

"

"

Using solution
3a

"

"

n+5

n + 10

n+8

n+8

Number of
peripheral units
required

If a second bus coupler is added i.e. one bus coupler either side of the bus section
and no bypass facilities

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 83/103

Solution

Solution A
1 CT on BC
& 1 CT on
each BS

Solution B
2 CT on BC
& 2 CT on
each BS

Solution C
1 CT on BC
& 2 CT on
each BS

Solution D
2 CT on BC
& 1 CT on
each BS

Using solution 1
for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

Using solution
1a for the 2nd
coupler

"

"

n+5

n + 10

n+8

n+7

Number of
peripheral units
required

If a second bus coupler is added i.e. one bus coupler either side of the bus section
and bypass facilities are included
Using solution 3

"

"

Using solution
3a

"

"

n+6

n + 12

n+9

n + 10

Number of
peripheral units
required
Table 32

Number of required PUs for figure 46

The number of additional peripheral units being dependant on the number of bus
section/bus coupler CTs. The type of peripheral unit used for each bay will depend
on the i/o requirements of the bay in question.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 84/103

12.

MiCOM P740

MEASUREMENTS
The relay produces a variety of both directly measured and calculated power system
quantities. These measurement values are updated on a per second basis and are
summarised below:

Phase currents: IA, IB, IC, IN

Sequence currents: I0, I1, I2

Differential and Bias currents: Idiff A, B, C, N and Ibias A, B, C, N

check zone differential currents: Idiff CZ A, B, C, N

There are also measured values from the protection functions, which are also
displayed under the measurement columns of the menu; these are described in the
section on the relevant protection function.
For the Central Unit both bias and differential current for all zones, including the
check zone differential current are displayed in the Measurement columns in addition
to relevant zone bias and differential currents.
For the Peripheral Unit phase currents, phase currents and sequence current values
relating to the associated bay CT are displayed in the Measurement columns in
addition to relevant zone bias and differential currents.
12.1

Measured currents
The relay produces phase current values. They are produced directly from the DFT
(Discrete Fourier Transform) used by the relay protection functions and present both
magnitude and phase angle measurement.

12.2

Sequence currents
Sequence quantities are produced by the relay from the measured Fourier values;
these are displayed as magnitude values.

12.3

Settings
There are different set-up menus for the Central Unit P741 and the Peripheral Units
P742 and P743. The following settings under the heading Measurement Set-up can
be used to configure the relay measurement function in the P741.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

Default Display Description

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

Description/Plant Reference/Frequency/Access
Level/3Ph + N Current/Date and Time

Common conventional ratio


Ibp Current Set
Table 33

1,000A

1A

Measurement Setup Column P741

10,000A

1A

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 85/103

The following settings under the heading Measurement Setup can be used to
configure the relay measurement function in the P742/P743.
MENU TEXT

DEFAULT
SETTING

MINIMUM

MAXIMUM

STEP SIZE

Default Display Description

Description/Plant Reference/Frequency/Access
Level/3Ph + N Current/Date and Time

Local Values

Secondary

Primary/Secondary

Remote Values

Primary

Primary/Secondary

Table 34

Measurement Setup Column P742/P743

12.3.1 Common Conventional Ratio (Ibp)


This was discussed in section 4.2. Changing the ratio in this cell adjusts the base ratio
for the calculations over the entire scheme and no further setting changes need to be
carried out.
This current corresponds to primary values, which can be set to between 1A and
10,000A. In practice, a common base current of 1,000A is usually selected.
12.3.2 Default Display
This setting can be used to select the default display from a range of options, note
that it is also possible to view the other default displays whilst at the default level
using the ! and " keys. However, once the 15 minute timeout elapses the default
display will revert to that selected by this setting.
12.3.3 Local Values
This setting controls whether measured values via the front panel user interface and
the front Courier port are displayed as primary or secondary quantities.
12.3.4 Remote Values
This setting controls whether measured values via the rear communication port are
displayed as primary or secondary quantities.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 86/103

13.

MiCOM P740

EVENT & FAULT RECORDS


The relay records and time tags up to 250 events and stores them in non-volatile
(battery backed up) memory. This enables the system operator to establish the
sequence of events that occurred within the relay following a particular power system
condition, switching sequence etc. When the available space is exhausted, the oldest
event is automatically overwritten by the new one.
The real time clock within the relay provides the time tag to each event, to a
resolution of 1ms.
The event records are available for viewing either via the front plate LCD or remotely,
via the communications ports.
Local viewing on the LCD is achieved in the menu column entitled VIEW RECORDS.
This column allows viewing of event, fault and maintenance records. Different
columns exist in the Central unit and the Peripheral Unit. The column for the Central
Unit is shown below in table 35. The column displayed in the Peripheral Units is
shown in table 36.
VIEW RECORDS
LCD Text

Description for CU

Last Record
Menu Cell Ref
Time & Date

Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal
Real Time Clock

Record Text

Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer


to following sections)

Record Value

Up to 32 bit binary flag or integer representative of the


occurrence (refer to following sections)

Select Fault

Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault


record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value
of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on.

Active Group

Active group when fault recorder starts

Faulted Phase

Phase initiating fault recorder starts

Start Elements

Note relevant for CU

Trip Elements

Trip 87BB, Trip 87BB block, Trip 50BF, Trip 50BF block,
Dead Zone signal, Manual trip zone.

Time Stamp

Time and date of fault recorder start

Fault Alarms
System Frequency
Fault duration

- if fault detected by differential protection => delay


between first detection of differential current and
disappearance of differential current
- if breaker failure order received from PU => delay
between reception of order and disappearance

IA diff

Differential current of faulted zone

IB diff

Differential current of faulted zone

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 87/103

VIEW RECORDS
LCD Text

Description for CU

IC diff

Differential current of faulted zone

IN diff

Differential current of faulted zone

IA bias

Differential current of faulted zone

IB bias

Bias current of faulted zone

IC bias

Bias current of faulted zone

IN bias

Bias current of faulted zone

IA CZ diff

Differential current of check zone

IB CZ diff

Differential current of check zone

IC CZ diff

Differential current of check zone

IN CZ diff

Differential current of check zone

Faulted Zone

Zone where fault is detected

Select Report (Maint)

Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required


report from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value
of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection
starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements etc.
associated with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.

Report Text (Maint)

Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer


to following sections)

Type (Maint)

These cells are numbers representative of the


occurrence. They form a specific error code which
should be quoted in any related correspondence to
AREVA.

Data
Reset Indication

Table 35

Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED


indications provided that the relevant protection element
has reset.

View Records Column for the Central Unit

VIEW RECORDS
LCD Text

Description for PU

Last Record
Menu Cell Ref
Time & Date

Time & Date Stamp for the event given by the internal
Real Time Clock

Record Text

Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer


to following sections)

Record Value

Up to 32 bit binary flag or integer representative of the


occurrence (refer to following sections)

Select Fault

Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required fault

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 88/103

MiCOM P740

VIEW RECORDS
LCD Text

Description for PU
record from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value
of 0 corresponds to the latest fault and so on.

Active Group

Active group when fault recorder starts

Faulted Phase

Phase initiating fault recorder starts

Start Elements

Start I>1, Start I>2, Start I>2BB, Start I>BB, Start IN>1,
Start IN>2, Start IN>2BB, Start IN>BB

Trip Elements

Trip I>1, Trip I>2, Trip IN>1, Trip IN>2, Trip 87BB,
Trip CBFail tBF1, Trip CBFail tBF2, Trip CBFail tBF3, Trip
CBFail tBF4, Trip 50BF (CU), Manual Trip zone, Trip
87BB block

Time Stamp

Time and date of fault recorder start

Fault Alarms
System Frequency
Relay Trip Time

Delay between reception of signal and end of trip on PU

IA

Feeder currents

IB

Feeder currents

IC

Feeder currents

IN

Feeder currents

Select Report (Main)

Setting range from 0 to 4. This selects the required


report from the possible 5 that may be stored. A value
of 0 corresponds to the latest report and so on.
The following cells show all the fault flags, protection
starts, protection trips, fault location, measurements etc.
associated with the fault, i.e. the complete fault record.

Report Text (Maint)

Up to 32 Character description of the occurrence (refer


to following sections)

Type (Maint)

These cells are numbers representative of the


occurrence. They form a specific error code which
should be quoted in any related correspondence to
AREVA.

Data
Reset Indication

Table 36

Either Yes or No. This serves to reset the trip LED


indications provided that the relevant protection element
has reset.

View Records Column for the Peripheral Unit

Note:

That a full list of all the event types and the meaning of their
values is given in the Configuration/Mapping Chapter (P740/EN
GC/A11).

Application Notes
MiCOM P740
13.1

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 89/103

Types of Event
An event may be a change of state of control input or output relay, an alarm
condition, setting change etc. The following sections show the various items that
constitute an event:-

13.1.1 Change of state of opto-isolated inputs


If one or more of the opto (logic) inputs has changed state since the last time that the
protection algorithm ran, the new status is logged as an event. When this event is
selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible as shown
below;
Time & Date of Event
LOGIC INPUTS
Event Value
0101010101010101
The Event Value is an 8, 16 or 24 bit word showing the status of the opto inputs,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to opto input 1 etc. The
same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.
13.1.2 Change of state of one or more output relay contacts
If one or more of the output relay contacts has changed state since the last time that
the protection algorithm ran, then the new status is logged as an event. When this
event is selected to be viewed on the LCD, three applicable cells will become visible
as shown below;
Time & Date of Event
OUTPUT CONTACTS
Event Value
010101010101010101010
The Event Value is an 8, 16 or 21-bit word showing the status of the output contacts,
where the least significant bit (extreme right) corresponds to output contact 1 etc. The
same information is present if the event is extracted and viewed via PC.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 90/103

MiCOM P740

13.1.3 Relay alarm conditions


Any alarm conditions generated by the relays will also be logged as individual events.
The following table shows examples of some of the alarm conditions and how they
appear in the event list:Alarm Condition
Battery Fail
Field Voltage Fail
Setting group via opto
invalid
Protection Disabled
Frequency out of range
CB Trip Fail Protection
Table 37

Resulting Event
Event Text
Battery Fail ON/OFF
Field V Fail ON/OFF
Setting Grp Invalid ON/OFF

Event Value
Number from 0 to 31
Number from 0 to 31
Number from 0 to 31

Protn Disabled ON/OFF


Freq out of Range ON/OFF
CB Fail ON/OFF

Number from 0 to 31
Number from 0 to 31
Number from 0 to 31

Alarm Configuration Column

The previous table shows the abbreviated description that is given to the various
alarm conditions and also a corresponding value between 0 and 31. This value is
appended to each alarm event in a similar way as for the input and output events
previously described. It is used by the event extraction software, such as MiCOM S1,
to identify the alarm and is therefore invisible if the event is viewed on the LCD.
Either ON or OFF is shown after the description to signify whether the particular
condition has become operated or has reset.
13.1.3.1 Protection element starts and trips
Any operation of protection elements, (either a start or a trip condition), will be
logged as an event record, consisting of a text string indicating the operated element
and an event value. Again, this value is intended for use by the event extraction
software, such as MiCOM S1, rather than for the user, and is therefore invisible when
the event is viewed on the LCD.
13.1.3.2 General events
A number of events come under the heading of General Events - an example is
shown below:Nature of Event

Displayed text in event record

Displayed value

Level 1 password modified,


either from user interface,
front or rear port

PW1 edited UI, F or R

Table 38
A complete list of the General Events is given in the Configuration/Mapping
Chapter (P740/EN GC).

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 91/103

13.1.3.3 Fault records


Each time a fault record is generated, an event is also created. The event simply
states that a fault record was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
Note:

That viewing of the actual fault record is carried out in the Select
Fault cell further down the VIEW RECORDS column, which is
selectable from up to 5 records. These records consist of fault
flags, fault measurements etc. Also note that the time stamp
given in the fault record itself will be more accurate than the
corresponding stamp given in the event record as the event is
logged some time after the actual fault record is generated.

13.1.3.4 Maintenance reports


Internal failures detected by the self-monitoring circuitry, such as watchdog failure,
field voltage failure etc are logged into a maintenance report. The Maintenance
Report holds up to 5 such events and is accessed from the Select Maint cell at the
bottom of the VIEW RECORDS column.
Each entry consists of a self explanatory text string and a Type and Data cell, which
are explained in the menu extract at the beginning of this section and in further detail
in Configuration / Mapping Chapter (P740/EN GC).
Each time a Maintenance Report is generated, an event is also created. The event
simply states that a report was generated, with a corresponding time stamp.
13.1.3.5 Setting Changes
Changes to any setting within the relay are logged as an event. Two examples are
shown in the following table:Type of Setting Change

Displayed Text in Event Record Displayed Value

Control/Support Setting

C & S Changed

Group 1 Change

Group 1 Changed

Table 39
Note:

Control/Support settings are communications, measurement,


CT/VT ratio settings etc, which are not duplicated within the four
setting groups. When any of these settings are changed, the
event record is created simultaneously. However, changes to
protection or disturbance recorder settings will only generate an
event once the settings have been confirmed at the setting trap.

13.1.4 Resetting of event/fault records


If it is required to delete either the event, fault or maintenance reports, this may be
done from within the RECORD CONTROL column.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 92/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

13.1.5 Viewing event records via MiCOM S1 Support Software


When the event records are extracted and viewed on a PC they look slightly different
than when viewed on the LCD. The following shows an example of how various
events appear when displayed using MiCOM S1:-

As can be seen, the first line gives the description and time stamp for the event, whilst
the additional information that is displayed below may be collapsed via the +/symbol.
For further information regarding events and their specific meaning, refer to
Configuration / Mapping Chapter (P740/EN GC).

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 93/103

13.1.6 Event Filtering


It is possible to disable the reporting of events from any user interface that supports
setting changes. The settings, which control the various types of events, are in the
Record Control column.
The effect of setting each to disabled is as follows:
Alarm Event

None of the occurrences that produce an alarm will result in


an event being generated.
The presence of any alarms is still reported by the alarm LED
flashing and the alarm bit being set in the communications
status byte.
Alarms can still be read using the Read key on the relay front
panel.

Relay O/P Event

No event will be generated for any change in relay output


state.

Opto Input
Event

No event will be generated for any change in logic input state.

General Event

No General Events will be generated.

Fault Rec Event

No event will be generated for any fault that produces a fault


record.
The fault records can still be viewed by operating the Select
Maintsetting in column 0100.

Protection Event

Any operation of protection elements will not be logged as an


event.

Table 40
Note:

That some occurrences will result in more than one type of event,
e.g. a battery failure will produce an alarm event and a
maintenance record event.

If the Protection Event setting is Enabled a further set of settings is revealed which
allow the event generation by individual DDB signals to be enabled or disabled.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 94/103

14.

MiCOM P740

DISTURBANCE RECORDER
The integral disturbance recorder has an area of memory specifically set aside for
record storage. The number of records that may be stored is dependent upon the
selected recording duration but the relays typically have the capability of storing a
minimum of 20 records in the PU and 8 records in the CU, duration depends on the
unit, 1.2 seconds in the CU and 10.5 seconds in the PU. Disturbance records
continue to be recorded until the available memory is exhausted, at which time the
oldest record(s) are overwritten to make space for the newest one.
The recorder stores actual samples that are taken at a rate of 12 samples per cycle.
Minimum delay between 2 disturbance records (CU) is 5s.
Each disturbance record consists of eight analogue data channels and thirty-two
digital data channels. Note that the relevant CT ratios for the analogue channels are
also extracted to enable scaling to primary quantities).
The Disturbance recorder settings are different for the Central Unit and the Peripheral
Units as shown in the configuration columns below.
Note:

When a 5A CT is used it must be ensured that the CT ratio


entered is 5:5 to ensure correct operation of the disturbance
recorder.

The DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu column for the central unit is shown in table
41:MENU TEXT

DEFAULT SETTING

SETTING RANGE
MIN

STEP SIZE

MAX

DISTURB RECORDER
Duration

1.2s

Fixed value

Trigger Position

50%

Trigger Mode

Single

Non settable

Analog Channel 1

IA diff

Analog Channel 2

IB diff

Analog Channel 3

IC diff

Analog Channel 4

IN diff

Analog Channel 5

IA bias

Analog Channel 6

IB bias

Analog Channel 7

IC bias

Analog Channel 8

IN bias

Digital Inputs 1 to 32

Relays 1 to 8 and
Optos 1 to 8

Table 41

50%

17%

Any of 8 O/P Contacts or Any of 8


Opto Inputs or Internal Digital
Signals

Disturbance Recorder Menu Column for the Central Unit

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 95/103

The DISTURBANCE RECORDER menu column for the peripheral unit is shown in
table 42:MENU TEXT

DEFAULT SETTING

SETTING RANGE
MIN

MAX

STEP SIZE

DISTURB RECORDER
Duration

1.5

0.1s

10.5s

0.01s

Trigger Position

33.3%

100%

0.1%

Trigger Mode

Single

Single or Extended

Analog Channel 1

IA

Analog Channel 2

IB

Analog Channel 3

IC

Analog Channel 4

IN

Analog Channel 5

Not used

Analog Channel 6

Not used

Analog Channel 7

Not used

Analog Channel 8

Not used

Digital Inputs 1 to 32

Relays 1 to 8 and
Optos 1 to 16/24

Any of 8 or 21 O/P Contacts or Any


of 16 or 24 Opto Inputs or Internal
Digital Signals

Inputs 1 to 32
Trigger

No trigger except
dedicated trip relay
outputs which are set
to trigger L/H

No trigger, Trigger L/H, Trigger H/L

Table 42

Disturbance Recorder Menu Column for the Peripheral Unit

Note:

The available analogue and digital signals will differ between


relay types and models and so the individual Courier database
in Chapter Configuration/Mapping (P740/EN GC) should be
referred to when determining default settings etc.

The pre and post fault recording times are set by a combination of the Duration and
Trigger Position cells. Duration sets the overall recording time and the Trigger
Position sets the trigger point as a percentage of the duration. For example, the
default settings for the peripheral units show that the overall recording time is set to
1.5s with the trigger point being at 33.3% of this, giving 0.5s pre-fault and 1s post
fault recording times.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 96/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

If a further trigger occurs whilst a recording is taking place, the recorder will ignore
the trigger if the Trigger Mode has been set to Single. However, if this has been
set to Extended, the post trigger timer will be reset to zero, thereby extending the
recording time.
As can be seen from the menu, each of the analogue channels is selectable from the
available analogue inputs to the relay. The digital channels may be mapped to any
of the opto isolated inputs or output contacts, in addition to a number of internal
relay digital signals, such as protection starts, LEDs etc. The complete list of these
signals may be found by viewing the available settings in the relay menu or via a
setting file in MiCOM S1. Any of the digital channels may be selected to trigger the
disturbance recorder on either a low to high or a high to low transition, via the Input
Trigger cell. The default trigger settings are that any dedicated trip output contacts
(e.g. relay 3) will trigger the recorder.
It is not possible to view the disturbance records locally via the LCD; they must be
extracted using suitable software such as MiCOM S1.

Application Notes

P740/EN AP/D11

MiCOM P740

15.

Page 97/103

COMMISSIONING TEST MENU


To help minimise the time required to test MiCOM relays the relay provides several
test facilities under the COMMISSION TESTS menu heading. There are menu cells
which allow the status of the opto-isolated inputs, output relay contacts, internal
digital data bus (DDB) signals and user-programmable LEDs to be monitored.
Additionally there are cells to test the operation of the output contacts and userprogrammable LEDs.
The following table shows the commissioning test relay menu, including the available
setting ranges and factory defaults:
Menu text

Default setting

Settings

Opto I/P Status

Relay O/P Status

Test Port Status

LED Status

Monitor Bits

64 to 71 step 1 per bit

0 to 511 step 1

Test Mode

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Test Pattern

All bits set to 0

0 = Not Operated
1 = Operated

Contact Test

No Operation

No Operation
Apply Test
Remove Test

Test LEDs

No Operation

No Operation
Apply Test

87BB Monitoring

All bits set to 0


Each bit represents 1
zone

0 = In Service
1 = Out of Service

87BB & 50BF disabled

All bits set to 0


Each bit represents 1
zone

0 = In Service
1 = Out of Service

BB Trip Pattern

All bits set to 0

0 = In Service
1 = Out of Service

BB Trip Command

No Operation

No Operation
Apply Test

COMMISSION TESTS

Table 43

Commissioning Tests Column for CU

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 98/103

MiCOM P740

Menu text

Default setting

Settings

Opto I/P Status

Relay O/P Status

Test Port Status

LED Status

Monitor Bits

64 to 71 step 1 per bit

0 to 511 step 1

Test Mode

Disabled

Enabled/Disabled

Test Pattern

All bits set to 0

0 = Not Operated
1 = Operated

Contact Test

No Operation

No Operation
Apply Test
Remove Test

Test LEDs

No Operation

No Operation
Apply Test

Position Pattern

0 79 step 1

Position Test

No operation

No Operation
Apply Test

COMMISSION TESTS

Table 44
15.1

Commissioning Tests Column for PU

Opto I/P status


This menu cell displays the status of the relays opto-isolated inputs as a binary string,
a 1 indicating an energised opto-isolated input and a 0 a de-energised one. If the
cursor is moved along the binary numbers the corresponding label text will be
displayed for each logic input.
It can be used during commissioning or routine testing to monitor the status of the
opto-isolated inputs whilst they are sequentially energised with a suitable dc voltage.

15.2

Relay O/P status


This menu cell displays the status of the digital data bus (DDB) signals that result in
energisation of the output relays as a binary string, a 1 indicating an operated state
and 0 a non-operated state. If the cursor is moved along the binary numbers the
corresponding label text will be displayed for each relay output.
The information displayed can be used during commissioning or routine testing to
indicate the status of the output relays when the relay is in service. Additionally fault
finding for output relay damage can be performed by comparing the status of the
output contact under investigation with its associated bit.
Note:

When the Test Mode cell is set to Enabled this cell will
continue to indicate which contacts would operate if the relay
was in-service, it does not show the actual status of the output
relays.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740
15.3

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 99/103

Test Port status


This menu cell displays the status of the eight digital data bus (DDB) signals that have
been allocated in the Monitor Bit cells. If the cursor is moved along the binary
numbers the corresponding DDB signal text string will be displayed for each monitor
bit.
By using this cell with suitable monitor bit settings, the state of the DDB signals can be
displayed as various operating conditions or sequences are applied to the relay.
Thus the programmable scheme logic can be tested.
As an alternative to using this cell, the optional monitor/download port test box can
be plugged into the monitor/download port located behind the bottom access cover.
Details of the monitor/download port test box can be found in section 6.11 of this
chapter.

15.4

LED status
The LED Status cell is an eight bit binary string that indicates which of the
user-programmable LEDs on the relay are illuminated when accessing the relay from
a remote location, a 1 indicating a particular LED is lit and a 0 not lit.
THE MONITOR/DOWNLOAD PORT DOES NOT HAVE ELECTRICAL ISOLATED AGAINST
INDUCED VOLTAGES ON THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNEL. IT SHOULD THEREFORE ONLY
BE USED FOR LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS.

15.5

Test mode

15.5.1 Test mode for PU


This cell is used to allow secondary injection testing to be performed on the relay,
without operation of the trip command, or commissioning of other relays in the same
bay as the PU, without mal-operation of the breaker failure protection. It also enables
the user to directly test the output contacts and the effect of plant position via the
application of controlled tests signals (forcing see Sections 15.11 and 15.12).
Two test modes are available:

In the I/O disable mode, the busbar protection remains in service on the
feeder but no trip is possible on local breaker (tripping contacts RL1, RL2, RL3
disabled). The topology algorithm uses last known position of the circuit
breaker and isolator(s). Secondary injection cannot be carried out as it could
invoke a differential protection trip command.

In the Out of Service mode, the feeder must be physically disconnected from
any zone. The busbar protection does not take into account this feeder and it is
not possible to trip the breaker(tripping contacts RL1, RL2, RL3 disabled). The
topology algorithm uses last known position of the circuit breaker and
isolator(s). This mode allows secondary injection testing to be performed on the
relay.

When a test mode is select, the relay is out of service causing an alarm condition to
be recorded and the yellow Out of Service LED to illuminate. Once testing is
complete the cell must be set back to Disabled to restore the relay back to service.

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 100/103

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

15.5.2 Test mode for CU


This cell is used to allow commissioning of busbar and general breaker failure
protection. It also enables a facility to directly test the output contacts by applying
menu controlled tests signals. During the test mode, opto inputs and outputs contacts
remain in last known state before the test mode is selected.
To select test mode this cell should be set to Enabled which takes the relay out of
service causing an alarm condition to be recorded and the yellow Out of Service
LED to illuminate. Once testing is complete the cell must be set back to Disbled to
restore the relay back to service.
WHEN THE TEST MODE CELL IS SET TO ENABLED, THE RELAY SCHEME LOGIC DOES NOT
DRIVE THE OUTPUT RELAYS AND HENCE THE CU WILL NOT TRIP THE ASSOCIATED CIRCUIT
BREAKER IF A BUSBAR FAULT OCCURS (COMMISSIONING MODE 1 AND 2).
HOWEVER, THE COMMUNICATIONS CHANNELS WITH REMOTE RELAYS REMAIN ACTIVE,
WHICH, IF SUITABLE PRECAUTIONS ARE NOT TAKEN, COULD LEAD TO THE REMOTE ENDS
TRIPPING WHEN CURRENT TRANSFORMERS ARE ISOLATED OR INJECTION TESTS ARE
PERFORMED.

15.6

Test pattern
The Test Pattern cell is used to select the output relay contacts that will be tested
when the Contact Test cell is set to Apply Test. The cell has a binary string with
one bit for each user-configurable output contact which can be set to 1 to operate
the output under test conditions and 0 to not operate it.

15.7

Contact test
When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the contacts set for operation
(set to 1) in the Test Pattern cell change state. After the test has been applied the
command text on the LCD will change to No Operation and the contacts will remain
in the Test State until reset issuing the Remove Test command. The command text
on the LCD will again revert to No Operation after the Remove Test command has
been issued.
Note:

15.8

When the Test Mode cell is set to Enabled the Relay O/P
Status cell does not show the current status of the output relays
and hence can not be used to confirm operation of the output
relays. Therefore it will be necessary to monitor the state of each
contact in turn.

Test LEDs
When the Apply Test command in this cell is issued the eight user-programmable
LEDs will illuminate for approximately 2 seconds before they extinguish and the
command text on the LCD reverts to No Operation.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740
15.9

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 101/103

Busbar Monitoring (only in CU)


The BB monitoring cell is used to select the status of each zone. This cell has a
binary string with one bit per zone which can be set to 1 to disable busbar
protection and 0 to keep the zone in operating mode. When a zone is set to 1, the
current sum calculation remains active for monitoring but a trip order cannot be
generated by the busbar protection, only from the breaker failure protection. Zones
can be in busbar monitoring when others zones remain active.

15.10

Busbar (BB) & Circuit Breaker Fail (CBF) Disable (only in CU)
The BB & CBF disable cell is used to select the status of each zone. This cell has a
binary string with one bit per zone which can be set to 1 to disable busbar &
breaker failure protection and 0 to maintain the zone in operating mode. When a
zone is set to 1, the current sum calculation remains active for monitoring but trip
orders cannot be sent by either the busbar protection or the breaker failure
protection. Zones can be in ' BB & CBF disable ' when others zones remain active.

15.11

Position Pattern (only in PU)


The Position Pattern cell is used to force the position of the circuit breaker and
isolator in the topology algorithm when the Position Test cell is set to Apply Test.
This cell has a binary string with one bit per each isolator and one for circuit breaker.
These can be set to 1 to simulate the closed position or 0 to simulate the open
position.

15.12

Position Test (only in PU)


When the Apply test command in this cell is issued, the states set in the position
pattern cell are sent to the topology algorithm. After the test has been applied the
command text on the LCD will change to No operation and the topology does not
change until the Remove Test command has been applied.

P740/EN AP/D11

Application Notes

Page 102/103

16.

MiCOM P740

MONITOR TOOL
Software monitor of MiCOM S1 is designed for 8 zones substation. Consequently, if
you open connection with P741 which protects 4 zones substation, there are error
message to inform you that cells corresponding to topology and measurements of
zone 5 to 8 can not be displayed.

You can use monitor tool even if this error message appears.
To remove error message, you have to remove cells in the default file :

Open file celllist.txt with text editor (for example notepad). This file is
located in directory Monitor in the path of MiCOM S1 install (default is
c:\Programmes Files\AREVA\MiCOM S1\Monitor)

Go to line [P741], referring to documentation Menu Database P740/EN GC

Remove addresses of cell that you dont want to display after the line
/Measurement.
For example, to remove cell [Topology 1, Current node 5], delete line
0405

Save file

Later if you want to display new zone, do reverse operation.

Application Notes
MiCOM P740

P740/EN AP/D11
Page 103/103

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/36

TECHNICAL DATA

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 2/36

MiCOM P740

CONTENTS
1.

REFERENCE CONDITIONS

2.

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS

3.

CONTROL

12

4.

MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES

13

5.

POST FAULT ANALYSIS

14

6.

PLANT SUPERVISION

16

7.

LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS

17

8.

DIAGNOSTICS

18

9.

RATINGS

19

10.

CT REQUIREMENTS (P740 RANGE)

22

11.

HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND (P740 RANGE)

25

12.

ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

26

13.

ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT

31

14.

MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT

32

15.

INFLUENCING QUANTITIES

34

16.

MISCELLANEOUS

35

17.

EC EMC COMPLIANCE (P740 RANGE)

36

18.

EC LVD COMPLIANCE (P740 RANGE)

36

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

1.

Page 3/36

REFERENCE CONDITIONS
The accuracy claims within this document are relevant for relays operating under the
following reference conditions.
Quantity

Reference conditions

Test tolerance

Ambient temperature

20 C

2C

Atmospheric pressure

86kPa to 106kPa

Relative humidity

45 to 75 %

Input energising quantity

Reference conditions

Test tolerance

Current

5%

Voltage

Vn

5%

Frequency

50 or 60Hz

0.5%

Auxiliary supply

DC 24V, 48V or 110V


AC 63.5V or 110V

5%

Settings

Reference value

Time Multiplier Setting

1.0

Time Dial

General

2.

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
The following functional claims are applicable to the P740 range of busbar differential
relays.
Note however that not all the protection functions listed below are applicable to every
relay.

2.1

Phase busbar differential protection

2.1.1

Phase current biased differential characteristic settings


Name
s
D>2

Range

Step Size

[0.02 - 1.0] x bp

0.01 x bp

[0.1 4] x bp

0.01x bp

20 90%

1%

Characteristic shape determined by the following formula:


For diff greater than: D>2
|diff| = k|bias|+ S

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 4/36

MiCOM P740

Idiff

0perate

Differential
Current
Percentage
bias k

Restrain
ID>2
IS
ID>1

Ibias

Bias Current

2.2

Earth fault busbar differential protection

2.2.1

Earth current biased differential characteristic settings


Name
SN

Range

Step Size

[0.02 - 1.0] x bp

0.01 x bp

[0.03 2] x bp

0.01x bp

20 90%

1%

DN>2
K

Characteristic shape determined by the following formula:


For diff greater than: DN>2
|diff| = k|bias|+ SN

Idiff

0perate

Differential
Current
Percentage
bias k

Restrain
IDN>2
ISN
IDN>1

Bias Current

Ibias

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 5/36

2.3

Three Phase Overcurrent Protection

2.3.1

Setting ranges

2.3.2

Stage

Range

Step size

Phase element

1st Stage

0.1 32n

0.01n

" "

2nd Stage

0.1 32n

0.01n

Time delay settings


Each overcurrent element has an independent time setting and each time delay is
capable of being blocked by an optically isolated input:
Element

Time delay type

1st Stage

Definite Time (DT) or IDMT

2nd Stage

DT

Curve type

Reset time delay

IEC / UK curves

DT only

All other

IDMT or DT

2.3.2.1 Inverse Time (IDMT) Characteristic


IDMT characteristics are selectable from a choice of four IEC/UK and five IEEE/US
curves as shown in the table below.
The IEC/UK IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

t = T + L
(I Is ) 1

The IEEE/US IDMT curves conform to the following formula:

t=
Where:

t
K

L
T
TD

TD K

+ L

(
)
I
Is

1
7

= operation time
= constant
= measured current
= current threshold setting
= constant
= ANSI/IEEE constant (zero for IEC/UK curves)
= Time Multiplier Setting for IEC/UK curves
= Time Dial Setting for IEEE/US curves

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 6/36

MiCOM P740
IDMT Curve description

Standard

K Constant

Constant

L Constant

Standard Inverse

IEC

0.14

0.02

Very Inverse

IEC

13.5

Extremely Inverse

IEC

80

Long Time Inverse

UK

120

Moderately Inverse

IEEE

0.0515

0.02

0.114

Very Inverse

IEEE

19.61

0.491

Extremely Inverse

IEEE

28.2

0.1217

Inverse

US-C08

5.95

0.18

Short Time Inverse

US-C02

0.02394

0.02

0.01694

2.3.2.2 Time Multiplier Settings for IEC/UK curves


Name

Range

Step Size

TMS

0.025 to 1.2

0.025

2.3.2.3 Time Dial Settings for IEEE/US curves


Name

Range

Step Size

TD

0.5 to 15

0.1

2.3.2.4 Definite Time Characteristic


Element

Range

Step Size

All stages

0 to 100s

10ms

2.3.2.5 Reset Characteristics


For all IEC/UK curves, the reset characteristic is definite time only.
For all IEEE/US curves, the reset characteristic can be selected as either inverse curve or
definite time.
The definite time can be set (as defined in IEC) to zero. Range 0 to 100 seconds in
steps of 0.01 seconds.
The Inverse Reset characteristics are dependent upon the selected IEEE/US IDMT curve
as shown in the table below.

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 7/36

All inverse reset curves conform to the following formula:

tr
TD

tReset =

7 1 (I Is )
Where:

tReset
tr

TD

=
=
=
=
=
=

reset time
constant
measured current
current threshold setting
constant
Time Dial Setting (Same setting as that employed by IDMT curve)

IEEE/US IDMT
Curve description

Standard

tr Constant

Constant

Moderately Inverse

IEEE

4.85

Very Inverse

IEEE

21.6

Extremely Inverse

IEEE

29.1

Inverse

US-C08

5.95

Short Time Inverse

US-C02

2.261

Inverse Reset Characteristics


2.3.3

Accuracy
Pick-up

Setting 5%

Drop-off

0.95 x Setting 5%

Minimum trip level of IDMT elements

1.05 x Setting 5%

IDMT characteristic shape

5% or 40ms whichever is greater


(under reference conditions)*

IEEE reset

5% or 40ms whichever is greater

DT operation

2% or 50ms whichever is greater

DT reset

Setting 5%

Directional boundary accuracy (RCA 90)

2 hysteresis 2

Characteristic

UK curves

IEC 60255-3 1998

US curves

IEEE C37.112 1996

* Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and > setting of 1A, accuracy operating range
2-20s

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 8/36

IEC IDMT Curves

IEC Curves
1000

100

Operating Time (Seconds)

2.3.4

MiCOM P740

10
Curve 4

Curve 1

Curve 2

Curve 3

0.1
1

10
Current (Multiple of Is)

Curve 1

Standard Inverse

Curve 2

Very Inverse

Curve 3

Extremely Inverse

Curve 4

UK Long Time Inverse

100

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

ANSI/IEEE IDMT curves

ANSI/IEEE Curves
100

Operating Time (Seconds)

2.3.5

Page 9/36

10

Curve 5

Curve 6
Curve 9
Curve 8
Curve 8

0.1
1

10

Current (Multiple of Is)

Curve 5

IEEE Moderately inverse

Curve 6

IEEE Very inverse

Curve 7

IEEE Extremely inverse

Curve 8

US Inverse

Curve 9

US Short time inverse

100

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 10/36

MiCOM P740

2.4

Earth Fault Protection

2.4.1

Setting ranges

2.4.1.1 Earth Fault, Sensitive Earth Fault

Earth Fault
"
2.4.2

"

Element

Range

Step Size

1st Stage

0.1 - 32n

0.01n

2nd Stage

0.1 - 32n

0.01n

EF time delay characteristics


The earth-fault measuring elements for EF and SEF are followed by an independently
selectable time delay. These time delays are identical to those of the Phase Overcurrent
time delay. The reset time delay is the same as the Phase overcurrent reset time.

2.4.3

Accuracy

2.4.3.1 Earth fault


Pick-up

Setting 5%

Drop-off

>0.85 x Setting

Minimum trip level of IDMT elements

1.05 x Setting 5%

IDMT characteristic shape

5% or 40ms whichever is greater


(under reference conditions)*

IEEE reset

10% or 40ms whichever is greater

DT operation

2% or 50ms whichever is greater

DT reset

5% or 50ms whichever is greater

Repeatability

7.5%

* Reference conditions TMS=1, TD=7 and N> setting of 1A, accuracy operating
range 2-20s
2.5

Transient Overreach and Overshoot

2.5.1

Accuracy
Additional tolerance due to increasing X/R
ratios

5% over the X/R ratio of 1 to 90

Overshoot of overcurrent elements

<40ms

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740
2.6

Programmable scheme logic

2.6.1

Level settings

2.6.2

Page 11/36

Name

Range

Step Size

Time delay t

0-14400000ms

1ms

Accuracy
Output conditioner timer

Setting 2% or 50ms whichever is greater

Dwell conditioner timer

Setting 2% or 50ms whichever is greater

Pulse conditioner timer

Setting 2% or 50ms whichever is greater

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 12/36

3.

MiCOM P740

CONTROL
The following claims for Control Functions are applicable to the P740 range of busbar
differential relays (model specific as detailed).

3.1

Display Control and Setting Groups

3.1.1

Level settings

3.1.2

Settings

Range

Step size

Setting groups

1-4

Performance
Setting groups

4 independent setting groups including


independent programmable scheme logic for
each group.

3.2

Inhibit current differential protection

3.2.1

Performance
Current differential algorithm blocked by
Energising the opto input assigned to inhibit busbar differential
protection

Compliant

Unhealthy communications link

Compliant

Loss of power supply to any relay

Compliant

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

4.

Page 13/36

MEASUREMENTS AND RECORDING FACILITIES


The following claims for Measurement & Recording facilities are applicable to the P740
range of busbar differential relays (model specific as detailed).

4.1

Measurements
Accuracy under reference conditions.
Measurand

Range

Accuracy

Phase current

0.05 to 3 n

1.0% of reading

Phase local current

0.05 to 3 n

1.0% of reading or (f-fn)/fn %

Phase remote current

0.05 to 3 n

1.0% of reading or (f-fn)/fn %

Phase differential
current

0.05 to 3 n

5.0%

Bias current

0.05 to 3 n

5.0%

Frequency

45 to 65Hz

1%

4.2

IRIG-B and Real Time Clock

4.2.1

Features
Real time 24 hour clock settable in hours, minutes and seconds
Calendar settable from January 1994 to December 2092
Clock and calendar maintained via battery after loss of auxiliary supply
Internal clock synchronisation using IRIG-B

4.2.2

Performance
Year 2000

Compliant

Real time clock accuracy

< 2 seconds / day

External clock synchronisation

Conforms to IRIG standard 200-98, format B

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 14/36

5.

MiCOM P740

POST FAULT ANALYSIS


The following claims for Post Fault Analysis Functions are applicable to the P740 range
of busbar differential relays (model specific as detailed).

5.1

Fault Records

5.1.1

Features

5.1.2

Fault record generation on protection


operation indicating

Time and date


Setting group
Start / trip element
Faulted current magnitudes
Remote, bias and differential currents
Frequency
Protection operating time

Alarm events generated on the


following indications

Protection disabled/test mode


CB alarms
Frequency out of range
Battery status
Differential protection inhibited
Configuration / reconfiguration error
Field voltage fail
Signal fail alarm
differential fail alarm
Setting groups

Performance
Fault record display indication and information

Correct

Alarm events display indication and information

Correct

Time and date stamping

10ms of applied fault/event

Fault Clearance time

2%

CB operating time

10ms

Protection operating time

2%

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740
5.2

Disturbance Records

5.2.1

Level settings

Page 15/36

Settings (P742, P743)

Range

Step size

Duration

0.1 10.5s

10ms

Trigger position

0 100%

0.1%

4 analogue channels, 32 digital channels


Settings (P741)

Range

Step size

Duration

1.2 s (Fixed)

Trigger position

0 50%

16.67%

8 analogue channels, 32 digital channels


5.2.2

Accuracy
Waveshape

Comparable with applied quantities

Magnitude and relative phases

5% of applied quantities

Duration

2%

Trigger position

2% (minimum trigger 100ms)

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 16/36

6.

MiCOM P740

PLANT SUPERVISION
The following claims for Plant Supervision Functions are applicable to the P740 range
of Busbar differential relays (model specific as detailed).

6.1

CB State Monitoring Control, breaker fail and backtrip, breaker fail timer

6.1.1

Level settings

6.1.2

Setting

Range

Step

Breaker fail timer 1

0 10s

0.01s

Breaker fail timer 2

0 10s

0.01s

Accuracy
Timers

2% or 40ms whichever is greater

Reset

<30ms

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

7.

Page 17/36

LOCAL AND REMOTE COMMUNICATIONS


The following claims for Local & Remote Communications are applicable to the P740
range of busbar differential relays (model specific as detailed).

7.1

Front Port
Setting

7.2

7.2.1

Protocol

Courier

Message format

IEC 60870-5 FT1.2

Baud rate

9 200 bits/s

Rear Port
Rear port settings

Setting options

Setting available for:

Physical links

EIA(RS)485 or Fibre optic


EIA(RS)485 only

Courier

Remote address

0 - 255 (step 1)

Courier

Baud rate

64,000 bits/s

Courier

Inactivity timer

1 - 30 minutes (step 1)

All

Performance
Front and rear ports conforming to Courier communication protocol

Compliant

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 18/36

8.

MiCOM P740

DIAGNOSTICS
The following claims for Diagnostic Functions are applicable to the P740 range of
Busbar differential relays

8.1

Features
Power up self checking with watchdog indication of healthy condition
Watchdog and front display indication of a hardware or software failure occurring
during power up or during normal in service operation

8.2

Performance
Power up / continuous self checks

Compliant

Watchdog operation

Compliant

Co-processor failure detection

Compliant

Time to power up

< 11s

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

9.

Page 19/36

RATINGS
The following claims for Ratings are applicable to the P740 range of busbar differential
relays (model specific as detailed).

9.1

Nominal ratings

9.1.1

Currents (All P740 range)


n = 1A or 5A ac rms.
Separate terminals are provided for the 1A and 5A windings, with the neutral input of
each winding sharing one terminal.
All current inputs will withstand the following, with any current function setting:
Withstand

Duration

4 n

Continuous rating

4.5 n

10 minutes

5 n

5 minutes

6 n

3 minutes

7 n

2 minutes

30 n

10 seconds

50 n

3 seconds

100 n

1 second

Pass Criteria

Winding temperatures <105 C


Dielectric withstand and insulation resistance unimpaired

9.1.2

Auxiliary voltages P740 range


Three auxiliary power supply versions are available:
Nominal Ranges

Operative dc range

Operative ac range

24/54 V dc

19 - 65 V

Not available

48/125 V dc (30/100 V ac rms.) **

37 - 150 V

24 110 V

110/250 V dc (100/240 V ac rms.) **

87 - 300 V

80 265 V

** rated for AC or DC operation.


Pass Criteria

All functions operate as specified within the operative ranges


All power supplies operate continuously over their operative ranges,
and environmental conditions

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 20/36

9.1.3

9.1.4

MiCOM P740

Universal Logic inputs (P740 range)


Battery Voltage (V dc)

Logical off (V dc)

Logical on (V dc)

24/27

<16.2

>19.2

30/34

<20.4

>24

48/54

<32.4

>38.4

110/125

<75

>88

220/250

<150

>176

Output contacts (P740 range)


Make & Carry

30A for 3s

Carry

250A for 30ms


10A continuous

Break

DC: 50W resistive


DC: 37.5W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
AC: 1250VA
AC: 1250 inductive (P.F. = 0.7)

Maxima:

10A and 300V

Loaded contact:

10,000 operation minimum

Unloaded contact:

100,000 operations minimum

Watchdog Contact
Break

9.1.5

DC: 30W resistive


DC: 15W inductive (L/R = 40ms)
AC: 275VA inductive (P.F. = 0.7)

Field voltage (P740 range)


Rated field voltage output

48V dc

Rated field voltage current limit

112mA 20%

Operating range

40V to 60V

Alarm voltage

35 V 5%

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 21/36

9.2

Burdens

9.2.1

Current (P742 and P743)


Reference current (n)
Phase

9.2.2

<0.15VA at rated current

Auxiliary voltage
P740 range
Typical values
Type

Case size

Minimum*

P741

Size 16/80TE

37 to 41w

P742

Size 8/40TE

16W to 23 W

P743

Size 12/60TE

22W to 32 W

(8 Comms boards)

no output contacts or optos energised

For each energised Opto powered from the Field Voltage or each energised Output
Relay:

9.2.3

Each additional energised opto


input

0.09W
(24/27, 30/34, 48/54V)

Each additional energised opto


input

0.12W (110/125V)

Each additional energised opto


input

0.19W (220/250V)

Each additional energised output


relay

0.13W

Optically isolated inputs


Peak current of opto inputs when energised is 3.5mA (0-300V)
Maximum input voltage 300V dc (any setting).

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 22/36

MiCOM P740

10.

CT REQUIREMENTS (P740 RANGE)

10.1

Notation
IF max

maximum fault current (same for all feeders)

IF max int

maximum contribution from a feeder to an internal fault (depends on


the feeder).

Inp

CT primary rated current

In

nominal secondary current (1A or 5A)

RCT

CT secondary winding Resistance

RB

Total external load resistance

Vk

CT knee point voltage

SVA

Nominal output in VA,

KSSC

Short-circuit current coefficient (generally 20)

General recommendations for the specification of protection CTs use common rules of
engineering which are not directly related to a particular protection.
10.2

CT Specification according to IEC 185, 44-6 and BS 3938 (British Standard)


1.

Class x according to British Standard: Minimum knee point voltage for saturation
Vk min = 0.25 x secondary IF max x (RCT + RB)

The recommended specification makes it possible to guarantee a saturation time >


1.4 ms with a remnant flux of 80 % of maximum flux (class X or TPX). This provides a
sufficient margin of security for CT saturation detection, which operates in less 1ms.
2.

Class 5P to IEC 185. Conversion of class X (BS) with the 5P equivalent (IEC)

3.

Class TPX and TPY according to IEC 44-6. IEC defines a composite error as a
percentage of a multiple of the rated current (IN) on a definite load SVA.
e.g.

CT 1000/5 A 50VA 5P 20.

This definition indicates that the composite error must be lower than 5%, for a primary
current of 20Inp when the external load is equal to 2 ohms (50VA to IN). If secondary
resistance, RCT, is known it is easy to calculate the magnetising EMF developed with the
fault current (20IN). Actually if the error is 5% (= 5A) with this EMF, the point of
operation is beyond the knee point voltage for saturation. By convention one admits
that the knee point voltage, Vk, is 80% of this value. For a conversion between a class
5P (IEC) and a class X (BS) CT one uses the relation:
Vk=0.8 X [(SVA x Kssc)/In + (RCT x Kscc x In) ]
SVA = (In x Vk/0.8 Kssc) RCT x In
In particular cases, calculation could reveal values too low to correspond to industrial
standards. In this case the minima will be: SVA min = 10 VA 5P 20 which corresponds
to a knee point voltage of approximately Vkmin = 70 V at 5A or 350V at 1A. Class TPY
would permit lower values of power, (demagnetisation air-gap). Taking into account
the weak requirements of class X or TPX one can keep specifications common.

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 23/36

For accuracy, class X or class 5P current transformers (CTs) are strongly recommended.
The knee point voltage of the CTs should comply with the minimum requirements of
the formulae shown below.
Vk min 0.5 x (secondary If max) x (RCT + RB)
Where:

10.3

Vk

Required knee point voltage

RCT

CT secondary resistance

RB

Circuit impedance from CT to relay

If

Maximum value of through fault current for stability


(multiple of In)

Support of IEEE C Class CTs


MiCOM Px40 series protection is compatible with ANSI/IEEE current transformers as
specified in the IEEE C57.13 standard. The applicable class for protection is class C,
which specifies a non air-gapped core. The CT design is identical to IEC class P, or
British Standard class X, but the rating is specified differently. The following table
allows C57.13 ratings to be translated into an IEC/BS knee point voltage:
IEEE C57.13 C Classification (volts)
CT Ratio

RCT (ohm)

50

100

200

400

800

100/5

0.04

56.5

109

214

424

844

200/5

0.08

60.5

113

218

428

848

400/5

0.16

68.5

121

226

436

856

800/5

0.32

84.5

137

242

452

872

1000/5

0.4

92.5

145

250

460

880

1500/5

0.6

112.5

165

270

480

900

2000/5

0.8

132.5

185

290

500

920

3000/5

1.2

172.5

225

330

540

960

Table 1

IEC/BS Knee Point Voltage Vk offered by C class CTs

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 24/36

MiCOM P740

Assumptions:
4.

For 5A CTs, the typical resistance is 0.002 ohms/secondary turn

5.

IEC/BS knee is typically 5% higher than ANSI/IEEE knee

Given:
6.

IEC/BS knee is specified as an internal EMF, whereas the C class voltage is


specified at the CT output terminals. To convert from ANSI/IEEE to IEC/BS
requires the voltage drop across the CTs secondary winding resistance to be
added.

7.

IEEE CTs are always rated at 5A secondary

8.

The rated dynamic current output of a C class CT (Kssc) is always 20 x In


Vk

= (C x 1.05) + (In. Rct. Kssc)

Where:
Vk

= Equivalent IEC or BS knee point voltage

= C Rating

In

= 5A

Rct

= CT secondary winding resistance

Kssc = 20

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 25/36

11.

HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND (P740 RANGE)

11.1

Dielectric withstand, impulse, insulation resistance and ANSI test requirements


insulation test voltage

11.1.1 Impulse
IEC 60255-5:1977
5kV 1.2/50s impulse, common and differential mode - input, power supply, &
terminal block communications connections.
11.1.2 Dielectric withstand
IEC 60255-5:1977
2kV rms. for 1 minute between all terminals connected together and case earth.
2kV rms. for 1 minute between all terminals of independent circuits with terminals on
each independent circuit connected together.
1kV rms. for 1 minute across watchdog contacts.
11.1.3 ANSI dielectric withstand
ANSI/IEEE C37.90. (1989) (Reaff. 1994)
1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of the watchdog contacts.
1kV rms. for 1 minute across open contacts of changeover output contacts.
1.5kV rms. for 1 minute across normally open output contacts.
11.1.4 Insulation resistance
IEC 60255-5:1977
100 M minimum.

P740/EN TD/D11
Page 26/36

12.

ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT

12.1

Performance criteria

Technical Data
MiCOM P740

The following three classes of performance criteria are used within sections 12.2 to
12.12 (where applicable) to specify the performance of the MiCOM relay when
subjected to the electrical interference. The performance criteria are based on the
performance criteria specified in EN 50082-2:1995.
12.1.1 Class A
During the testing the relay shall not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay shall function as specified. A maloperation shall include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
12.1.2 Class B
During the testing the relay shall not maloperate, upon completion of the testing the
relay shall function as specified. A maloperation shall include a transient operation of
the output contacts, operation of the watchdog contacts, reset of any of the relays
microprocessors or an alarm indication. A transitory operation of the output LEDs is
acceptable provided no permanent false indications are recorded.
The relay communications and IRIG-B signal must continue uncorrupted via the
communications ports and IRIG-B port respectively during the test, however relay
communications and the IRIG-B signal may be momentarily interrupted during the
tests, provided that they recover with no external intervention.
12.1.3 Class C
The relay shall power down and power up again in a controlled manner within 5
seconds. The output relays are permitted to change state during the test as long as they
reset once the relay powers up.
Communications to relay may be suspended during the testing as long as
communication recovers with no external intervention after the testing.
12.2

Auxiliary supply tests, dc interruption, etc.

12.2.1 DC voltage interruptions


P740 Range
IEC 60255-11:1979.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A.
DC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 40s. Performance criteria - Class
C.

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 27/36

12.2.2 DC voltage fluctuations


P740 range
IEC 60255-11:1979.
AC 100Hz ripple superimposed on DC max. and min. auxiliary supply at 12% of
highest rated DC.
Performance criteria - Class A.
12.3

AC voltage dips and short interruptions

12.3.1 AC Voltage short interruptions


P740 range
IEC 61000-4-11:1994.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply Interruptions 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria Class C.
12.3.2 AC voltage dips
P740 range
IEC 61000-4-11:1994
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 100% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria
- Class C.
AC Auxiliary Supply 60% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 60% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria Class C.
AC Auxiliary Supply 30% Voltage Dips 2, 5, 10, 20ms. Performance criteria - Class A.
AC Auxiliary Supply 30% Voltage Dips 50, 100, 200ms, 1s, 40s. Performance criteria Class C.

12.4

High Frequency Disturbance IEC 60255-22-1:1988 Class III. (P740 range)


1MHz burst disturbance test.
2.5kV common mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs, output contacts, IRIG-B and terminal
block communications connections.
1kV differential mode.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs, opto inputs and output contacts.
Performance criteria Class A.

P740/EN TD/D11
Page 28/36
12.5

Fast Transients (P740 range)


IEC 60255-22-4:1992 (EN 61000-4-4:1995), Class III and Class IV.
2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) direct coupling.
Power supply, field voltage, opto inputs, output contacts, CTs, VTs.
2kV 5kHz (Class III) and 4kV 2.5kHz (Class IV) capacitive clamp.
IRIG-B and terminal block communications connections.
Performance criteria Class A.

12.6

Conducted / Radiated emissions (P740 range)

12.6.1 Conducted emissions


EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A.
0.15 - 0.5MHz, 79dBV (quasi peak) 66dBV (average).
0.5 - 30MHz, 73dBV (quasi peak) 60dBV (average).
12.6.2 Radiated emissions
EN 55011:1998 Class A, EN 55022:1994 Class A.
30 - 230MHz, 40dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
230 - 1000MHz, 47dBV/m at 10m measurement distance.
12.7

Conducted / Radiated Immunity (P740 range)

12.7.1 Conducted immunity


EN 61000-4-6:1996 Level 3.
10V emf @ 1kHz 80% am, 150kHz to 80MHz.
Spot tests at 27MHz, 68MHz.
Performance criteria Class A.
12.7.2 Radiated immunity
IEC 60255-22-3:1989 Class III (EN 61000-4-3: 1997 Level 3).
10 V/m 80MHz - 1GHz @ 1kHz 80% am.
Spot tests at 80MHz, 160MHz, 450MHz, 900MHz.
Performance criteria Class A.

Technical Data
MiCOM P740

Technical Data
MiCOM P740

P740/EN TD/D11
Page 29/36

12.7.3 Radiated immunity from digital radio telephones


ENV 50204:1995
10 V/m 900MHz 5 MHz and 1.89GHz 5MHz, 200Hz rep. freq., 50% duty cycle
pulse modulated.
Performance criteria Class A.
12.8

Electrostatic Discharge (P740 range)


IEC 60255-22-2:1996 Class 3 & Class 4.
Class 4: 15kV air discharge.
Class 3: 6kV contact discharge.
Tests carried out both with and without cover fitted.
Performance criteria Class A.

12.9

Surge Immunity (P740 range)


IEC 61000-4-5:1995 Level 4.
4kV common mode 12 source impedance, 2kV differential mode 2 source
impedance.
Power supply, field voltage, CTs, VTs.
4kV common mode 42 source impedance, 2kV differential mode 42 source
impedance.
Opto inputs, output contacts.
4kV common mode 2 source impedance applied to cable screen.
Terminal block communications connections and IRIG-B.
Performance criteria Class A under reference conditions.

12.10

Power Frequency Interference (P740 range)


NGTS* 2.13 Issue 3 April 1998, section 5.5.6.9.
500V rms. common mode.
250V rms. differential mode.
Voltage applied to all non-mains frequency inputs. Interference applied to all
permanently connected communications circuits via the induced voltage method.
Performance criteria Class A.
* National Grid Technical Specification

P740/EN TD/D11
Page 30/36
12.11

Technical Data
MiCOM P740

Surge Withstand Capability (SWC)


ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1 (1990) (Reaff. 1994)
Oscillatory SWC Test.
2.5kV 3kV, 1 - 1.5MHz - common and differential mode applied to all circuits
except for IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common mode
only via the cable screen.
Fast Transient SWC Tests
4 - 5kV crest voltage - common and differential mode - applied to all circuits except for
IRIG-B and terminal block communications, which are tested common mode only via
the cable screen.
Performance criteria Class A (see section 8.2).

12.12

Radiated Immunity
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.2 1995
35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, no modulation applied to all sides.
35 V/m 25MHz - 1GHz, 100% pulse modulated, front only.
Performance criteria Class A (see section 8.2).

12.13

Power Frequency Magnetic Field Immunity


IEC 61000-4-8:1994 Level 5.
100A/m field applied continuously in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent and tripping
state
1000A/m field applied for 3s in all planes for the EUT in a quiescent and tripping state

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 31/36

13.

ATMOSPHERIC ENVIRONMENT

13.1

Temperature
IEC 60068-2-1:1990/A2:1994 - Cold
IEC 60068-2-2:1974/A2:1994 - Dry heat
IEC 60255-6:1988.

13.2

Operating temperature range C

Storage temperature range C

Cold
Temperature

Dry heat
Temperature

Cold
Temperature

Dry heat
Temperature

-25

55

-25

70

Humidity
IEC 60068-2-3:1969
Damp heat, steady state, 40 C 2 C and 93% relative humidity (RH) +2% -3%,
duration 56 days.
IEC 60068-2-30:1980.
Damp heat cyclic, six (12 + 12 hour cycles) of 55C 2C 93% 3% RH and 25C
3C 93% 3% RH.

13.3

Enclosure protection
IEC 60529:1989.
IP52 Category 2.
IP5x Protected against dust, limited ingress permitted.
IPx2 Protected against vertically falling drops of water with the product in 4 fixed
positions of 15 tilt with a flow rate of 3mm/minute for 2.5 minutes.

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 32/36

MiCOM P740

14.

MECHANICAL ENVIRONMENT

14.1

Performance criteria
The following severity classes are used, where applicable, to specify the performance to
specify the performance of the MiCOM relay, when subjected to mechanical testing.

14.1.1 Severity Classes


The following table details the Class and Typical Applications of the vibration, shock
bump and seismic tests detailed previously
Class

Typical Application

Measuring relays and protection equipment for normal use in power


plants, substations and industrial plants and for normal
transportation conditions

Measuring relays and protection equipment for which a very high


security margin is required or where the vibration (shock and bump)
(seismic shock) levels are very high, e.g. shipboard application and
for severe transportation conditions.

14.1.2 Vibration (sinusoidal)


IEC 60255-21-1:1988
Cross over frequency - 58 to 60 Hz
Vibration Response
Severity Class

Peak
displacement
below cross
over frequency
(mm)

Peak
acceleration
above cross
over frequency
(gn)

Number of
sweeps in each
axis

Frequency
range (Hz)

0.075

10 150

Vibration Endurance
Severity Class

Peak
acceleration
(gn)

Number of
sweeps in each
axis

Frequency
range (Hz)

2.0

20

10 150

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 33/36

14.1.3 Shock and bump


IEC 60255-21-2:1988
Type of test

Severity
Class

Peak
acceleration
(gn)

Duration of
pulse
(ms)

Number of
Pulses in each
direction

Shock response

10

11

Shock withstand

15

11

Bump

10

16

1000

14.1.4 Seismic
IEC 60255-21-3:1993
Cross over frequency - 8 to 9Hz
x = horizontal axis, y = vertical axis
Severity
Class

Peak
displacement
below cross over
frequency (mm)

Peak
acceleration
above cross over
frequency (gn)

7.5

3.5

2.0

1.0

Number of
sweep cycles
in each axis

Frequency
range (Hz)

1- 35

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 34/36

15.

INFLUENCING QUANTITIES

15.1

Harmonics (P740 range)

MiCOM P740

Tolerances quoted are an additional tolerance with respect to measured accuracy


without harmonics.

15.2

Harmonics applied 2nd 17th

10% harmonics

Measurements / filtered relay inputs

Unaffected by harmonics

Frequency (P740 Range)


Operating frequency 45Hz 65Hz

Affect

Overcurrent protection

Unaffected by frequency

Earth fault protection

Unaffected by frequency

Sensitive earth fault protection

Unaffected by frequency

Disturbance recorder

Unaffected by frequency

Differential protection

Unaffected by frequency

Technical Data

P740/EN TD/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 35/36

16.

MISCELLANEOUS

16.1

Analogue inputs, Logic inputs, Outputs relays (P740 range)


Relay

1A/5A dual
rated CTs

Logic
inputs

Output
relays

Output
LEDs

Test port

P741

TTL logic
output

P742

16

TTL logic
output

P743

24

21

TTL logic
output

status
displayed
on LCD

status
displayed
on LCD

test pattern
available
on front
user
interface

DDB*
signals
mapped to
front port
for test
purposes

*Digital Data Bus


16.2

16.3

Front user interface (P740 range)


All relay settings configurable from front user interface with the
exception of programmable scheme logic.

Compliant

Back light inactivity timer

15 min.
1min.

Two levels of password protection. Protection critical cells have


high level password protection with other cells requiring a lower or
no password

Compliant

Password protection removable

Compliant

Battery life (P740 range)


Battery life (assuming relay energised for 90% of time)

> 10 years

Low battery voltage, failure or absence of battery will be indicated

Compliant

The relay is protected against incorrect insertion of battery

Compliant

Removal of the battery with the relay energised will no affect


records, events or real time clock

Compliant

P740/EN TD/D11

Technical Data

Page 36/36
16.4

MiCOM P740

Frequency tracking (P740 range)


Relay will frequency track over its entire operating range

45 65Hz

The relay will frequency track off any current inputs

Compliant

The relay will frequency track down to the following


Levels:

Current

Effect of harmonic

16.5

17.

None, relay
tracks off
fundamental
frequency

K-Bus compatibility (P740 range)


Relay K-Bus interface compatible with other relays of different
product families using K-Bus.

Compliant

Relay K-Bus port operates over 1km range with loading at either
end of transmission line.

Compliant

EC EMC COMPLIANCE (P740 RANGE)


Compliance to the European Community Directive 89/336/EEC amended by
93/68/EEC is claimed via the Technical Construction File route.
The Competent Body has issued a Technical Certificate and a Declaration of
Conformity has been completed.
The following Generic Standards used to establish conformity:
EN 50081-2:1994
EN 50082-2:1995.

18.

EC LVD COMPLIANCE (P740 RANGE)


Compliance with European Community Directive on Low Voltage 73/23/EEC is
demonstrated by reference to generic safety standards:
EN 61010-1:1993/A2: 1995
EN 60950:1992/A11 1997

Installation

P740/EN IN/D11

MiCOM P740

INSTALLATION

P740/EN IN/D11

Installation
MiCOM P740

Installation

P740/EN IN/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/9

CONTENTS
1.

RECEIPT OF RELAYS

2.

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

3.

STORAGE

4.

UNPACKING

5.

RELAY MOUNTING

5.1

Rack mounting

5.2

Panel mounting

6.

RELAY WIRING

6.1

Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections

6.2

RS485 port (P741 only)

6.3

IRIG-B connections (P741 only)

6.4

RS232 port

6.5

Download/monitor port

6.6

Earth connection

P740/EN IN/D11
Page 2/10

1.

Installation
MiCOM P740

RECEIPT OF RELAYS
Protective relays, although generally of robust construction, require careful treatment
prior to installation on site. Upon receipt, relays should be examined immediately to
ensure
no
external
damage
has
been
sustained
in
transit.
If damage has been sustained, a claim should be made to the transport contractor
and AREVA T&D should be promptly notified.
Relays that are supplied unmounted and not intended for immediate installation
should be returned to their protective polythene bags and delivery carton.
Section 3 of this chapter gives more information about the storage of relays.

2.

HANDLING OF ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT


A persons normal movements can easily generate electrostatic potentials of several
thousand volts. Discharge of these voltages into semiconductor devices when
handling electronic circuits can cause serious damage which, although not always
immediately apparent, will reduce the reliability of the circuit. This is particularly
important to consider where the circuits use complementary metal oxide
semiconductors (CMOS), as is the case with these relays.
The relays electronic circuits are protected from electrostatic discharge when housed
in the case. Do not expose them to risk by removing the front panel or printed circuit
boards unnecessarily.
Each printed circuit board incorporates the highest practicable protection for its
semiconductor devices. However, if it becomes necessary to remove a printed circuit
board, the following precautions should be taken to preserve the high reliability and
long life for which the relay has been designed and manufactured.
1.

Before removing a printed circuit board, ensure that you are at the same
electrostatic potential as the equipment by touching the case.

2.

Handle analogue input modules by the front panel, frame or edges of the
circuit boards. Printed circuit boards should only be handled by their edges.
Avoid touching the electronic components, printed circuit tracks or connectors.

3.

Do not pass the module to another person without first ensuring you are both
at the same electrostatic potential. Shaking hands achieves equipotential.

4.

Place the module on an anti-static surface, or on a conducting surface which is


at the same potential as yourself.

5.

If it is necessary to store or transport printed circuit boards removed from the


case, place them individually in electrically conducting anti-static bags.

In the unlikely event that you are making measurements on the internal electronic
circuitry of a relay in service, it is preferable that you are earthed to the case with a
conductive wrist strap. Wrist straps should have a resistance to ground between
500k to 10M. If a wrist strap is not available you should maintain regular contact
with the case to prevent a build-up of electrostatic potential. Instrumentation which
may be used for making measurements should also be earthed to the case whenever
possible.
More information on safe working procedures for all electronic equipment can be
found in BS EN 100015:Part 1:1992. It is strongly recommended that detailed
investigations on electronic circuitry or modification work should be carried out in a
special handling area such as described in the aforementioned British Standard
document.

Installation
MiCOM P740

3.

P740/EN IN/D11
Page 3/9

STORAGE
If relays are not to be installed immediately upon receipt, they should be stored in a
place free from dust and moisture in their original cartons. Where de-humidifier
bags have been included in the packing they should be retained. The action of the
de-humidifier crystals will be impaired if the bag is exposed to ambient conditions
and may be restored by gently heating the bag for about an hour prior to replacing
it in the carton.
To prevent battery drain during transportation and storage a battery isolation strip is
fitted during manufacture. With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery
isolation strip can be checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side.
Care should be taken on subsequent unpacking that any dust which has collected on
the carton does not fall inside. In locations of high humidity the carton and packing
may become impregnated with moisture and the de-humidifier crystals will lose their
efficiency.
Prior to installation, relays should be stored at a temperature of between 25C to
+70C.

4.

UNPACKING
Care must be taken when unpacking and installing the relays so that none of the
parts are damaged and additional components are not accidentally left in the
packing or lost.
Note: With the lower access cover open, the red tab of the battery isolation strip will
be seen protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment. Do not
remove this strip because it prevents battery drain during transportation and
storage and will be removed as part of the commissioning tests.
Relays must only be handled by skilled persons.
The site should be well lit to facilitate inspection, clean, dry and reasonably free from
dust and excessive vibration. This particularly applies to installations which are being
carried out at the same time as construction work.

P740/EN IN/D11

Installation

Page 4/10

5.

MiCOM P740

RELAY MOUNTING
MiCOM relays are dispatched either individually or as part of a panel/rack
assembly.
Individual relays are normally supplied with an outline diagram showing the
dimensions for panel cut-outs and hole centres. This information can also be found
in the product publication.
Secondary front covers can also be supplied as an option item to prevent
unauthorised changing of settings and alarm status. They are available in sizes 40TE
(GN0037 001) and 60TE (GN0038 001). Note that the 60TE cover also fits the 80TE
case size of the relay.
The design of the relay is such that the fixing holes in the mounting flanges are only
accessible when the access covers are open and hidden from sight when the covers
are closed.
If a P991 or MMLG test block is to be included, it is recommended that, when viewed
from the front, it is positioned on the right-hand side of the relay (or relays) with
which it is associated. This minimises the wiring between the relay and test block,
and allows the correct test block to be easily identified during commissioning and
maintenance tests.

FIGURE 1:

LOCATION OF BATTERY ISOLATION STRIP

If it is necessary to test correct relay operation during the installation, the battery
isolation strip can be removed but should be replaced if commissioning of the
scheme is not imminent. This will prevent unnecessary battery drain during
transportation to site and installation. The red tab of the isolation strip can be seen
protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment when the lower access
cover is open. To remove the isolation strip, pull the red tab whilst lightly pressing the
battery to prevent it falling out of the compartment. When replacing the battery
isolation strip, ensure that the strip is refitted as shown in Figure 1, ie. with the strip
behind the battery with the red tab protruding.

Installation

P740/EN IN/D11

MiCOM P740
5.1

Page 5/9

Rack mounting
MiCOM relays may be rack mounted using single tier rack frames (our part number
FX0121 001), as illustrated in Figure 2. These frames have been designed to have
dimensions in accordance with IEC60297 and are supplied pre-assembled ready to
use. On a standard 483mm (19) rack system this enables combinations of widths of
case up to a total equivalent of size 80TE to be mounted side by side.
The two horizontal rails of the rack frame have holes drilled at approximately 26mm
intervals and the relays are attached via their mounting flanges using M4 Taptite
self-tapping screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit).
These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104).
Note: Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting
MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front
cover moulding if used.
Once the tier is complete, the frames are fastened into the racks using mounting
angles at each end of the tier.

P0147XXb

FIGURE 2:

RACK MOUNTING OF RELAYS

Relays can be mechanically grouped into single tier (4U) or multi-tier arrangements
by means of the rack frame. This enables schemes using products from the MiCOM
and MiDOS product ranges to be pre-wired together prior to mounting.
Where the case size summation is less than 80TE on any tier, or space is to be left for
installation of future relays, blanking plates may be used. These plates can also be
used to mount ancillary components. Table 1 shows the sizes that can be ordered.
Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012,
MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions.

P740/EN IN/D11

Installation

Page 6/10

MiCOM P740
Case size summation

Blanking plate part number

5TE

GJ2128 001

10TE

GJ2128 002

15TE

GJ2128 003

20TE

GJ2128 004

25TE

GJ2128 005

30TE

GJ2128 006

35TE

GJ2128 007

40TE

GJ2128 008

TABLE 1:

5.2

BLANKING PLATES

Panel mounting
The relays can be flush mounted into panels using M4 SEMS Taptite self-tapping
screws with captive 3mm thick washers (also known as a SEMS unit).
These fastenings are available in packs of 5 (our part number ZA0005 104).
Note:

Conventional self-tapping screws, including those supplied for mounting


MIDOS relays, have marginally larger heads which can damage the front
cover moulding if used.

Alternatively tapped holes can be used if the panel has a minimum thickness of
2.5mm.
For applications where relays need to be semi-projection or projection mounted, a
range of collars are available.
Where several relays are to mounted in a single cut-out in the panel, it is advised
that they are mechanically grouped together horizontally and/or vertically to form
rigid assemblies prior to mounting in the panel.
Note:

It is not advised that MiCOM relays are fastened using pop rivets as this will
not allow the relay to be easily removed from the panel in the future if repair
is necessary.

If it is required to mount a relay assembly on a panel complying to BS EN60529


IP52, it will be necessary to fit a metallic sealing strip between adjoining relays (Part
no GN2044 001) and a sealing ring selected from Table 2 around the complete
assembly.

Installation

P740/EN IN/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 7/9

Width

Single tier

Double tier

10TE

GJ9018 002

GJ9018 018

15TE

GJ9018 003

GJ9018 019

20TE

GJ9018 004

GJ9018 020

25TE

GJ9018 005

GJ9018 021

30TE

GJ9018 006

GJ9018 022

35TE

GJ9018 007

GJ9018 023

40TE

GJ9018 008

GJ9018 024

45TE

GJ9018 009

GJ9018 025

50TE

GJ9018 010

GJ9018 026

55TE

GJ9018 011

GJ9018 027

60TE

GJ9018 012

GJ9018 028

65TE

GJ9018 013

GJ9018 029

70TE

GJ9018 014

GJ9018 030

75TE

GJ9018 015

GJ9018 031

80TE

GJ9018 016

GJ9018 032

TABLE 2:

IP52 SEALING RINGS

Further details on mounting MiDOS relays can be found in publication R7012,


MiDOS Parts Catalogue and Assembly Instructions.

6.

RELAY WIRING
This section serves as a guide to selecting the appropriate cable and connector type
for each terminal on the MiCOM relay.

6.1

Medium and heavy duty terminal block connections


Loose relays are supplied with sufficient M4 screws for making connections to the
rear mounted terminal blocks using ring terminals, with a recommended maximum
of two ring terminals per relay terminal.
If required, AREVA T&D can supply M4 90 crimp ring terminals in three different
sizes depending on wire size (see Table 3). Each type is available in bags of 100.
Part number

Wire size

Insulation colour

ZB9124 901

0.25 1.65mm2 (22 16AWG)

Red

ZB9124 900

1.04

ZB9124 904

2.53 6.64mm2 (12 10AWG)


TABLE 3:

2.63mm2

(16 14AWG)

Blue
Uninsulated*

M4 90 CRIMP RING TERMINALS

To maintain the terminal block insulation requirements for safety, an insulating


sleeve should be fitted over the ring terminal after crimping.

P740/EN IN/D11

Installation

Page 8/10

MiCOM P740

The following minimum wire sizes are recommended:


Current Transformers 2.5mm2
Auxiliary Supply, Vx

1.5mm2

RS485 Port

See separate section

Other circuits

1.0mm2

Due to the limitations of the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used
for any of the medium or heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 using ring terminals that
are not pre-insulated. Where it required to only use pre-insulated ring terminals, the
maximum wire size that can be used is reduced to 2.63mm2 per ring terminal. If a
larger wire size is required, two wires should be used in parallel, each terminated in
a separate ring terminal at the relay.
The wire used for all connections to the medium and heavy duty terminal blocks,
except the RS485 port, should have a minimum voltage rating of 300Vrms.
It is recommended that the auxiliary supply wiring should be protected by a 16A high
rupture capacity (HRC) fuse of type NIT or TIA. For safety reasons, current
transformer circuits must never be fused. Other circuits should be appropriately fused
to protect the wire used.
6.2

RS485 port (P741 only)


Connections to the RS485 port are made using ring terminals. It is recommended
that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000m or
200nF total cable capacitance. A typical cable specification would be:
Each core:

16/0.2mm copper conductors


PVC insulated

Nominal conductor area:


Screen:
6.3

0.5mm2 per core


Overall braid, PVC sheathed

IRIG-B connections (P741 only)


The IRIG-B input and BNC connector have a characteristic impedance of 50. It is
recommended that connections between the IRIG-B equipment and the relay are
made using coaxial cable of type RG59LSF with a halogen free, fire retardant
sheath.

6.4

RS232 port
Short term connections to the RS232 port, located behind the bottom access cover,
can be made using a screened multi-core communication cable up to 15m long, or
a total capacitance of 2500pF. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with
a 9-way, metal shelled, D-type male plug.

6.5

Download/monitor port
Short term connections to the download/monitor port, located behind the bottom
access cover, can be made using a screened 25-core communication cable up to 4m
long. The cable should be terminated at the relay end with a 25-way, metal shelled,
D-type male plug.

Installation
MiCOM P740

6.6

P740/EN IN/D11
Page 9/9

Earth connection
Every relay must be connected to the local earth bar using the M4 earth studs in the
bottom left hand corner of the relay case. The minimum recommended wire size is
2.5mm2 and should have a ring terminal at the relay end. Due to the limitations of
the ring terminal, the maximum wire size that can be used for any of the medium or
heavy duty terminals is 6.0mm2 per wire. If a greater cross-sectional area is
required, two parallel connected wires, each terminated in a separate ring terminal
at the relay, or a metal earth bar could be used.
Note: To prevent any possibility of electrolytic action between brass or copper earth
conductors and the rear panel of the relay, precautions should be taken to
isolate them from one another. This could be achieved in a number of ways,
including placing a nickel-plated or insulating washer between the conductor
and the relay case, or using tinned ring terminals.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar
with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on
the equipment's rating label

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/78

COMMISSIONING AND
MAINTENANCE

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 2/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 3/78

CONTENTS

1. INTRODUCTION

2. SETTING FAMILIARISATION

3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING

3.1. Minimum equipment required

3.2. Optional equipment

4. PRODUCT CHECKS

4.1. With the relay de-energised


4.1.1.
Visual inspection

8
9

4.1.2.

Current transformer shorting contacts

4.1.3.

Insulation

11

4.1.4.

External wiring

12

4.1.5.

Watchdog contacts

12

4.1.6.

Auxiliary supply

12

4.2. With the relay energised


4.2.1.
Watchdog contacts

13
13

4.2.2.

Date and time

13

4.2.3.

Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

14

4.2.4.

Field voltage supply

15

4.2.5.

Input opto-isolators

15

4.2.6.

Output relays

16

4.2.7.

Current differential communications

17

4.2.8.

Current inputs (P742, P743 only)

17

5. SETTING CHECKS

19

5.1. Apply application-specific settings

19

5.2. How to measure the Burden Resistance (RB)

20

5.3. Demonstrate Correct Relay Operation


5.3.1.
Current Differential Bias Characteristic

20
22

5.3.2.

Phase Overcurrent Protection (P742 and P743)

26

5.3.3.

Breaker Failure Protection

28

5.4. Check Application Settings

30

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 4/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

6. END TO END TESTS

31

7. ON-LOAD CHECKS

31

8. FINAL CHECKS

32

9. MAINTENANCE

33

9.1. Maintenance period

33

9.2. Maintenance checks


9.2.1.
Alarms

33
33

9.2.2.

Opto-isolators

33

9.2.3.

Output relays

33

9.2.4.

Measurement accuracy

34

9.3. Method of repair


9.3.1.
Replacing the complete relay

34
34

9.3.2.

36

Replacing a PCB

9.4. Recalibration
9.4.1.
P740 relay

50
50

9.5. Changing the relay battery


9.5.1.
Instructions for replacing the battery.

50
50

9.5.2.

Post modification tests

51

9.5.3.

Battery disposal

51

9.6. Cleaning

51

10. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD:

52

10.1. Peripheral Units: P742/P743

52

11. SETTING RECORD

60

11.1. Central Unit: P741

60

11.2. Peripheral Units: P742/P743

68

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 5/78

1. INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P740 Busbar Differential Protection is fully numerical in their design,
implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays
employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give
an alarm. As a result of this, the commissioning tests do not need to be as extensive
as with non-numeric electronic or electromechanical relays.
To commission numeric relays, it is only necessary to verify that the hardware is
functioning correctly and the application-specific software settings have been applied
to the relay (PSL, topology, differential and breaker failure protection linked to the
topology/PSL). It is considered unnecessary to test every function of the relay if the
settings have been verified by one of the following methods:
-

Extracting the settings applied to the relay using appropriate setting software
(preferred method)

Via the operator interface.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the customer will be responsible for
determining the application-specific settings to be applied to the relay and for testing
of any scheme logic applied by external wiring and/or configuration of the relays
internal programmable scheme logic.
Blank commissioning test and setting records are provided at the end of this chapter
for completion as required.
As the relays menu language is user-selectable, it is acceptable for the
Commissioning Engineer to change it to allow accurate testing as long as the menu is
restored to the customers preferred language on completion.
To simplify the specifying of menu cell locations in these Commissioning Instructions,
they will be given in the form [courier reference: COLUMN HEADING, Cell Text]. For
example, the cell for selecting the menu language (first cell under the column
heading) is located in the System Data column (column 00) so it would be given as
[SYSTEM DATA, Language].
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar with the
contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on the equipments
rating label.

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 6/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

2. SETTING FAMILIARISATION
When commissioning a MiCOM P740 Busbar protection for the first time, sufficient
time should be allowed to become familiar with the method by which the settings are
applied.
The Introduction (P740/EN IT) contains a detailed description of the menu structure of
P740 relays.
With the secondary front cover in place all keys except the ! key are accessible. All
menu cells can be read. LEDs and alarms can be reset. However, no protection or
configuration settings can be changed, or fault and event records cleared.
Removing the secondary front cover allows access to all keys so that settings can be
changed, LEDs and alarms reset, and fault and event records cleared. However,
menu cells that have access levels higher than the default level will require the
appropriate password to be entered before changes can be made.
Alternatively, if a portable PC is available together with suitable setting software (such
as MiCOM S1), the menu can be viewed a page at a time to display a full column of
data and text. This PC software also allows settings to be entered more easily, saved
to a file on disk for future reference or printed to produce a setting record. Refer to
the PC software user manual for details. If the software is being used for the first
time, allow sufficient time to become familiar with its operation.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 7/78

3. EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR COMMISSIONING


3.1. Minimum equipment required
Overcurrent test set with interval timer
Multimeter with suitable ac current range, and ac and dc voltage ranges of
0 440V and 0 250V respectively
Continuity tester (if not included in multimeter)
Optical power meter with sensitivity 0 to 50dBm (to measure the optical signal level)
Note:

Modern test equipment may contain many of the above features


in one unit.

3.2. Optional equipment


Multi-finger test plug type P992 (if test block type P991 installed) or MMLB (if using
MMLG blocks)
An electronic or brushless insulation tester with a dc output not exceeding 500V (for
insulation resistance testing when required). This equipment will be required only if
the dielectric test has been no done during the manufacturing process.
A portable PC, with appropriate software (this enables the rear communications port
to be tested, if this is to be used, and will also save considerable time during
commissioning).
A printer (for printing a setting record from the portable PC).

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 8/78

MiCOM P740

4. PRODUCT CHECKS
These product checks cover all aspects of the relay which should be checked to
ensure that it has not been physically damaged prior to commissioning, is functioning
correctly and all input quantity measurements are within the stated tolerances.
If the application-specific settings have been applied to the relay prior to
commissioning, it is advisable to make a copy of the settings so as to allow their
restoration later. This could be done by:

Obtaining a setting file on a diskette from the customer (this requires a portable
PC with appropriate setting software for transferring the settings from the PC to
the relay)

Extracting the settings from the relay itself (this again requires a portable PC
with appropriate setting software)

Manually creating a setting record. This could be done using a copy of the
setting record located at the end of this chapter to record the settings as the
relays menu is sequentially stepped through via the front panel user interface.

If password protection is enabled and the customer has changed password 2 that
prevents unauthorised changes to some of the settings, either the revised password 2
should be provided, or the customer should restore the original password prior to
commencement of testing.
Note:

In the event that the password has been lost, a recovery


password can be obtained from AREVA by quoting the serial
number of the relay. The recovery password is unique to that
relay and is unlikely to work on any other relay.

4.1. With the relay de-energised


The following group of tests should be carried out without the auxiliary supply being
applied to the relay and with the trip circuit isolated.
The current and voltage transformer connections must be isolated from the relay for
these checks. If a P991 test block is provided, the required isolation can easily be
achieved by inserting test plug type P992 which effectively open-circuits all wiring
routed through the test block.
Before inserting the test plug, reference should be made to the scheme (wiring)
diagram to ensure that this will not potentially cause damage or a safety hazard. For
example, the test block may be associated with protection current transformer circuits.
It is essential that the sockets in the test plug which correspond to the current
transformer secondary windings are linked before the test plug is inserted into the test
block.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740
DANGER:

Page 9/78
Never open circuit the secondary circuit of a current transformer
since the high voltage produced may be lethal and could damage
insulation.

If a test block is not provided, the voltage transformer supply to the relay should be
isolated by means of the panel links or connecting blocks. The line current
transformers should be short-circuited and disconnected from the relay terminals.
Where means of isolating the auxiliary supply and trip circuit (e.g. isolation links,
fuses, MCB, etc.) are provided, these should be used. If this is not possible, the
wiring to these circuits will have to be disconnected and the exposed ends suitably
terminated to prevent them from being a safety hazard.
4.1.1. Visual inspection

Carefully examine the relay to see that no physical damage has occurred since
installation.
The rating information given under the top access cover on the front of the relay
should be checked to ensure it is correct for the particular installation.
Ensure that the case earthing connections, bottom left-hand corner at the rear of the
relay case, are used to connect the relay to a local earth bar using an adequate
conductor.
4.1.2. Current transformer shorting contacts

If required, the current transformer shorting contacts can be checked to ensure that
they close when the heavy duty terminal block (block reference B for P742 and A for
P743 in Figure 1and Figure 2) is disconnected from the current input PCB.

A
1

19

2
3

20

4
5

TX

4
5

CH1

6
7

21

RX

6
7

TX
8

9
10

11

12

CH2
10
11

12

13

14

15

23

16

17

18

24

13

15

16

17

14
15

16

17

18

12
13

14

14

16

10
11

12

12

15

18

10
11

13

14
15

17

8
9

22

10
11

13

8
9

16

17

18

18

Figure 1: Rear terminal blocks on P742

RX

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 10/78

MiCOM P740

A
1

19

2
3

2
3

2
3

2
3

20
4

4
5

4
5

4
5

4
5

4
5

TX

CH1
6

21

6
7

6
7

6
7

6
7

RX

TX
8

10

11

12

8
9

8
9

8
9

8
9

CH2

22
10

11

13

14

15

23

0
16

17

18

24

10
11

12

13

12
13

14

15

12

14

16

18

15

18

12

17

18

12
13

14
15

16

16
17

14
15

16
17

18

RX

10
11

13

14

14

16
17

18

13

15

10
11

12

12

14

16
17

11

13

15

10

10
11

13

15

17

10
11

16
17

18

18

Figure 2 : Rear terminal blocks on P743

The heavy duty terminal block is fastened to the rear panel using four crosshead
screws. These are located top and bottom between the first and second, and third
and fourth, columns of terminals (see Figure 2).
Note:

The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to


minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or
lost.

Pull the terminal block away from the rear of the case and check with a continuity
tester that all the shorting switches being used are closed. Table 1 shows the
terminals between which shorting contacts are fitted.
Current
input

Shorting contact between terminals


P742

P743

1A common 5A

1A common 5A

B3 B2 B1

A3 A2 A1

B6 B5 B4

A6 A5 A4

B9 B8 B7

A9 A8 A7

B12 B11 B10

A12 A11 A10

Table 1: Current transformer shorting contact locations.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 11/78

P0299ENa

Figure 3 :Location of securing screws for heavy duty terminal blocks.


4.1.3. Insulation

Insulation resistance tests are only necessary during commissioning if it is required for
them to be done and they have not been performed during installation.
Isolate all wiring from the earth and test the insulation with an electronic or brushless
insulation tester at a dc voltage not exceeding 500V. Terminals of the same circuits
should be temporarily connected together.

The main groups of relay terminals are:


a) Current transformer circuits
b) Auxiliary voltage supply.
c) Field voltage output and opto-isolated control inputs.
d) Relay contacts.
e) Case earth.
The insulation resistance should be greater than 100M at 500V.
On completion of the insulation resistance tests, ensure all external wiring is correctly
reconnected to the relay.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 12/78

MiCOM P740

4.1.4. External wiring

Check that the external wiring is correct to the relevant relay diagram or scheme
diagram. The relay diagram number appears on the rating label under the top
access cover on the front of the relay. The corresponding connection diagram will
have been supplied with the AREVA order acknowledgement for the relay.
If a P991 test block is provided, the connections should be checked against the
scheme (wiring) diagram. It is recommended that the supply connections are to the
live side of the test block [coloured orange with the odd numbered terminals (1, 3, 5,
7 etc.). The auxiliary supply is normally routed via terminals 13 (supply positive) and
15 (supply negative), with terminals 14 and 16 connected to the relays positive and
negative auxiliary supply terminals respectively. However, check the wiring against
the schematic diagram for the installation to ensure compliance with the customers
normal practice.
4.1.5. Watchdog contacts

Using a continuity tester, check that the watchdog contacts are in the states given in
Table 2 for a de-energised relay.
Contact state

Terminals

Relay de-energised Relay energised


L11 L12

(P741)

E11 E12

(P742)

H11 H12

(P743)

L13 L14

(P741)

E13 E14

(P742)

H13 H14

(P743)
Table 2:

Closed

Open

Open

Closed

Watchdog contact status

4.1.6. Auxiliary supply

The P740 relay can be operated from either a dc only or an ac/dc auxiliary supply
depending on the relays nominal supply rating. The incoming voltage must be
within the operating range specified in Table 3.
Without energising the relay measure the auxiliary supply to ensure it is within the
operating range.
Nominal supply rating DC [AC rms]

DC operating range

AC operating range

24 48V

[]

19 to 65V

48 110V

[30 100V]

37 to 150V

24 to 110V

110 250V

[100 240V]

87 to 300V

80 to 265V

Table 3

Operational range of auxiliary supply Vx.

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 13/78

It should be noted that the P740 relay range can withstand an ac ripple of up to 12%
of the upper rated voltage on the dc auxiliary supply.
Do not energise the relay or interface unit using the battery charger with the
battery disconnected as this can irreparably damage the relays power supply
circuitry.
Energise the relay only if the auxiliary supply is within the specified operating ranges.
If a test block is provided, it may be necessary to link across the front of the test plug
to connect the auxiliary supply to the relay.
4.2. With the relay energised
The following group of tests verify that the relay hardware and software is functioning
correctly and should be carried out with the auxiliary supply applied to the relay.
The current and voltage transformer connections must remain isolated from the relay
for these checks. The trip circuit should also remain isolated to prevent accidental
operation of the associated circuit breaker.
4.2.1. Watchdog contacts

Using a continuity tester, check the watchdog contacts are in the states given in Table
2 for an energised relay.
4.2.2. Date and time

Before setting the date and time, ensure that the factory-fitted battery isolation strip,
that prevents battery drain during transportation and storage, has been removed.
With the lower access cover open, presence of the battery isolation strip can be
checked by a red tab protruding from the positive side of the battery compartment.
Whilst lightly pressing the battery, to prevent it from falling out of the battery
compartment, pull the red tab to remove the isolation strip.
The date and time should now be set to the correct values. The method of setting will
depend on whether accuracy is being maintained via the optional Inter-Range
Instrumentation Group standard B (IRIG-B) port on the rear of the P741 relay.
4.2.2.1 With an IRIG-B signal for Central Unit (P741) only

If a satellite time clock signal conforming to IRIG-B is provided and the P741 relay
has the optional IRIG-B port fitted, the satellite clock equipment should be energised.
To allow the relays time and date to be maintained from an external IRIG-B source
cell [DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] must be set to Enabled.
Ensure the relay is receiving the IRIG-B signal by checking that cell [DATE and TIME,
IRIG-B Status] reads Active.
Once the IRIG-B signal is active, adjust the time offset of the universal co-ordinated
time (satellite clock time) on the satellite clock equipment so that local time is
displayed.
Check the time, date and month are correct in cell [DATE and TIME, Date/Time]. The
IRIG-B signal does not contain the current year so it will need to be set manually in
this cell.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 14/78

MiCOM P740

In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment
behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore,
when the auxiliary supply is restored, the time and date will be correct and not need
to be set again.
To test this, remove the IRIG-B signal, then remove the auxiliary supply from the relay.
Leave the relay de-energised for approximately 30 seconds. On re-energisation, the
time in cell [DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct.
Reconnect the IRIG-B signal.
The P741 will synchronise all peripheral units (P742/P743) every 10s and during the
power on of the scheme.
4.2.2.2 Without an IRIG-B signal for Central Unit (P741) or Peripheral Unit (P742/P743)

If the time and date is not being maintained by an IRIG-B signal, ensure that cell
[DATE and TIME, IRIG-B Sync] is set to Disabled.
Set the date and time to the correct local time and date using cell [DATE and TIME,
Date/Time].
In the event of the auxiliary supply failing, with a battery fitted in the compartment
behind the bottom access cover, the time and date will be maintained. Therefore
when the auxiliary supply is restored the time and date will be correct and not need to
be set again.
To test this, remove the auxiliary supply from the relay for approximately 30 seconds.
On re-energisation, the time in cell [DATE and TIME, Date/Time] should be correct.
4.2.3. Light Emitting Diodes (LEDs)

On power up the green LED should have illuminated and stayed on indicating that
the relay is healthy. The relay has non-volatile memory which remembers the state
(on or off) of the alarm, trip and, if configured to latch, user-programmable LED
indicators when the relay was last energised from an auxiliary supply. Therefore
these indicators may also illuminate when the auxiliary supply is applied.
If any of these LEDs are on then they should be reset before proceeding with further
testing. If the LEDs successfully reset (the LED goes out), there is no testing required
for that LED because it is known to be operational.
Note:

It is likely that alarms related to the communications channels


will not reset at this stage.

4.2.3.1 Testing the alarm and out of service LEDs

The alarm and out of service LEDs can be tested using the COMMISSION TESTS
menu column. Set cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Test Mode] to Contacts Blocked.
Check that the out of service LED illuminates continuously and the alarm LED flashes.
It is not necessary to return cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Test Mode] to Disabled at
this stage because the test mode will be required for later tests.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 15/78

4.2.3.2 Testing the Trip LED

The trip LED can be tested by initiating a manual circuit breaker trip from the relay.
However, the trip LED will operate during the setting checks performed later.
Therefore no further testing of the trip LED is required at this stage. Please note that
the CB control function does not exist in the Central Unit (P741) as only the Peripheral
Unit (P742/P743) may trip/close the local circuit breakers.
4.2.3.3 Testing the user-programmable LEDS

To test the user-programmable LEDs set cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Test LEDs] to
Apply Test. Check that all 8 LEDs on the right-hand side of the relay illuminate.
4.2.4. Field voltage supply

The relay generates a field voltage of nominally 48V dc that can be used to energise
the opto-isolated inputs (alternatively the substation battery may be used).
Measure the field voltage across the terminals 7 and 9 on the terminal block given in
Table 4. Check that the field voltage is within the range 40V to 60V when no load is
connected and that the polarity is correct.
Repeat for terminals 8 and 10.
Supply rail

Terminals
P741

P742

P743

+ve

L7 & L8

E7 & E8

H7 & H8

ve

L9 & L10

E9 & E10

H9 & H10

Table 4:

Field voltage terminals

4.2.5. Input opto-isolators

This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs on the relay are functioning correctly.
The P741 relay has 8 opto-isolated inputs while the P742 relay has 16 opto-isolated
inputs and P743 relays has 24 opto-isolated inputs.
The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time, see external connection
diagrams (P740/EN CO) for terminal numbers. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the
field supply voltage to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested.

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 16/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

Note:

The opto-isolated inputs may be energised from an external dc


auxiliary supply (e.g. the station battery) in some installations.
Check that this is not the case before connecting the field voltage
otherwise damage to the relay may result.

The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using either cell [SYSTEM DATA,
Opto I/P Status] or [COMMISSION TESTS, Opto I/P Status], a 1 indicating an
energised input and a 0 indicating a de-energised input. When each opto-isolated
input is energised one of the characters on the bottom line of the display will change
to indicate the new state of the inputs.
4.2.6. Output relays

This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P741 and
P742 relays have 8 output relays while P743 relay has 21 output relays.
Note:

For P743, the output boards are equipped with 8 output relays
but only 7 are used on each board. See external Connection
Diagrams Chapter (P740/EN CO) for terminal numbers.

Ensure that the relay is still in test mode by viewing cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Test
Mode] to ensure that it is set to Blocked.
The output relays should be energised one at a time. To select output relay 1 for
testing, set cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Test Pattern] as appropriate.
Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 as
given in external connection diagram (P740/EN CO).
To operate the output relay set cell COMMISSION TESTS, Contact Test] to Apply
Test. Operation will be confirmed by the continuity tester operating for a normally
open contact and ceasing to operate for a normally closed contact. Measure the
resistance of the contacts in the closed state.
Reset the output relay by setting cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Contact Test] to Remove
Test.
Note:

It should be ensured that thermal ratings of anything connected


to the output relays during the contact test procedure is not
exceeded by the associated output relay being operated for too
long. It is therefore advised that the time between application
and removal of contact test is kept to the minimum.

Repeat the test for relays 2 to 8 for P741 and P742 relays, 2 to 21 for P743 relay.
Return the relay to service by setting cell [COMMISSION TESTS, Test Mode] to
Disabled.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 17/78

4.2.7. Current differential communications

This test verifies that the P742 or P743 relays fibre optic communications ports used
for communications to the P741 Central Unit, are operating correctly.
J
A

2
3

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

RX

CH1

RX

CH1

RX

CH1

RX

CH1

RX

CH1

RX

CH1

RX

CH1

RX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

TX

CH2

RX

CH2

RX

CH2

RX

CH2

RX

CH2

RX

CH2

RX

CH2

TX

TX

TX

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

TX

TX

TX

RX

CH3

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

TX

RX

CH3

RX

CH3

RX

CH4

RX

CH4

RX

TX

TX
CH4

RX

CH4

RX

10
11

13

10
11

12
13

14

TX

CH2

RX

TX

IRIG-B

TX

TX
12

CH3

RX
TX

8
9

10

TX

TX

TX

CH1

RX
11

TX

RX

TX

TX
9

CH2

2
3

TX

4
5

CH1

15

14
15

14

16
17

17

18

RX

15

16

16
17

12
13

18

18

Figure 4 : P741 Rear Terminal blocks and communication ports

When connecting or disconnecting optical fibres care should be taken not to look
directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fibre.
From central unit, the cell [PU CONF & STATUS, PU connected] displayed the list of
peripheral units connected to the central unit.
From peripheral unit, it is possible to check the communication with the central unit
by disconnecting the optical fibre, an alarm Fibre Com Error should appear.
4.2.8. Current inputs (P742, P743 only)

This test verifies that the accuracy of current measurement is within the acceptable
tolerances.
All relays will leave the factory set for operation at a system frequency of 50Hz.
If operation at 60Hz is required then this must be set in cell [SYSTEM
DATA, Frequency].
Apply current equal to the line current transformer secondary winding rating to each
current transformer input of the corresponding rating in turn, see Table 1 or external
connection diagram (P740/EN CO) for appropriate terminal numbers, checking its
magnitude using a multimeter. The corresponding reading can then be checked in
the relays MEASUREMENTS 1 column and value displayed recorded.
The measured current values displayed on the relay LCD or a portable PC connected
to the front communication port will either be in primary or secondary Amperes. If
cell [MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the values displayed should
be equal to the applied current multiplied by the corresponding current transformer
ratio set in the CT and VT RATIOS menu column (see SEQARABIC). If cell
[MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the value displayed should be
equal to the applied current.
The measurement accuracy of the relay is 5%. However, an additional allowance
must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 18/78

MiCOM P740

Cell in MEASUREMENTS 1 column (02)

Corresponding CT Ratio
(in CT and VT RATIOS
column(0A) of menu)

[IA Magnitude]
[IB Magnitude]
[IC Magnitude]
[IN Magnitude]

[Phase CT Primary]__
[Phase CT Secondary]

Table 5:

CT ratio settings

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 19/78

5. SETTING CHECKS
The setting checks ensure that all of the application-specific relay settings (i.e. both
the relays function and programmable scheme logic settings), for the particular
installation, have been correctly applied to the relay.
Note:

The trip circuit should remain isolated during these checks to


prevent accidental operation of the associated circuit breaker.

5.1. Apply application-specific settings


There are two methods of applying the settings to the relay:

Transferring them from a pre-prepared setting file to the relay using a portable
PC running the appropriate software via the relays front EIA(RS)232 port,
located under the bottom access cover.
This method is preferred for
transferring function settings as it is much faster and there is less margin for
error. If programmable scheme logic other than the default settings with which
the relay is supplied are to be used then this is the only way of changing the
settings.
If a setting file has been created for the particular application and provided on
a diskette, this will further reduce the commissioning time and should always be
the case where application-specific programmable scheme logic is to be
applied to the relay.

Enter them manually via the relays operator interface.


suitable for changing the programmable scheme logic.
Note:

This method is not

It is essential that where the installation needs applicationspecific Programmable Scheme Logic, that the appropriate .psl
file is downloaded (sent) to the relay, for each and every setting
group that will be used. If the user fails to download the
required .psl file to any setting group that may be brought into
service, then factory default PSL will still be resident. This may
have severe operational and safety consequences.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 20/78

MiCOM P740

5.2. How to measure the Burden Resistance (RB)


Insertion of the test block to open current circuit
P992 or MMLG
PU
A

Short-circuit of the secondary


winding of the current transformer
(HV site)

IA

CTA

A
B
IB

CTB

V
IC

CTC

IN

N
P3747ENb

1. Short-circuit of the secondary winding of the 3 current transformers (see above).


2. Open the current circuit by inserting the test block
3. Connect the current test set in the test block (phase + neutral).
4. Inject a current (1A) and measure the voltage at the terminals of the resistor
circuitry.
5. Calculate the burden resistance RB by using the following equation:
RB = Umeasured / Iinjected
Repeat the previous operation for each resistance :
RAN between boundary A and N
RBN between boundary B and N
RCN between boundary C and N
RAB between boundary A and B
Calculate the resistance RBA, RBB, RBC, and RBN, by using the following equation:
RBA = (RAB + RAN - RBN ) / 2
RBN = RAN - RBA
RBB = RAB - RBA
RBC = RCN - RBN

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 21/78

The highest value of the 3 phases (RBA, RBB, RBC) should be multiplicated by 1.25
(increase of 25% for a temperature at 75) and set in the cell [CT/VT ratio, RB in
ohm].
The highest value of the 3 phases (RBA, RBB, RBC) should be divided by the neutral
resistance RBN and set in the cell [CT/VT ratio, RBPh / RBN].
1 RBph / RBN
PU
IA

CTA

IB

CTB

IC

CTC

IN
P3900ENa

2 RBPh / RBN = 3
PU
IA

CTA

IB

CTB

IC

CTC

IN
P3901ENa

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 22/78

MiCOM P740

5.3. Demonstrate Correct Relay Operation


Tests below have already demonstrated that the relay is within calibration, thus the
purpose of these tests is as follows:

To determine that the primary protection function of the relay, current


differential, can trip according to the correct application settings.

To verify correct setting of any backup phase overcurrent protection.

To verify correct assignment of the inputs, relays and trip contacts, by


monitoring the response to a selection of fault injections.

5.3.1. Current Differential Bias Characteristic

To avoid spurious operation of any Overcurrent, earth fault or breaker fail elements,
these should be disabled for the duration of the differential element tests. This is
done in the relays CONFIGURATION column. Ensure that cells, [Overcurrent Prot],
[Earth Fault Prot] and [CB Fail & I<] are all set to Disabled. Make a note of which
elements need to be re-enabled after testing.

5.3.1.1 Connect the test circuit

The following tests require a injection test set, able to feed the relays with two currents
variable in phase and magnitude, connected as shown in Figure 5.
This method will be preferred for a centralised solution
INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT
I1

FO

P742/3
Peripheral
Unit 1

P741
Central
Unit

Test
Box
I2

FO

P742/3
Peripheral
Unit 2

P3748ENa

Figure 5: Connection for Bias Characteristic Testing Centralised Solution

As shown in figure 5bis, this method will be used for a distributed solution when only
one peripheral unit is available.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 23/78

I2

P741
Central
Unit

FO

P742/3
Peripheral
Unit 1

Test
Box

P3749ENa

Figure 5bis: Connection for Bias Characteristic Testing Distributed Solution

A current I1 is injected into the A phase of the PU1 which is used as the bias current
and another current I2 is injected into the A phase of the PU2 which is used as
differential current.
Currents I1 and I2 are in anti-phase, i.e.: 180 out of phase and I2>I1
Idiff: I1+I2 = I2 - I1
Ibias: I= I1+I2 = I1 + I2
k : Percentage bias, Characteristic limit: Idiff = IS + k Ibias
I2 I1 = IS + k (I1 + I2)
I = IS + k (2 I1 + I)
I (1 k) = IS + 2 k I1
I = (IS + 2 k I1 ) / (1 k)

with I2 = I1 + I

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 24/78

MiCOM P740

1) If only one current is available, we will have I1 = 0


I = IS / (1 k)

i diff (t)

Ibias = Idiff = I2 = D I
ek

p
Slo

Idiff = I2 = D I
Is
45
0

Ibias = I2 = D I

i bias
P3750ENa

In this case, we increase I2 from 0 to A point until the differential element operates.
Note:

ID>2 will be set below the A point during the test. ID>1 alarm
timer will be set to 100s during the test.

To calculate and check the slope k, k = (I2-IS)/I2


2) If 2 currents are available:

i diff (t)
k
pe

Slo

Idiff = I1- I2
A

Is
45
0

i bias

B
Ibias = I1 + I2

P3759ENa

Ibias is fixed to a value greater than the A point. So Ibias = I1 + I2 = fixed value (Point B)
we set I1 = - I2 = Ibias / 2 so Idiff = 0
In this case, we increase I1 and decrease I2 from the same primary value I (note that
all PUs transmit the primary currents to central unit). When we reach the point C, the
differential element should have to operate.
To calculate the slope k, k = [(I1 I2) IS] / (I1 + I2)
The differential current will increase twice the value I.
Note:

ID>2 will be set below the A point during the test. ID>1 alarm
timer will be set to 100s during the test.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 25/78

5.3.1.2 Slope

If a LED has been assigned in central or/and peripheral units to display the trip
information, these may be used to indicate correct operation. If not, monitor option
will need to be used see the next paragraph.
On P741 go Central Unit GROUP1-->BUSBAR PROTECT and set ID>1 Alarm timer to
100s
On P742/3 go to COMMISSION TESTS column in the menu, scroll down and change
cells [Monitor Bit 1] to [BUSBAR_TRIPPING]. Doing so, cell [Test Port Status] will
appropriately set or reset the bits that now represent BUSBAR_TRIPPING (with the
rightmost bit representing Busbar Trip. From now on you should monitor the
indication of [Test Port Status]. Make a note of which elements need to be re-enabled
or re-set after testing.
Test of ID>2:
ID>1 Alarm Timer should be set to 100s during testing.
Inject a I2 current smaller than ID>2 and slowly increase I2 until tripping.
Test of the operating time of the differential element:
Inject a I2 current greater than twice ID>2 threshold and measure the operating time
of the differential element.
Test of ID>1:
ID>1 Alarm Timer should be set to 100ms.
Inject a I2 current smaller than ID>1 and slowly increase I2 until circuit fault appears
(LED Alarm of LED circuitry fault).
Test of ID>1 Alarm Timer:
ID>1 Alarm Timer should be set to 5s.
Inject a I2 current greater than twice the ID>1 threshold and check that the Circuitry
Fault Alarm is coming in 5s.
Note:

Same tests can be applied for the Differential Sensitive Earth


Fault Protection.
Note: the differential SEF is 20ms delayed and controlled by a
settable threshold Ibias ph> to unblock/block the sensitive
element depending of the restrain phase currents.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 26/78

MiCOM P740

5.3.2. Phase Overcurrent Protection (P742 and P743)

If the overcurrent protection function is being used, both >1 and I>2 elements
should be tested.
To avoid spurious operation of any current differential, earth fault, breaker fail or CT
supervision elements, these should be disabled for the duration of the overcurrent
tests. This is done in the relays CONFIGURATION column. Make a note of which
elements need to be re-enabled after testing.
5.3.2.1 Connect the test circuit

Determine which output relay has been selected to operate when an >1 trip and an
I>2 occur by viewing the relays programmable scheme logic.
The programmable scheme logic can only be changed using the appropriate
software. If this software has not been available then the default output relay
allocations will still be applicable.
If the trip outputs are phase-segregated (i.e. a different output relay allocated for
each phase), the relay assigned for tripping on A phase faults should be used.
If stage 1 is not mapped directly to an output relay in the programmable scheme
logic, output relay 1,2 or 3 could be used for the test as it operates for trip condition
(phase A, B and C).
The associated terminal numbers can be found from the external connection diagram
(Chapter P740/EN CO)SEQARABIC.
Connect the output relay so that its operation will trip the test set and stop the timer.
Connect the current output of the test set to the A phase current transformer input of
the relay.
Ensure that the timer will start when the current is applied to the relay.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 27/78

5.3.2.1.1 Perform the test


Ensure that the timer is reset.
Apply a current of twice the setting in cell [GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, >1 Current
Set] to the relay and note the time displayed when the timer stops.
Check that the red trip LED has illuminated.
5.3.2.1.2 Check the operating time
Check that the operating time recorded by the timer is within the range shown in
SEQARABIC
Note:

Except for the definite time characteristic, the operating times


given in SEQARABIC are for a time multiplier or time dial setting
of 1. Therefore, to obtain the operating time at other time
multiplier or time dial settings, the time given in SEQARABIC
must be multiplied by the setting of cell [GROUP 1
OVERCURRENT, >1 TMS] for IEC and UK characteristics or cell
[GROUP 1 OVERCURRENT, Time Dial] for IEEE and US
characteristics.

In addition, for definite time and inverse characteristics there is an additional delay of
up to 0.02 second and 0.08 second respectively that may need to be added to the
relays acceptable range of operating times.
For all characteristics, allowance must be made for the accuracy of the test equipment
being used.
Characteristic

Operating time at twice current setting and time


multiplier/time dial setting of 1.0
Nominal (seconds)

Range (seconds)

DT

[: >1 Time Delay] setting

Setting 2%

IEC S Inverse

10.03

9.53 10.53

IEC V Inverse

13.50

12.83 14.18

IEC E Inverse

26.67

24.67 28.67

UK LT Inverse

120.00

114.00 126.00

IEEE M Inverse

0.64

0.61 0.67

IEEE V Inverse

1.42

1.35 1.50

IEEE E Inverse

1.46

1.39 1.54

US Inverse

0.46

0.44 0.49

US ST Inverse

0.26

0.25 0.28

Table 6:

Characteristic operating times for >1

Re-perform the tests for the function I>2


Upon completion of the tests any current differential, overcurrent, earth
fault, breaker fail or supervision elements which were disabled for
testing purposes must have their original settings restored in the
CONFIGURATION column.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 28/78

MiCOM P740

5.3.3. Breaker Failure Protection


5.3.3.1 Separate external 50BF protection to the busbar protection

PU3

CB Fail

PU2

PU1

PU4

PU5

External Fault
P3751ENa

For example as shown in the above figure, we simulate a CB fail in feeder 1 (PU1).
Therefore, we energise the opto input External CB Fail of the PU1 and we check
that the central unit issue a tripping order to PU2 and PU3.
Note:

If the I>BB or IN>BB are enabled in menu Busbar Trip


Confirm in Peripheral Unit, the CB fail trip command issued by
the Central Unit will be confirmed by a measured phase currents
or neutral currents greater than I>BB (Phase) or IN>BB (Earth).

For example: PU2 and PU3 will operate only if the phase currents > I>BB else the
local trip will be not confirmed.
The trip of the backup phase overcurrent or earth fault overcurrent protection
initiates, as described above, the timers tBF3 and tBF4.

Protective Relays

5.3.3.2 External initiation of BF Protection

Trip A, B, C

P742/3
Peripheral
Unit

Trip Command

P3752ENa

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 29/78

To test the retrip:


As shown in the above figure, we initiate the opto inputs External Trip A,B,C and
apply a current twice the I< threshold.
Check that the PU issue a retrip order after the settable time tBF3.
Note:

If I> enabled is activated, then the retrip command will be


controlled locally by a measured phase currents greater than I>.

To test the backtrip:


Do the same test as for retrip however apply a faulty current for more than tBF4 and
check that the backtrip signal is sent to the CU.
Check that PU2 and PU3 connected to the bus-section 1 are tripped by the CU.
Note:

If the I>BB or IN>BB are enabled in menu Busbar Trip


Confirm in Peripheral Unit, the CB fail trip command issued by
the Central Unit will be confirmed by a measured phase currents
or neutral currents greater than I>BB (Phase) or IN>BB (Earth).

For example: PU2 and PU3 will operate only if the phase currents > I>BB else the
local trip will be not confirmed.

CB unavailable:

Zone 1

Zone 2

PU3
PU1

PU2

PU4

PU5

P3753ENa

Apply an internal fault in zone 2 and energise the opto input of PU3 CB
unavailable and check that both bus-section 1 tripped simultaneously.
Note:

If the input CB unavailable is energised, the CB will be not


tripped and is normally used only for bus-coupler.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 30/78

MiCOM P740

5.3.3.3 Internal initiation Breaker Failure Protection

This Breaker failure Protection can be initiated only by a trip command issue by the
Central Unit.

Zone 1

Zone 2

PU3
PU1

PU2

PU4

PU5

P3753ENa

Simulate a busbar fault on the bus-section 2.


Continue to apply fault current in the bus-coupler until the timer tBF1 elapsed.
Check that the retrip signal is given by PU3 and backtrip signal is sent after tBF2.
Check that the CU issued a trip command to both bus-sections (PU1, PU2 PU4 and
PU5 should have operate).

5.4. Check Application Settings


The settings applied should be carefully checked against the required applicationspecific settings to ensure that they are correct, and have not been mistakenly altered
during the injection test.
There are two methods of checking the settings:

Extract the settings from the relay using a portable PC running the appropriate
software via the front EIA(RS)232 port, located under the bottom access cover.
Compare the settings transferred from the relay with the original written
application-specific setting record. (For cases where the customer has only
provided a printed copy of the required settings but a portable PC is available).

Step through the settings using the relays operator interface and compare them
with the original application-specific setting record.

Unless previously agreed to the contrary, the application-specific programmable


scheme logic will not be checked as part of the commissioning tests.
Due to the versatility and possible complexity of the programmable scheme logic, it is
beyond the scope of these commissioning instructions to detail suitable test
procedures. Therefore, when programmable scheme logic tests must be performed,
written tests which will satisfactorily demonstrate the correct operation of the
application-specific scheme logic should be devised by the Engineer who created it.
These should be provided to the Commissioning Engineer together with the diskette
containing the programmable scheme logic setting file.

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 31/78

6. END TO END TESTS


Verify communications between Peripheral units (P742 or P743) and
Central Unit (P741) Advisable for distributed scheme.
The following communication checks confirm that the optical power at the transmit
and receive ports of the Peripheral Units and the Central Unit are within the
recommended operating limits.
Measure and record the optical signal strength received by the Peripheral Unit (P742
or P743) by disconnecting the optical fibre from the Channel 1 receive port and
connecting it to an optical power meter. The mean level should be in the range
16.8 dBm to 25.4dBm. If the mean level is outside of this range check the size
and type of fibre being used.
When connecting or disconnecting optical fibres care should be taken not to
look directly into the transmit port or end of the optical fibre.
Measure and record the optical power of the Channel 1 transmit port using the
optical power meter and length of optical fibre. The mean value should be in the
range 16.8dBm to 22.8dBm.
Ensure that all transmit (Tx) and receive (Rx) optical fibres between Peripheral Unit
and Central Unit are reconnected, ensuring correct placement.
Reset any alarm indications and check that no further communications failure alarms
are raised.
7. ON-LOAD CHECKS
The objectives of the on-load checks are to:
-

confirm the external wiring to the current inputs is correct.

ensure the on-load differential current is well below the relay setting.

However, these checks can only be carried out if there are no restrictions preventing
the energisation of the plant being protected and the other P740 relays in the group
have been commissioned.
Remove all test leads, temporary shorting leads, etc. and replace any external wiring
that has been removed to allow testing.
If it has been necessary to disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in
order to perform any of the foregoing tests, it should be ensured that all connections
are replaced in accordance with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Confirm current transformer wiring:
Measure the current transformer secondary values for each input using a multimeter
connected in series with the corresponding relay current input.
Check that the current transformer polarities are correct.
Ensure the current flowing in the neutral circuit of the current transformers is
negligible.
Compare the values of the secondary phase currents with the relays measured
values, which can be found in the MEASUREMENTS 1 menu column.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 32/78

MiCOM P740
Note:

Under normal load conditions the earth fault function will


measure little, if any, current. It is therefore necessary to simulate
a phase to neutral fault. This can be achieved by temporarily
disconnecting one or two of the line current transformer
connections to the relay and shorting the terminals of these
current transformer secondary windings.

If cell [MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Secondary, the currents displayed
on the LCD or a portable PC connected to the front EIA(RS)232 communication port
of the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current. The values should be
within 5% of the applied secondary currents. However, an additional allowance must
be made for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
If cell [MEASURET SETUP, Local Values] is set to Primary, the currents displayed on
the relay should be equal to the applied secondary current multiplied by the
corresponding current transformer ratio set in CT & VT RATIOS menu column (see
SEQARABIC). Again the values should be within 5% of the expected value, plus an
additional allowance for the accuracy of the test equipment being used.
Note:

If a single dedicated current transformer is used for the earth


fault function, it is not possible to check the relays measured
values.

8. FINAL CHECKS
The tests are now complete.
Remove all test or temporary shorting leads, etc. If it has been necessary to
disconnect any of the external wiring from the relay in order to perform the wiring
verification tests, it should be ensured that all connections are replaced in accordance
with the relevant external connection or scheme diagram.
Ensure that the relay has been restored to service by checking that cell
[COMMISSION TESTS, Test Mode] is set to Disabled.
If the menu language has been changed to allow accurate testing it should be
restored to the customers preferred language.
If a P991/MMLG test block is installed, remove the P992/MMLB test plug and replace
the cover so that the protection is put into service.
Ensure that all event records, fault records, disturbance records, alarms and LEDs
have been reset before leaving the relay.
If applicable, replace the secondary front cover on the relay.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 33/78

9. MAINTENANCE
9.1. Maintenance period
It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D Information receive periodic
monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is
inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent
operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular
intervals.
AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years.
MiCOM P740 current differential relays are self-supervising and so require less
maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so
that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodic tests should be done to
ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact.
If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organisation then the
recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme.
Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as:

operating environment

accessibility of the site

amount of available manpower

importance of the installation in the power system

consequences of failure

9.2. Maintenance checks


It is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the
substation itself).
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar
with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on
the equipments rating label.
9.2.1. Alarms

The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist.
If so, press the read key ["] repeatedly to step through the alarms.
Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.
9.2.2. Opto-isolators

The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds to their
energisation by repeating the commissioning test.
9.2.3. Output relays

The output relays can be checked to ensure that they operate by repeating the
commissioning test.

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 34/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

9.2.4. Measurement accuracy

If the power system is energised, the values measured by the relay can be compared
with known system values to check that they are in the approximate range that is
expected. If they are then the analogue/digital conversion and calculations are being
performed correctly by the relay.
Alternatively, the values measured by the relay can be checked against known values
injected into the relay via the test block, if fitted, or injected directly into the relay
terminals. These tests will prove the calibration accuracy is being maintained.
9.3. Method of repair
P741, P742, P743 relays
If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the nature of the
fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged.
Due to the extensive use of surface-mount components faulty PCBs should be
replaced as it is not possible to perform repairs on damaged circuits. Thus either the
complete relay or just the faulty PCB, identified by the in-built diagnostic software,
can be replaced. Advice about identifying the faulty PCB can be found in the
Problem Analysis.
The preferred method is to replace the complete relay as it ensures that the internal
circuitry is protected against electrostatic discharge and physical damage at all times
and overcomes the possibility of incompatibility between replacement PCBs.
However, it may be difficult to remove an installed relay due to limited access in the
back of the cubicle and rigidity of the scheme wiring.
Replacing PCBs can reduce transport costs but requires clean, dry conditions on site
and higher skills from the person performing the repair. However, if the repair is not
performed by an approved service centre, the warranty will be invalidated.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar
with the contents of the Safety and Technical Data sections and the ratings on
the equipments rating label. This should ensure that no damage is caused
by incorrect handling of the electronic components.
9.3.1. Replacing the complete relay

The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the
complete relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to
disconnect the scheme wiring.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 35/78

Before working at the rear of the relay, isolate all voltage and current supplies to the
relay.
Note:

The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer


shorting switches which will close when the heavy duty terminal
block is removed.

Disconnect the relay earth, IRIG-B (Central unit only) and fibre optic connections, as
appropriate, from the rear of the relay.

Heavy duty terminal block

Medium duty terminal block


P0149ENa

Figure 6 : Location of securing screws for terminal block

Note:

The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to


minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or
lost

Without exerting excessive force or damaging the scheme wiring, pull the terminal
blocks away from their internal connectors.
Remove the screws used to fasten the relay to the panel, rack, etc. These are the
screws with the larger diameter heads that are accessible when the access covers are
fitted and open.
If the top and bottom access covers have been removed, do not remove the
screws with the smaller diameter heads which are accessible. These screws
secure the front panel to the relay.
Withdraw the relay carefully from the panel, rack, etc. because it will be heavy due to
the internal transformers.
To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in
reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the
case earth, IRIG-B (Central Unit only) and fibre optic connections are replaced. To
facilitate easy identification of each terminal block, they are labelled alphabetically
with A on the left hand side when viewed from the rear.
Once reinstallation is complete the relay should be recommissioned using the
instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 36/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

9.3.2. Replacing a PCB

If the relay fails to operate correctly refer to the Problem Analysis chapter, to help
determine which PCB has become faulty.
To replace any of the relays PCBs it is necessary to first remove the front panel.
Before removing the front panel to replace a PCB the auxiliary supply must be
removed. It is also strongly recommended that the voltage and current
transformer connections and trip circuit are isolated.
Open the top and bottom access covers. With size 60TE/80TE cases the access
covers have two hinge-assistance T-pieces which clear the front panel moulding when
the access covers are opened by more than 90, thus allowing their removal.
If fitted, remove the transparent secondary front cover. A description of how to do
this is given in the Introduction.
By applying outward pressure to the middle of the access covers, they can be bowed
sufficiently so as to disengage the hinge lug allowing the access cover to be removed.
The screws that fasten the front panel to the case are now accessible.
The size 40TE case has four crosshead screws fastening the front panel to the case,
one in each corner, in recessed holes. The size 60TE/80TE case has an additional
two screws, one midway along each of the top and bottom edges of the front plate.
Undo and remove the screws.
Do not remove the screws with the larger diameter heads which are
accessible when the access covers are fitted and open. These screws hold the
relay in its mounting (panel or cubicle).
When the screws have been removed, the complete front panel can be pulled
forward and separated from the metal case.
Caution should be observed at this stage because the front panel is connected
to the rest of the relay circuitry by a 64-way ribbon cable.
Additionally, from here on, the internal circuitry of the relay is exposed and
not protected against electrostatic discharges, dust ingress, etc. Therefore
ESD precautions and clean working conditions should be maintained at all
times.
The ribbon cable is fastened to the front panel using an IDC connector; a socket on
the cable itself and a plug with locking latches on the front panel. Gently push the
two locking latches outwards which will eject the connector socket slightly. Remove
the socket from the plug to disconnect the front panel.
The PCBs within the relay are now accessible. Figures 8, 9 and 10 show the PCB
locations for the Central Unit (P741) in a size 80 TE case, and for Peripheral Units
either in a size 40 TE case (P742) or in a size 60 TE case (P743).

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 37/78
Note:

The numbers above the case outline identify the guide slot
reference for each printed circuit board. Each printed circuit
board has a label stating the corresponding guide slot number
to ensure correct re-location after removal. To serve as a
reminder of the slot numbering there is a label on the rear of the
front panel metallic screen.
0
1

1
5

ON

ON 1

ON 1

ON 1

ON

ON

ON1

SLOT 14

SLOT 13

SLOT 12

SLOT 11

SLOT 10

SLOT 9

SLOT 8

SLOT 7

SLOT 6

SLOT 5

SLOT 4

SLOT 3

SLOT 1

SLOT 2

ON

ON

ENSURE SWITCH POSITIONS ON REF5 ARE POSITIONED AS SHOWN


P3754ENa

DESCRIPTION

MATERIAL

Assy Power Supply

ZN0021 *

Assy Power Supply

2070583 *

Assy Opto Input

ZN0017 002

Assy Relay Output

ZN0019 001

Assy Comms

2070273 001

Assy IRIG-B

ZN0007 *

Assy Coprocessor

2070273 002

REF

Figure 7: P741 PCB/module locations (viewed from front)

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 38/78

MiCOM P740

2
1

SLOT 6

SLOT 4
SLOT 5

SLOT 3

SLOT 2

SLOT 1

0
SER No.

29

23 or 24

ON

P3755ENa

DESCRIPTION

MATERIAL

Assy Power Supply

ZN0021 *

Assy Relay Output

ZN0019 001

Assy Opto Input

ZN0017 002

Assy Coprocessor

2070273 002

23

Assy Standard Input Module

GN0010 033

24

Input Module (Univ. Inputs only)

GN0010 040

29

Assembly Sreen Plate

GN0058 001

REF

Figure 8: P742 PCB/module locations (viewed from front)

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 39/78

FIT JUMPERS (REF 64) TO PL2 ON


PCB'S REF 2 AND 3 IN SLOT POSITIONS SHOWN.
0
1

SLOT10

SLOT 9

SLOT 8

SLOT 7

SLOT 5

SLOT 6

29

SLOT 4

SLOT 3

SLOT 2

SLOT 1

SER No.

29
1

23

or

24

ON

P3756ENa

DESCRIPTION

MATERIAL

Assy Power Supply

ZN0021 *

Assy Relay Output

ZN0019 001

Assy Opto Input

ZN0017 002

Assy Coprocessor

2070273 002

23

Assy Standard Input Module

GN0010 033

24

Input Module (Univ. Inputs only)

GN0010 040

29

Assembly Screen Plate

GN0058 001

REF

Figure 9: P743 PCB/module locations (viewed from front)

The 64-way ribbon cable to the front panel also provides the electrical connections
between PCBs with the connections being via IDC connectors.
The slots inside the case to hold the PCBs securely in place each correspond to a rear
terminal block. Looking from the front of the relay these terminal blocks are labelled
from right to left.
Note:

To ensure compatibility, always replace a faulty PCB with one of


an identical part number.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 40/78

MiCOM P740

9.3.2.1 Replacement of the main processor board

The main processor board is located in the front panel, not within the case as with all
the other PCBs. Place the front panel with the user interface face-down and remove
the six screws from the metallic screen, as shown in Figure 10. Remove the metal
plate.
There are two further screws, one each side of the rear of the battery compartment
recess, that hold the main processor PCB in position. Remove these screws.
The user interface keypad is connected to the main processor board via a flex-strip
ribbon cable. Carefully disconnect the ribbon cable at the PCB-mounted connector
as it could easily be damaged by excessive twisting.
The front panel can then be re-assembled with a replacement PCB using the reverse
procedure. Ensure that the ribbon cable is reconnected to the main processor board
and all eight screws are re-fitted.
INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT

P3007ENa

Figure 10:Front panel assembly

Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given before. After refitting
and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location of the
hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
After replacement of the main processor board, all the settings required for the
application will need to be re-entered. Therefore, it is useful if an electronic copy of
the application-specific settings is available on disk. Although this is not essential, it
can reduce the time taken to re-enter the settings and hence the time the protection is
out of service.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 41/78

9.3.2.2 Replacement of the IRIG-B board (Central Unit only)

Depending on the model number of the central unit (P741), the IRIG-B board may
have connections for IRIG-B signals.
To replace a faulty board, disconnect all IRIG-B connections at the rear of the relay.
The board is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay,
one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 11. Remove these
screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
Gently pull the IRIG-B board forward and out of the case.
To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 12 illustrates the
layout of the IRIG-B board with IRIG-B (ZN0007 001).
L

2
3

TX

4
5

CH1

RX

IRIG-B

TX
8
9

CH2

RX

10
11

TX
12

RX

13

14
15

16
17

18

P3757ENa

INCLUDEPICTUREMERGEFORMAT

Figure 11: Location of securing screws for IRIG-B board

ZN0007

SERIAL No.

P3009FRa

Figure 12: Typical IRIG-B board

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 42/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

Before fitting the replacement PCB check that the number on the round label adjacent
to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the
slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot number on the label.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slotted into the appropriate slot, ensuring
that it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks and the securing screws are
re-fitted.
Reconnect IRIG-B connection at the rear of the relay.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section 9.3.1.2.
After refitting and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the
location of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel
moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 43/78

9.3.2.3 Replacement of the input module

The input module comprises of two boards fastened together, the transformer board
and the input board.
The module is secured in the case by two screws on its right-hand side, accessible
from the front of the relay, as shown in Figure 13. Remove these screws carefully as
they are not captive in the front plate of the module.

Input module

Handle

P3010ENa

Figure 13: Location of securing screws for input module

On the right-hand side of the analogue input module there is a small metal tab which
brings out a handle. Grasping this handle firmly, pull the module forward, away
from the rear terminal blocks. A reasonable amount of force will be required to
achieve this due to the friction between the contacts of two terminal blocks, one
medium duty and one heavy duty.
Note:

Care should be taken when withdrawing the input module as it


will suddenly come loose once the friction of the terminal blocks
has been overcome.
This is particularly important with
unmounted relays as the metal case will need to be held firmly
whilst the module is withdrawn.

Remove the module from the case, taking care as it is heavy because it contains all
the relays input voltage and current transformers.
Before fitting the replacement module check that the number on the round label
adjacent to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be
fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot number on the
label.
The replacement module can be slotted in using the reverse procedure, ensuring that
it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks. To help confirm that the
module has been inserted fully there is a V-shaped cut-out in the bottom plate of the
case that should be fully visible. Re-fit the securing screws.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 44/78

MiCOM P740
Note:

The transformer and input boards within the


calibrated together with the calibration data being
input board. Therefore it is recommended that
module is replaced to avoid on-site recalibration
performed.

module are
stored on the
the complete
having to be

Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section. After
refitting and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location
of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.
9.3.2.4 Replacement of the power supply board

The power supply board is fastened to a relay board to form the power supply
module and is located on the extreme left-hand side of all MiCOM differential busbar
relays.
Pull the power supply module forward, away from the rear terminal blocks and out of
the case. A reasonable amount of force will be required to achieve this due to the
friction between the contacts of the two medium duty terminal blocks.
The two boards are held together with push-fit nylon pillars and can be separated by
pulling them apart. Care should be taken when separating the boards to avoid
damaging the inter-board connectors located near the lower edge of the PCBs
towards the front of the power supply module.
The power supply board is the one with two large electrolytic capacitors on it that
protrude through the other board that forms the power supply module. To help
identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 14 illustrates the layout of
the power supply board for all voltage ratings.
Before re-assembling the module with a replacement PCB check that the number on
the round label adjacent to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into
which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot
number on the label.
Re-assemble the module with a replacement PCB ensuring the inter-board connectors
are firmly pushed together and the four push-fit nylon pillars are securely located in
their respective holes in each PCB.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 45/78

E1
D16

R29

R53

D14

D17
RD1
D1

C8

C18

D2

D3

C14

LK1

LK2

R26

REF 1

C25

C29

C28

D15

L2

C20

R24

R23

C19

R28

R27
TR9

C9
C7

D28

IC3
R22

R19

C12

C10

R25

TR1
R16

C13
TR10
C24

R33 R32

R62
R63

R5

R88

D13

C4 R4

TR6

C15

C26

C36
R55

C23

R1

R76

R77

R30

C39
PC3

D27

ZN0001

R78

TR8

R57

PL1

R56
IC4
RD3

R41

D8

RL1

R81
C37 R67 R89

RD4

TR5

PC4

R65

C30
SK1

R42
R80

R64

D22
D26

R79

C44

TR3

C17

SERIAL No.

D21
R90

C34

D25

R14

R54

D7

C22

R13

TR7

C41

D12

L1

TR4

C1
R3 C2

R50

R51

C43
C11

C42

PC2

C45
IC2

D11

R6

D20

R44

C46

R11
R12

R45

R39

T2

D6

R47

R40

PC1

R10

R36

D4

D5

C16

C33
D23

R31
D19

D9

R43

C21

R37 R38

R15

R49 R46

R20
R7

R48 C47

C3 R9

C5

RD2
C32

C35

D10

R2

T1

D24 R58 R59

R18
R17
C6

IC1

R52

R21
R8

R68

D18

IC6

C38

C40
R69

C31

PC5

R66

R70

IC5

E2

Figure 14: Typical power supply board for P742 & P743

2070584 B

P3761ENa

Figure 15bis: Additive power supply board for P741

Slot the power supply module back into the relay case, ensuring that it is pushed fully
back on to the rear terminal blocks.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section. After refitting
and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location of the
hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 46/78

MiCOM P740

9.3.2.5 Replacement of the relay board in the power supply module

Remove and replace the relay board in the power supply module as described in
above.
The relay board is the one with holes cut in it to allow the transformer and two large
electrolytic capacitors of the power supply board to protrude through. To help
identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 15 illustrates the layout of
the relay board.
Before re-assembling the module with a replacement relay board check that the
number on the round label adjacent to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot
number into which it will be fitted. If the slot number is missing or incorrect write the
correct slot number on the label.
Ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC connector) on the replacement relay
board is the same as the one being replaced before replacing the module in the relay
case.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

SERIAL No.

F
ZN0019

E2

P3762ENa

Figure 16: Typical relay board

Note: Only for P743, relay number 6 is not used.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 47/78

9.3.2.6 Replacement of the opto and separate relay boards (P741, P742, & P743)

To remove either, gently pull the faulty PCB forward and out of the case.
If the relay board is being replaced, ensure the setting of the link (located above IDC
connector) on the replacement relay board is the same as the one being replaced.
To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 16 and Figure 17
illustrate the layout of the relay and opto boards respectively.
Before fitting the replacement PCB check that the number on the round label adjacent
to the front edge of the PCB matches the slot number into which it will be fitted. If the
slot number is missing or incorrect write the correct slot number on the label.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slid into the appropriate slot, ensuring that
it is pushed fully back on to the rear terminal blocks.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given in section
After
refitting and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location
of the hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.

C1

Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

ZN0017
SERIAL No.
E
E1

P3760ENa

Figure 17: Typical opto board

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 48/78

MiCOM P740

9.3.2.7 Replacement of the Coprocessor board

Before replacing a faulty Coprocessor board, disconnect fibre optic cable connections
at the rear of the relay.
The board is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay,
one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 17. Remove these
screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
Using the small metal tab on the left hand side of the input module rotate handle
used for extraction until it is in a horizontal orientation. This is necessary so that the
two PCB connectors on the underside of the Coprocessor board PCB do not catch the
handle as the PCB is extracted.
Gently pull the faulty Coprocessor board PCB forward and out of the case.

P3763ENa

Figure 18: Typical Coprocessor board

To help identify that the correct board has been replace, Figure 18 illustrates the
layout of the Coprocessor board with dual fibre optic communications channels fitted.
The Coprocessor board boards with a single communications channel (used in relays
for two ended feeders where dual redundant communications channels are not
required) use the same PCB layout but have less components fitted.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slid into the appropriate slot, ensuring that
it is pushed fully back and the board securing screws are re-fitted.
Refit the fibre optic cable connections, ensuring that they are in the correct locations.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given before. After refitting
and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location of the
hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 49/78

9.3.2.8 Replacement of the Comms board

Before replacing a faulty Comms board (Communication board between central and
peripheral units), disconnect fibre optic cable connections at the rear of the relay.
The board is secured in the case by two screws accessible from the rear of the relay,
one at the top and another at the bottom, as shown in Figure 17. Remove these
screws carefully as they are not captive in the rear panel of the relay.
Using the small metal tab on the left hand side of the input module rotate handle
used for extraction until it is in a horizontal orientation. This is necessary so that the
two PCB connectors on the underside of the Comms board PCB do not catch the
handle as the PCB is extracted.
Gently pull the faulty Comms board PCB forward and out of the case.

P3764ENa

Figure 19: Typical Comms board

To help identify that the correct board has been removed, Figure 19 illustrates the
layout of the Comms board with dual fibre optic communications channels fitted.
The Comms board boards with a single communications channel (used in relays for
two ended feeders where dual redundant communications channels are not required)
use the same PCB layout but have less components fitted.
The replacement PCB should be carefully slid into the appropriate slot, ensuring that
it is pushed fully back and the board securing screws are re-fitted.
Refit the fibre optic cable connections, ensuring that they are in the correct locations.
Refit the front panel using the reverse procedure to that given before. After refitting
and closing the access covers on size 60TE/80TE cases, press at the location of the
hinge-assistance T-pieces so that they click back into the front panel moulding.
Once the relay has been reassembled after repair, it should be recommissioned in
accordance with the instructions in sections 1 to 8 inclusive of this chapter.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 50/78

MiCOM P740

9.4. Recalibration
9.4.1. P740 relay

Recalibration is not required when a PCB is replaced unless it happens to be one of


the boards in the input module, the replacement of either directly affects the
calibration.
Although it is possible to carry out recalibration on site, this requires test equipment
with suitable accuracy and a special calibration program to run on a PC. It is
therefore recommended that the work is carried out by the manufacturer, or entrusted
to an approved service centre.
9.5. Changing the relay battery
Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the
auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and
disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure.
This battery will periodically need changing, although an alarm will be given as part
of the relays continuous self-monitoring in the event of a low battery condition.
If the battery-backed facilities are not required to be maintained during an
interruption of the auxiliary supply, the steps below can be followed to remove the
battery, but do not replace with a new battery.
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar
with the contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on
the equipment's rating label.
9.5.1. Instructions for replacing the battery.

Open the bottom access cover on the front of the relay.


Gently extract the battery from its socket.
screwdriver to prize the battery free.

If necessary, use a small insulated

Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease
and dust.
The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the
battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree
with those adjacent to the socket.
Note:

Only use a type AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of


3.6V and safety approvals such as UL (Underwriters Laboratory),
CSA (Canadian Standards Association) or VDE (Vereinigung
Deutscher Elektrizittswerke).

Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are
making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket.
Close the bottom access cover.

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 51/78

9.5.2. Post modification tests

To ensure that the replacement battery will maintain the time and status data if the
auxiliary supply fails, check cell [0806: DATE and TIME, Battery Status] reads
Healthy.
Additionally, if further confirmation that the replacement battery is installed correctly
is required, the commissioning test described in section 4.2.2, Date and Time, can
be performed.
9.5.3. Battery disposal

The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the
disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.
9.6. Cleaning
Before cleaning the equipment ensure that all ac and dc supplies, current
transformer and voltage transformer connections are isolated to prevent any chance
of an electric shock whilst cleaning.
The equipment may be cleaned using a lint-free cloth dampened with clean water.
The use of detergents, solvents or abrasive cleaners is not recommended as they may
damage the relays surface and leave a conductive residue.

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 52/78

MiCOM P740

10. COMMISSIONING TEST RECORD:


10.1. Peripheral Units: P742/P743

Date:

Engineer:

Station:

Circuit:
System Frequency:

Front Plate Information


Peripheral Unit Type

P74_

Model number
Serial number
Rated current In
Auxiliary voltage Vx
Test Equipment Used
This section should be completed to allow future identification of protective devices
that have been commissioned using equipment that is later found to be defective or
incompatible but may not be detected during the commissioning procedure.
Overcurrent test set

Model:
Serial No:

Optical power meter

Model:
Serial No:

Insulation tester

Model:
Serial No:

Setting software:

Type:
Version:

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 53/78

*Delete as
appropriate
Have all relevant safety instructions been
followed?
4

Product Checks

4.1

With the relay de-energised

4.1.1

Visual inspection

Yes/No*

Relay damaged?

Yes/No*

Rating information correct for installation?

Yes/No*

Case earth installed?

Yes/No*

4.1.2

Current transformer shorting contacts close?

Yes/No/Not checked*

4.1.3

Insulation resistance >100M at 500V dc

Yes/No/Not tested*

4.1.4

External Wiring

4.1.5

Wiring checked against diagram?

Yes/No*

Test block connections checked?

Yes/No/na*

Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply off)


Terminals 11 and 12 Contact closed?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Terminals 13 and 14 Contact open?

Yes/No*

4.1.6

Measured auxiliary supply

______V ac/dc*

4.2

With the relay energised

4.2.1

Watchdog Contacts (auxiliary supply on)

4.2.2

Terminals 11 and 12 Contact open?

Yes/No*

Terminals 13 and 14 Contact closed?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Date and time


Clock set to local time?

Yes/No*

Time maintained when auxiliary supply


removed?

Yes/No*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 54/78

MiCOM P740

4.2.3

Light emitting diodes

4.2.3.1

Alarm (yellow) LED working?

Yes/No*

Out of service (yellow) LED working?

Yes/No*

4.2.3.2

Trip (red) LED working?

Yes/No*

4.2.3.3

All 8 programmable LEDs working?

Yes/No*

4.2.4

Field supply voltage

4.2.5

For P742

For P743

Value measured between terminals 7 and 9

______V dc

Value measured between terminals 8 and 10

______V dc

Input opto-isolators
Opto input 2 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 3 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 4 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 5 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 6 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 7 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 8 working?

Yes/No*

Opto input 9 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 10 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 11 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 12 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 13 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 14 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 15 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 16 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 17 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 18 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 19 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 20 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 21 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 22 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 23 working?

Yes/No/na*

Opto input 24 working?

Yes/No/na*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740
4.2.6

Page 55/78
Output relays
Relay 1
Relay 2
Relay 3
Relay 4

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*

Contact resistance
Relay 5

Relay 8
Relay 9
Relay 10
Relay 11

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No*

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No*

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No/na*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No/na*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No/na*

Contact resistance

____/Not measured*

Working?

Yes/No*
(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 13

Yes/No*

Working?

Contac t resistance
Relay 12

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

For P742

(N/O)

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 7

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 6

(N/C)

Yes/No*
(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

Yes/No*
(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 56/78

MiCOM P740
Relay 14

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 15

Relay 21

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No*

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No*

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No*

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*
Yes/No*

(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

For P743

Yes/No*

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 20

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 19

(N/O)

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 18

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 17

(N/C)

Working?
Contact resistance

Relay 16

Yes/No*

Yes/No*
(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*

Working?
Contact resistance

Yes/No*
(N/C)

____/Not measured*

(N/O)

____/Not measured*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

4.2.9

Page 57/78

Current Inputs
Displayed Current

Primary/Secondary*

Phase CT Ratio

_______ /na*

Input CT

Applied value

Displayed value

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

Setting Checks

5.1

Application-specific function settings applied?

Yes/No*

Application-specific programmable scheme


logic settings applied?

Yes/No/na*

5.2.1.2

Current Differential lower slope pickup

_________A

5.2.1.3

Current Differential upper slope pickup

_________A

5.2.5

Protection function timing tested?

Yes/No*

Applied current

_________A

Expected operating time

_________s

Measured operating time

_________s

Application-specific function settings verified?

Yes/No/na*

Application-specific programmable scheme


logic tested?

Yes/No/na*

5.4

Signal strength received by P742/3


Channel 1

______dBm/na*

Signal strength transmitted by 742/3


Channel 1

______dBm/na*

Signal Strength within tolerance

Yes/No/na*

Optical fibres reconnected?


Channel RX and TX

Yes/No*

Alarms reset?

Yes/No*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 58/78
7

MiCOM P740
On-load Checks
Test wiring removed?

Yes/No/na*

Disturbed customer wiring re-checked?

Yes/No/na*

7.1

Confirm current transformer wiring

7.1.2

Current connections
CT wiring checked?

Yes/No/na*

CT polarities correct?

Yes/No*

Displayed current

Primary/Secondary*

Phase CT ratio

_______ /na*

Currents:

Applied value

Displayed value

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A

_______A/na*

_______A/na*

7.3

Differential current checked?

Final Checks

Yes/ No*

Test wiring removed?

Yes/No/na*

Disturbed customer wiring re-checked?

Yes/No/na*

Test mode disabled?

Yes/No*

Circuit breaker operations counter reset?

Yes/No/na*

Current counters reset?

Yes/No/na*

Event records reset?

Yes/No*

Fault records reset?

Yes/No*

Disturbance records reset?

Yes/No*

Alarms reset?

Yes/No*

LEDs reset?

Yes/No*

Secondary front cover replaced?

Yes/No/na*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 59/78

Commissioning Engineer

Date

Customer Witness

Date

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 60/78

MiCOM P740

11. SETTING RECORD


11.1. Central Unit: P741
Date:

Engineer:

Station:

Circuit:
System Frequency:

Front Plate Information


Central Unit type:

P741

Model Number
Serial Number
Rated Current In
Auxiliary Voltage Vx
*Delete as appropriate
Setting Groups Used
Group 1

Yes/No*

Group 2

Yes/No*

Group 3

Yes/No*

Group 4

Yes/No*

800

SYSTEM DATA

0001

Language

0004

Description

0005

Plant Reference

0006

Model Number

0008

Serial Number

0009

Frequency

000A

Comms Level

000B

Relay Address

0011

Software Ref.1

00D1

Password Control

00D2

Password Level 1

00D3

Password Level 2

English/Francais/Deutsch/Espanol*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

800
0601

Page 61/78

PU CONF & STATUS


PU in service

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000


32....................................................................
........................1

0602

PU Connected

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000


32....................................................................
........................1

0603

PU Topo valid

0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000 0000


32....................................................................
........................1

800

DATE AND TIME

0801

Date/Time

0806

Battery Status

Dead/Healthy*

0807

Battery Alarm

Disabled/Enabled*

800

CONFIGURATION

0902

Setting Group

Select via Menu/Select via Optos*

0903

Active Settings

Group 1/Group 2/Group 3/Group 4*

0907

Setting Group 1

Disabled/Enabled*

0908

Setting Group 2

Disabled/Enabled*

0909

Setting Group 3

Disabled/Enabled*

090A

Setting Group 4

Disabled/Enabled*

0925

Input Labels

Invisible/Visible*

0926

Output Labels

Invisible/Visible*

0929

Recorder Control

Invisible/Visible*

092A

Disturb Recorder

Invisible/Visible*

092B

Measuret Setup

Invisible/Visible*

092D

Commission Tests

Invisible/Visible*

092E

Setting Values

Primary/Secondary*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 62/78
0C00

MiCOM P740
DISTURB RECORDER

0C01

Duration

0C02

Trigger Position

0C03

Trigger Mode

0C04

Analog Channel 1

0C05

Analog Channel 2

0C06

Analog Channel 3

0C07

Analog Channel 4

0C08

Analog Channel 5

0C09

Analog Channel 6

0C0A

Analog Channel 7

0C0B

Analog Channel 8

0C0C

Digital Input 1

0C0E

Digital Input 2

0C10

Digital Input 3

0C12

Digital Input 4

0C14

Digital Input 5

0C16

Digital Input 6

0C18

Digital Input 7

0C1A

Digital Input 8

0C1C

Digital Input 9

0C1E

Digital Input 10

0C20

Digital Input 11

0C22

Digital Input 12

0C24

Digital Input 13

0C26

Digital Input 14

0C28

Digital Input 15

0C2A

Digital Input 16

0C2C

Digital Input 17

0C2E

Digital Input 18

0C30

Digital Input 19

0C32

Digital Input 20

0C34

Digital Input 21

0C36

Digital Input 22

0C38

Digital Input 23

0C3A

Digital Input 24

Single/Extended*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 63/78

0C3C

Digital Input 25

0C3E

Digital Input 26

0C40

Digital Input 27

0C42

Digital Input 28

0C44

Digital Input 29

0C46

Digital Input 30

0C48

Digital Input 31

0C4A

Digital Input 32

0D00

MEASURET SETUP

0D01

Default Display

3Ph+N Current/ Date and


Time/Description/Plant Reference/ Frequency/
Access Level*

0D02

Local Values

Primary/Secondary*

0D03

Remote Values

Primary/Secondary*

0D04

Ibp Base Cur Pri

0F00

COMMISSION TESTS

0F05

Monitor Bit 1

0F06

Monitor Bit 2

0F07

Monitor Bit 3

0F08

Monitor Bit 4

0F09

Monitor Bit 5

0F0A

Monitor Bit 6

0F0B

Monitor Bit 7

0F0C

Monitor Bit 8

0F0D

Test Mode

0F0E

Test Pattern

800

OPTOS SETUP

1101

Global Level

1101

Opto Input 1

1102

Opto Input 2

1103

Opto Input 3

1104

Opto Input 4

Disabled/Test Mode/Blocked*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 64/78

MiCOM P740

1105

Opto Input 5

1106

Opto Input 6

1107

Opto Input 7

1108

Opto Input 8

1109

Opto Input 9

110A

Opto Input 10

110B

Opto Input 11

110C

Opto Input 12

110D

Opto Input 13

110E

Opto Input 14

110F

Opto Input 15

1111

Opto Input 16

1112

Opto Input 17

1113

Opto Input 18

1114

Opto Input 19

1115

Opto Input 20

1116

Opto Input 21

1117

Opto Input 22

1118

Opto Input 23

1119

Opto Input 24

GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS


For Group 2,3 or 4 the first address figure must be respectively: 5 and 6, 7and 8 or 9
and A

800

DIFF BUSBAR PROT

Group 1 Settings
3002

Current Is

3003

Phase Slope k

3004

ID>2 Current

3005

ID>1 Current

3006

ID>1 Alarm Timer

3007

Diff. Earth Fault

3008

Ibias Ph> Cur.

Group 1
Settings

Enabled/
Disabled

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 65/78

3009

Earth Cur. IsN

300A

Earth Slope kN

300B

IDN>2 Current

300C

IDN>1 Current

300D

IDN>1 Alarm Tim

4A00

INPUT LABELS

Group 1 Settings
4A01

Opto Input 1

4A02

Opto Input 2

4A03

Opto Input 3

4A04

Opto Input 4

4A05

Opto Input 5

4A06

Opto Input 6

4A07

Opto Input 7

4A08

Opto Input 8

4A09

Opto Input 9

4A0A

Opto Input 10

4A0B

Opto Input 11

4A0C

Opto Input 12

4A0D

Opto Input 13

4A0E

Opto Input 14

4A0F

Opto Input 15

4A10

Opto Input 16

4A11

Opto Input 17

4A12

Opto Input 18

4A13

Opto Input 19

4A14

Opto Input 20

4A15

Opto Input 21

4A16

Opto Input 22

4A17

Opto Input 23

4A18

Opto Input 24

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 66/78

4B00

MiCOM P740

OUTPUT LABELS

Group 1 Settings
4B01

Relay 1

4B02

Relay 2

4B03

Relay 3

4B04

Relay 4

4B05

Relay 5

4B06

Relay 6

4B07

Relay 7

4B08

Relay 8

4B09

Relay 9

4B0A

Relay 10

4B0B

Relay 11

4B0C

Relay 12

4B0D

Relay 13

4B0E

Relay 14

4B0F

Relay 15

4B10

Relay 16

4B11

Relay 17

4B12

Relay 18

4B13

Relay 19

4B14

Relay 20

4B15

Relay 21

4B20

Virtual Relay 01

4B21

Virtual Relay 02

4B22

Virtual Relay 03

4B23

Virtual Relay 04

4B24

Virtual Relay 05

4B25

Virtual Relay 06

4B26

Virtual Relay 07

4B27

Virtual Relay 08

4B28

Virtual Relay 09

4B29

Virtual Relay 10

4B2A

Virtual Relay 11

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 67/78

Group 1 Settings
4B2B

Virtual Relay 12

4B2C

Virtual Relay 13

4B2D

Virtual Relay 14

4B2E

Virtual Relay 15

4B2F

Virtual Relay 16

Commissioning Engineer

Date

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Customer Witness

Date

Group 4
Settings

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 68/78

MiCOM P740

11.2. Peripheral Units: P742/P743


Date:

Engineer:

Station:

Circuit:
System Frequency:

Front Plate Information


Peripheral Unit type:

P742/P743 *

Model Number
Serial Number
Rated Current In
Auxiliary Voltage Vx
*Delete as appropriate
Setting Groups Used
Group 1

Yes/No*

Group 2

Yes/No*

Group 3

Yes/No*

Group 4

Yes/No*

800

SYSTEM DATA

0001

Language

0004

Description

0005

Plant Reference

0006

Model Number

0008

Serial Number

0009

Frequency

000A

Comms Level

000B

Relay Address

0011

Software Ref.1

00D1

Password Control

00D2

Password Level 1

00D3

Password Level 2

English/Francais/Deutsch/Espanol*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740
800

Page 69/78
CB CONTROL

0702

Trip Latched

0703

Reset Trip Latch

0704

CB Control By

0705

Man. Close Pulse Time

0706

Man. Trip Pulse Time

0707

Man. Close Delay

800

DATE AND TIME

0804

IRIG-B Sync

Disabled/Enabled*

0805

IRIG-B Status

Inactive/Active*

0806

Battery Status

Dead/Healthy*

0807

Battery Alarm

Disabled/Enabled*

0900

CONFIGURATION

0902

Setting Group

Select via Menu/Select via Optos*

0903

Active Settings

Group 1/Group 2/Group 3/Group 4*

0907

Setting Group 1

Disabled/Enabled*

0908

Setting Group 2

Disabled/Enabled*

0909

Setting Group 3

Disabled/Enabled*

090A

Setting Group 4

Disabled/Enabled*

0910

BusBar Prot.

Disabled/Enabled*

0911

Optos Setup

0912

Backup Phase O/C

Disabled/Enabled*

0913

Backup Earth O/C

Disabled/Enabled*

0914

CB Fail

Disabled/Enabled*

0925

Input Labels

Invisible/Visible*

0926

Output Labels

Invisible/Visible*

0928

CT & VT Ratios

Invisible/Visible*

0929

Recorder Control

Invisible/Visible*

092A

Disturb Recorder

Invisible/Visible*

092B

Measuret Setup

Invisible/Visible*

092D

Commission Tests

Invisible/Visible*

092E

Setting Values

Primary/Secondary*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 70/78

MiCOM P740

0A00

CT AND VT RATIOS

0A07

Phase CT Primary

0A08

Phase CT Secondary

0A20

Transfo Class

0A24

Standard Input

BS/IEC

0A25

Knee Voltage Vk

BS

0A26

Rated Burden VA

IEC

0A28

KSCC

IEC

0A29

RCT Sec'y

0A2B

Eff. Burden

0C00

DISTURB RECORDER

0C01

Duration

0C02

Trigger Position

0C03

Trigger Mode

0C04

Analog Channel 1

0C05

Analog Channel 2

0C06

Analog Channel 3

0C07

Analog Channel 4

0C0C

Digital Input 1

0C0E

Digital Input 2

0C10

Digital Input 3

0C12

Digital Input 4

0C14

Digital Input 5

0C16

Digital Input 6

0C18

Digital Input 7

0C1A

Digital Input 8

0C1C

Digital Input 9

0C1E

Digital Input 10

0C20

Digital Input 11

0C22

Digital Input 12

0C24

Digital Input 13

0C26

Digital Input 14

0C28

Digital Input 15

Single/Extended*

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 71/78

0C2A

Digital Input 16

0C2C

Digital Input 17

0C2E

Digital Input 18

0C30

Digital Input 19

0C32

Digital Input 20

0C34

Digital Input 21

0C36

Digital Input 22

0C38

Digital Input 23

0C3A

Digital Input 24

0C3C

Digital Input 25

0C3E

Digital Input 26

0C40

Digital Input 27

0C42

Digital Input 28

0C44

Digital Input 29

0C46

Digital Input 30

0C48

Digital Input 31

0C4A

Digital Input 32

0D00

MEASURET SETUP

0D01

Default Display

3Ph+N Current/ Date and


Time/Description/Plant Reference/ Frequency/
Access Level*

0D02

Local Values

Primary/Secondary*

0D03

Remote Values

Primary/Secondary*

0F00

COMMISSION TESTS

0F05

Monitor Bit 1

0F06

Monitor Bit 2

0F07

Monitor Bit 3

0F08

Monitor Bit 4

0F09

Monitor Bit 5

0F0A

Monitor Bit 6

0F0B

Monitor Bit 7

0F0C

Monitor Bit 8

0F0D

Test Mode

0F0E

Test Pattern

Disabled/Test Mode/Blocked*

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 72/78

1100

MiCOM P740

OPTOS SETUP

1101

Global Level

1101

Opto Input 1

1102

Opto Input 2

1103

Opto Input 3

1104

Opto Input 4

1105

Opto Input 5

1106

Opto Input 6

1107

Opto Input 7

1108

Opto Input 8

1109

Opto Input 9

110A

Opto Input 10

110B

Opto Input 11

110C

Opto Input 12

110D

Opto Input 13

110E

Opto Input 14

110F

Opto Input 15

1111

Opto Input 16

1112

Opto Input 17

1113

Opto Input 18

1114

Opto Input 19

1115

Opto Input 20

1116

Opto Input 21

1117

Opto Input 22

1118

Opto Input 23

1119

Opto Input 24

GROUP 1 PROTECTION SETTINGS


For Group 2,3 or 4 the first address figure must be respectively: 5 and 6, 7and 8 or 9
and A

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

3000

Page 73/78

BB TRIP CONFIRM

Group 1 Settings
3001

I>BB Current set

3002

IN<BB Current

3500

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

BACKUP O/C PHASE

Group 1 Settings
3501

>1 Function

3502

>1 Current Set

3503

>1 Time Delay

3504

>1 TMS

3505

>1 Time Dial

3506

>1 Reset Char

3507

>1 tRESET

3508

>2 Function

3509

>2 Current Set

350A

>2 Time Delay

3800

Group 1
Settings

Group 1
Settings

O/C EARTH FAULT

Group 1 Settings
3801

N>1 Function

3802

N>1 Current Set

3803

N>1 Time Delay

3804

N>1 TMS

3805

N>1 Time Dial

3806

N>1 Reset Char

3807

N>1 tRESET

3808

N>2 Function

3809

N>2 Current Set

380A

N>2 Time Delay

Group 1
Settings

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 74/78

4500

MiCOM P740

CB FAIL & I<

Group 1 Settings
4501

Control By

4502

< Current Set

4503

I> Status

4504

I> Current Set

4505

IN> Current Set

4507

CB Fail Timer 1

4508

CB Fail Timer 2

450A

CB Fail Timer 3

450B

CB Fail Timer 4

4600

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

SUPERVISION

Group 1 Settings
460E

Error Factor Kce

460F

Opto Input 2

4A00

Group 1
Settings

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

INPUT LABELS

Group 1 Settings
4A01

Opto Input 1

4A02

Opto Input 2

4A03

Opto Input 3

4A04

Opto Input 4

4A05

Opto Input 5

4A06

Opto Input 6

4A07

Opto Input 7

4A08

Opto Input 8

4A09

Opto Input 9

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 75/78

Group 1 Settings
4A0A

Opto Input 10

4A0B

Opto Input 11

4A0C

Opto Input 12

4A0D

Opto Input 13

4A0E

Opto Input 14

4A0F

Opto Input 15

4A10

Opto Input 16

4A11

Opto Input 17

4A12

Opto Input 18

4A13

Opto Input 19

4A14

Opto Input 20

4A15

Opto Input 21

4A16

Opto Input 22

4A17

Opto Input 23

4A18

Opto Input 24

4B00

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

OUTPUT LABELS

Group 1 Settings
4B01

Relay 1

4B02

Relay 2

4B03

Relay 3

4B04

Relay 4

4B05

Relay 5

4B06

Relay 6

4B07

Relay 7

4B08

Relay 8

4B09

Relay 9

4B0A

Relay 10

4B0B

Relay 11

4B0C

Relay 12

4B0D

Relay 13

4B0E

Relay 14

4B0F

Relay 15

P740/EN CM/D11

Commissioning/Maintenance

Page 76/78

MiCOM P740

Group 1 Settings
4B10

Relay 16

4B11

Relay 17

4B12

Relay 18

4B13

Relay 19

4B14

Relay 20

4B15

Relay 21

4B20

Virtual Relay 01

4B21

Virtual Relay 02

4B22

Virtual Relay 03

4B23

Virtual Relay 04

4B24

Virtual Relay 05

4B25

Virtual Relay 06

4B26

Virtual Relay 07

4B27

Virtual Relay 08

4B28

Virtual Relay 09

4B29

Virtual Relay 10

4B2A

Virtual Relay 11

4B2B

Virtual Relay 12

4B2C

Virtual Relay 13

4B2D

Virtual Relay 14

4B2E

Virtual Relay 15

4B2F

Virtual Relay 16

Group 1
Settings

Group 2
Settings

Group 3
Settings

Group 4
Settings

Commissioning/Maintenance

P740/EN CM/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 77/78

Commissioning Engineer

Date

Customer Witness

Date

P740/EN CM/D11
Page 78/78

Commissioning/Maintenance
MiCOM P740

Problem Analysis

P740/EN PR/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/14

PROBLEM ANALYSIS

P740/EN PR/D11
Page 2/14

Problem Analysis
MiCOM P740

Problem Analysis

P740/EN PR/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 3/14

CONTENT

1.

INTRODUCTION

2.

INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION

3.

POWER UP ERRORS

4.

ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP

5.

OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP

6.

ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION

7.

MIS-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING

10

8.

ERROR CODES

12

P740/EN PR/D11

Problem Analysis

Page 4/14

1.

MiCOM P740

INTRODUCTION
Before carrying out any work on the equipment, the user should be familiar
with the contents of the safety and technical data sections and the ratings on
the equipments rating label.
The purpose of this chapter of the service manual is to allow an error condition on
the relay to be identified so that appropriate corrective action can be taken.
Should the relay have developed a fault, it should be possible in most cases to
identify which relay module requires attention. The Commissioning and
Maintenance chapter (P740/EN CM), advises on the recommended method of repair
where faulty modules need replacing. It is not possible to perform an on-site repair
to a faulted module.
In cases where a faulty relay/module is being returned to the manufacturer or one of
their approved service centres, completed copy of the Repair Form located at the end
of this manual should be included.

2.

INITIAL PROBLEM IDENTIFICATION


Consult the table below to find the description that best matches the problem
experienced, then consult the section referenced to perform a more detailed analysis
of the problem.
Symptom

Refer to

Relay fails to power up

Section 3

Relay powers up but indicates error and halts during power- Section 4
up sequence
Relay powers up but Out of Service LED is illuminated

Section 5

Relay reboots during normal operation

Section 6

Error during normal operation

Section 6

Misoperation of the relay during testing

Section 7

Table 1:

Problem Identification

Problem Analysis

P740/EN PR/D11

MiCOM P740

3.

Page 5/14

POWER UP ERRORS
If the relay does not appear to power up then the following procedure can be used to
determine whether the fault is in the external wiring, auxiliary fuse, power supply
module of the relay or the relay front panel.
Test

Check

Action

Measure auxiliary voltage on


terminals 1 and 2, verify voltage
level and polarity against the
rating label on front panel, under
the top cover.

If auxiliary voltage is present and


correct, then proceed to test 2.
Otherwise the wiring/fuses in auxiliary
supply should be checked.

Terminal 1 is dc, 2 is +dc


2

Do LEDs/ and LCD backlight


illuminate on power up, also check
the N/O watchdog contact for
closing.

If they illuminate or the contact closes


and no error code is displayed then
error is probably in the main
processor board (front panel)
If they do not illuminate and the
contact does not close then proceed
to test 3.

Table 2:

Check Field voltage output


(nominally 48V DC)

Failure of Relay to power up

If field voltage is not present then the


fault is probably in the relay power
supply module. Consult the
Commissioning & Maintenance
chapter (P740/EN CM) for a
description of how to remove this
module. The part number of this
module can be checked to verify that
the rating of the module conforms to
the auxiliary rating printed on the
relay front panel.

P740/EN PR/D11

Problem Analysis

Page 6/14

4.

MiCOM P740

ERROR MESSAGE/CODE ON POWER-UP


During the power-up sequence of the relay self-testing is performed as indicated by
the messages displayed on the LCD. If an error is detected by the relay during these
self-tests then an error message will be displayed and the power-up sequence will be
halted. If the error occurs when the relay application software is executing then a
maintenance record will be created and the relay will reboot.
Test

Check

Action

Is an error message or code


permanently displayed during
power up.

If relay locks up and displays an error code


permanently then proceed to test 2. If the
relay prompts for input by the user proceed
to test 4. If the relay re- boots
automatically then proceed to test 5.

Record displayed error, then


remove and re-apply relay
auxiliary supply.

Record whether the same error code is


displayed when the relay is rebooted.
If no error code is displayed then contact
the local service centre stating the error
code and relay information.
If the same code is displayed proceed to
test 3.

Error code Identification


location.

Refer to the Commissioning & Maintenance


chapter (P740/EN CMxxx) for module

Following text messages (in


English) will be displayed if a
fundamental problem is
detected preventing the
system from booting:

These messages indicate that a problem


has been detected on the main processor
board of the relay (located in the front
panel), or in the Current Differential
processor board (located within the case).

Bus Fail address lines


SRAM Fail - data lines
FLASH Fail format error
FLASH Fail checksum
Code Verify Fail
Refer to section 8 for a list of error codes.
Other error codes relate to
errors detected in hardware or
software:
4

Relay displays message for


corrupt settings and prompts
for restoration of defaults to
the affected settings.

The power up tests have detected corrupted


relay settings. It is possible to restore
defaults to allow the power- up to be
completed. It will then be necessary to reapply the application- specific settings.

Problem Analysis

P740/EN PR/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 7/14

Test

Check

Action

Relay resets on completion of


power up record error code
displayed.

Error 0x0E080000, programmable scheme


logic error due to excessive execution time.
Restore default settings by performing a
power up with ! and " keys depressed,
confirm restoration of defaults at prompt
using # key. If relay powers up
successfully, check programmable logic for
feedback paths.
Refer to section 8 for a list of error codes.

Table 3:

Power-up self-test error

P740/EN PR/D11

Problem Analysis

Page 8/14

5.

MiCOM P740

OUT OF SERVICE LED ILLUMINATED ON POWER UP


Test

Check

Action

If the setting is Enabled then disable the test


Using the relay menu
mode and, verify that the Out of Service
confirm whether the
Commission Test/ Test Mode LED is extinguished.
setting is Enabled.
Otherwise proceed to test 2.

Select and view the last


maintenance record from
the menu (in the View
Records).

Check for H/W Verify Fail (this indicates a


discrepancy between the relay model
number and the hardware). Examine the
Maint Data,(this indicates the causes of
the failure using bit fields):
Bit Meaning

Table 4:

Out-of-service condition

The application type field in the


model number does not match the
software ID

The application field in the model


number does not match the
software ID

The variant 1 field in the model


number does not match the
software ID

The variant 2 field in the model


number does not match the
software ID

The protocol field in the model


number does not match the
software ID

The language field in the model


number does not match the
software ID

Problem Analysis
MiCOM P740

6.

P740/EN PR/D11
Page 9/14

ERROR CODE DURING OPERATION


The relay performs continuous self-checking. If an error is detected, then an error
message will be displayed, a maintenance record will be logged and the relay will
reset (after a 1.6 second delay). A permanent problem (for example due to a
hardware fault) will generally be detected on the power up sequence, following which
the relay will display an error code and halt. If the problem was transient in nature
then the relay should re-boot correctly and continue in operation. The nature of the
detected fault can be determined by examination of the maintenance record logged.
There are also two cases where a maintenance record will be logged due to a
detected error where the relay will not reset. These are detection of a failure of either
the field voltage or the lithium battery. In these cases the failure is indicated by an
alarm message. However, the relay will continue to operate.
If the field voltage is detected to have failed (the voltage level has dropped below
threshold), then a scheme logic signal is also set. This allows the scheme logic to be
adapted in the case of this failure (for example if a blocking scheme is being used).
In the case of a battery failure it is possible to prevent the relay from issuing an alarm
using the setting under the Date and Time section of the menu. This setting "Battery
Alarm" can be set to 'Disabled' to allow the relay to be used without a battery, without
an alarm message being displayed.

P740/EN PR/D11

Problem Analysis

Page 10/14

MiCOM P740

7.

MIS-OPERATION OF THE RELAY DURING TESTING

7.1

Failure of output contacts


An apparent failure of the relay output contacts may be caused by the relay
configuration and the following tests should be performed to identify the real cause of
the failure. Note that the relay self-tests verify that the coil of the contact has been
energised. An error will be displayed if there is a fault in the output relay board.
Test

Check

Action

Is the Out of Service LED


illuminated.

Illumination of this LED may indicate that the


relay is in test mode or that the protection
has been disabled due to a hardware verify
error (see Table 4)

Examine the Contact status


in the Commissioning
section of the menu.

If the relevant bits of the contact status are


operated then proceed to test 4.

Verify by examination of the


fault record, or by using the
test port whether the
protection element is
operating correctly.

If the protection element does not operate,


verify whether the test is being correctly
applied.

Using the
Commissioning/Test mode
function, apply a test pattern
to the relevant relay output
contacts and verify whether
they operate (note the correct
external connection diagram
should be consulted).

If the output relay does operate then the


problem must be in the external wiring to the
relay. If the output relay does not operate
this could indicate a failure of the output
relay contacts (note that the self-tests verify
that the relay coil is being energised).
Ensure that the closed resistance is not too
high for the continuity tester to detect.

A continuity tester can be


used at the rear of the relay
for this purpose.
Table 5:

Failure of output contacts

If not, proceed to test 3.

If the protection element does operate, then


it will be necessary to check the
programmable logic to ensure that the
mapping of the protection element to the
contacts is correct. If the mapping of the
protection has been correctly configured,
then the contact may be at fault. This can be
verified see test 4.

Problem Analysis
MiCOM P740
7.2

P740/EN PR/D11
Page 11/14

Failure of opto-isolated inputs


The opto-isolated inputs are mapped onto the relay internal signals using the
programmable scheme logic. If an input does not appear to be recognised by the
relay scheme logic the Commission Tests/Opto Status menu option can be used to
verify whether the problem is in the opto-isolated input itself or the mapping of its
signal to the scheme logic functions. If the opto-isolated input does appear to be
read correctly then it will be necessary to examine its mapping within the
programmable logic.
If the opto-isolated input state is not being correctly read by the relay the applied
signal should be tested. Verify the connections to the opto-isolated input using the
correct wiring diagram. Next, using a voltmeter verify that >80% of the programmed
nominal battery voltage threshold is present on the terminals of the opto-isolated
input in the energised state. If the signal is being correctly applied to the relay then
the failure may be on the input card itself. Depending on which opto-isolated input
has failed this may require replacement of either the complete analogue input
module (the board within this module cannot be individually replaced without recalibration of the relay) or a separate opto board.

7.3

Incorrect analogue signals (P742 and P743)


If it is suspected that the analogue quantities being measured by the relay are not
correct then the measurement function of the relay can be used to verify the nature of
the problem. The measured values displayed by the relay should be compared with
the actual magnitudes at the relay terminals. Verify that the correct terminals are
being used (in particular the dual rated CT inputs) and that the CT ratios set on the
relay are correct.

P740/EN PR/D11

Problem Analysis

Page 12/14

8.

MiCOM P740

ERROR CODES
Error codes (as reported by the relay via the front panel or in the Maintenance
Records) can offer a considerable amount of information about the source of the
error.
The Hex Code is reported on the front user interface of the relay immediately prior to
a reboot sequence. If this code could not be observed, use the Maintenance Records
section of the View Records column to display the corresponding Decimal Code.
Hex Code

Decimal Code

Meaning

0x0C140001

202637313

The serial driver failed to initialise properly.


Check the serial port hardware on the power
supply board and the main processor board.

0x0C140002

202637314

The LCD driver failed to initialise properly. Check


the LCD on the main processor board.

0x0C140003

202637315

The Flash memory driver failed to initialise


properly. Check the Flash memory on the main
processor board.

0x0C140004

202637316

The date and time driver failed to initialise


properly. Check the real-time clock and batterybacked SRAM on the main processor board.

0x0C140008

202637320

The database failed to initialise properly. Check


the EEPROM on the main processor board.

0x0C140009

202637321

The database took too long to commit a change.


Check the EEPROM on the main processor
board.

0x0C14000A

202637322

The IRIG-B driver failed to initialise properly.


Check the IRIG-B interface hardware on the IRIGB board.

0x0C160010

202768400

The continuous self-checks have found an error


in the RAM bus. Check the RAM on the main
processor board.

0x0C160011

202768401

The continuous self-checks have found an error


in the RAM block. Check the RAM on the main
processor board.

0x0C160012

202768402

The continuous self-checks have found an error


in the Flash EPROM checksum. Check the Flash
EPROM on the main processor board, and then
try downloading a new program.

0x0C160013

202768403

The continuous self-checks have found an error


in the code comparison. Check the Flash EPROM
on the main processor board, and then try
downloading a new program.

0x0C160014

202768404

The continuous self-checks have found an error


in the battery backed SRAM. Check the battery,
then the RAM on the main processor board.

(P741 only)

Problem Analysis

P740/EN PR/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 13/14

0x0C160015

202768405

The continuous self-checks have found an error


in the EEPROM. Check the EEPROM on the main
processor board.

0x0C1600A0

202768544

The continuous self-checks have found an error


on the acquisition board. Check the input board.

0x0C170016

202833942

Secondary initialisation tests detected a fast


watchdog failure. Check the on the main
processor board.

0x0C170017

202833943

Secondary initialisation tests detected a battery


backed SRAM failure. Check the battery backed
SRAM on the main processor board.

0x0C170018

202833944

Secondary initialisation tests detected a bus reset


test failure. Check the main processor board.

0x0C170019

202833945

Secondary initialisation tests detected a slow


watchdog failure.

0x0E020000

235012096

Excessive number of gates in PSL. Restore


defaults and download new PSL.

0x0E080000

235405312

PSL excessive execution time. Restore defaults


and download new PSL.

Table 6:

Error Codes

Other error codes relate to problems within the main processor board software. It
will be necessary to contact AREVA T&D with details of the problem for a full analysis.

P740/EN PR/D11
Page 14/14

Problem Analysis
MiCOM P740

Connection Diagrams

P740/EN CO/D11

MiCOM P740

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

Version dated : 08/03

P740/EN CO/D11

Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

Connection Diagrams

P740/EN CO/D11

MiCOM P740

Page 1/12

CONTENTS

1.

MiCOM P741 - CENTRAL UNIT

2.

MiCOM P742 PERIPHERAL UNIT

3.

MiCOM P743 PERIPHERAL UNIT

P740/EN CO/D11
Page 2/12

Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

62.0

FIGURE 1: MiCOM P741 (80TE) Hardware description

=
=
=

HEALTHY

ENTER

READ

CLEAR

OUT OF SERVICE

ALARM

TRIP

MiCOM

406.9

408.9

413.2

FRONT VIEW

155.4

116.55

129.5

142.45

30.0

177.0

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

Connections for
communication boards

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:ST CONNECTOR / MULTI-MODE FIBRE

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

TX

TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 7 BRASS CHEESE HEAD SCREWS WITH

SIDE VIEW

240.0 INCL. WIRING

157.5 MAX.

SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)

TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST

17

Connections for
I/O boards

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL

18

P3713ENa

LOCK WASHERS PROVIDED.

MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.

FLUSH MOUNTING
PANEL CUT-OUT
DETAIL.

4.5

168.0

12 OFF HOLES Dia. 3.4

1.

159.0

74.9

Connection Diagrams
P740/EN CO/D11

MiCOM P740
Page 3/12

MiCOM P741 - CENTRAL UNIT

CH4

RX

CH4

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

RX

CH3

CH2

CH1

TX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

1 TO 8 COMMUNICATION BOARDS

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

TX

FIGURE 2: MiCOM P741 (80TE) Rear View


LOGICAL INPUT CONTACT BOARD

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

TX

RX

LOGICAL OUTPUT CONTACT BOARD

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

17

15

13

11

18

16

14

12

10

18

16

14

12

10

17

15

13

11

18

16

14

12

10

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

P3712ENa

RX

TX

IRIG-B

Page 4/12

OPTIONAL IRIG-B BOARD

CO-PROCESSOR BOARD

POWER SUPPLY MODULE

17

15

13

11

P740/EN CO/D11
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

FIGURE 3: MiCOM P741 (80TE) Wiring Description

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

Revision:

Name:

Chkd:

Date: 7/02/2003

Date:

* PU: Peripheral Unit

RX1

K18

Lattes

T&D Protection & Controle

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position E
17 to 20 PU*

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position D
13 to 16 PU*

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position C
9 to 12 PU*

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position B
5 to 8 PU*

Drg
No:

Title:

L1

L10

L9

L8

L7

L2

SK1

SK2

10P74101

BUSBAR PROTECTION
CENTRAL UNIT P741

CASE
EARTH

48V DC FIELD
VOLTAGE OUT

Vx

7
8

PAPER
RTS
9

CTS

RX
0V

1
2

14

19,18,22,25

11,12,15,13,
20,21,23,24

2-9

17

TX

NOT
CONNECTED

0V

TO-T7

DO-D7

AC OR DC
AUX SUPPLY

SERIAL
PORT

TEST/
DOWNLOAD

DOWNLOAD
COMMAND

16

10

DATA
ACKNOWLEDGE
EXTERNAL
RESET

DATA READY

L16
SCN

L18

1
2

Sht:

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

RELAY 8

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

TRIP C

TRIP B

TRIP A

WATCHDOG
CONTACT

WATCHDOG
CONTACT

Next
Sht:

J18

J17

J16

J15

J14

J13

J12

J11

J10

J9

J8

J7

J6

J5

J4

J3

J2

J1

L14

L13

L12

L11

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position H
29 to 32 PU*

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position G
25 to 28 PU*

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position F
21 to 24 PU*

MiCOM P740

DO NOT SCALE

CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

TX1

K17

K16

TX4
RX4

K15

RX3

K13
K14

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

RX4

TX4

RX3

TX3

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

K12

K11

K10

K9

K8

K7

K6

K5

K4

K3

K2

9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET

50 OHM KNC CONNECTOR

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.K. TYPE)

Issue:

(K)

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF
Position A
1 to 4 PU*

COMMON
CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

K1

MiCOM P741 (PART)

L17

MiCOM P741 (PART)

Connection Diagrams
P740/EN CO/D11
Page 5/12

10.35

FIGURE 4: MiCOM P742 (40TE) Hardware Description

CLEAR

ENTER

READ

206.0

177.0

4.5

168.0

30.0

TX
RX

16

TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST

TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW.

17

MEDIUM DUTY

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS

24

18

HEAVY DUTY

19

MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:ST CONNECTOR / MULTI-MODE FIBRE

CH2

RX

SIDE VIEW

240.0 INCL. WIRING

157.5 MAX.

SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)

FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL


CUT-OUT DETAIL

CH1

TX

P3714ENa

18

Page 6/12

=
=
=

HEALTHY

OUT OF SERVICE

ALARM

TRIP

MiCOM

FRONT VIEW

200.0

181.3
202.0

155.4

3.4

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL


ANALOG & I/O BOARDS

2.

159.0

23.3

8 OFF HOLES

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL


COPROCESSOR BOARD

P740/EN CO/D11
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

MiCOM P742 PERIPHERAL UNIT

16 LOGICAL INPUTS

17

15

13

11

18

16

14

12

10

17

14

11

12

18

15

24

23

22

21

20

19

FIGURE 5: MiCOM P742 (40TE) Rear View


17

15

13

11

17

15

13

11

18

16

14

12

10

17

15

13

11

POWER SUPPLY

8 LOGICAL OUTPUTS

18

16

14

12

10

COPROCESSOR BOARD
(Connexion to CU via optical fibre)

ANALOG INPUT MODULE

16

13

10

18

16

14

12

10

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

P3710ENa

Connection Diagrams
P740/EN CO/D11

MiCOM P740
Page 7/12

FIGURE 6: MiCOM P742 (40TE) Wiring Description

NOTE 2.

S1

IN

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

P1

IC

IB

IA

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

C1

B12

B11

B10

B9

B8

B7

B6

B5

B4

B3

B2

B1

C
B
PHASE ROTATION

Name:

Chkd:

Date: 7/02/2003

Date:

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

DO NOT SCALE

A18

A17

A16

A15

A14

A13

A12

A11

A10

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

C18

C17

C16

C15

C14

C13

C12

C11

COMMON
CONNECTION

OPTO 16

OPTO 15

OPTO 14

OPTO 13

OPTO 12

OPTO 11

OPTO 10

OPTO 9

COMMON
CONNECTION

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

Lattes

T&D Protection & Controle

4. OPTO INPUTS 1 & 2 MUST BE USED FOR SETTING GROUP CHANGES


IF THIS OPTION IS SELECTED IN THE RELAY MENU.

ANSI31_7
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.
3. THIS RELAY SHOULD BE ASSIGNED TO ANY TRIP TO ENSURE CORRECT
OPERATION OF THE PROTECTIVE RELAY.

MiCOM P742 (PART)

CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm

9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET

50 OHM BNC CONNECTOR

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

S2

Revision:

P2

Drg
No:

Title:

SERIAL
PORT

TX1
RX1

SK1

SK2

POWER SUPPLY VERSION 24-48V (NOMINAL) D.C. ONLY

1
2

14

19,18,22,25

11,12,15,13,
20,21,23,24

2-9

17

16

10

10P74201

BUSBAR POTECTION
PERIPHERAL UNIT P742

RX2

TX2

PAPER
RTS

CTS

0V

RX

TX

NOT
CONNECTED

0V

TO-T7

DO-D7

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF

TEST/
DOWNLOAD

DOWNLOAD
COMMAND

EXTERNAL
RESET

DATA
ACKNOWLEDGE

DATA READY

E18

+
E16
SCN

E17

MiCOM P742 (PART)

AC OR DC
AUX SUPPLY

1
2

CASE
EARTH

48V DC FIELD
VOLTAGE OUT

Sht:

RELAY 8

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

TRIP C

TRIP B

TRIP A

WATCHDOG
CONTACT

WATCHDOG
CONTACT

Next
Sht:

E10

E9

E8

E7

E2

E1

D18

D17

D16

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

D4

D3

D2

D1

E14

E13

E12

E11

Vx

Page 8/12

Issue:

(b)

(a)

NOTES 1.

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

P740/EN CO/D11
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

10.3

FIGURE 7: MiCOM P743 (60TE) Hardware Description

MiCOM

=
=
=

HEALTHY

ENTER

READ

CLEAR

OUT OF SERVICE

ALARM

TRIP

303.5

305.5

309.6

129.5

142.45

FRONT VIEW

155.4

116.55

177.0

4.5

168.0

30.0

TX

RX

TX

RX

16

TERMINAL SCREWS : M4 x 6 STEEL COMBINATION PAN HEAD MACHINE SCREW.


TYPE OF FIBRE OPTIC CONNECTOR : ST

SIDE VIEW

240.0 INCL. WIRING

157.5 MAX.

17

MEDIUM DUTY

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:2 x M4 RING TERMINALS

24

18

HEAVY DUTY

19

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL


ANALOG & I/O BOARDS

MOUNTING SCREWS : M4 x 12 SEM UNIT STEEL THREAD FORMING SCREW.

EACH TERMINATION ACCEPTS:ST CONNECTOR / MULTI-MODE FIBRE

CH2

CH1

SECONDARY COVER (WHEN FITTED)

FLUSH MOUNTING PANEL


CUT-OUT DETAIL

3.4

P3715ENa

18

3.

159.0

23.25

12 OFF HOLES

TERMINAL BLOCK DETAIL


COPROCESSOR BOARD

Connection Diagrams
P740/EN CO/D11

MiCOM P740
Page 9/12

MiCOM P743 PERIPHERAL UNIT

20

21

22

23

24

12

15

18

11

14

17

10

13

16

17

15

13

11

FIGURE 8: MiCOM P743 (60TE) Rear View


17

15

13

11

18

16

14

12

10

17

15

13

11

24 LOGICAL INPUTS

18

16

14

12

10

18

16

14

12

10

17

15

13

11

17

15

13

11

18

16

14

12

10

17

15

13

11

21 LOGICAL OUTPUTS

18

16

14

12

10

17

15

13

11

CH2

CH1

RX

TX

RX

TX

COPROCESSOR BOARD
(connexion to CU via optic fibre)

18

16

14

12

10

POWER SUPPLY

18

16

14

12

10

P3711ENa

Page 10/12

ANALOG INPUT

19

P740/EN CO/D11
Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

FIGURE 9: MiCOM P743 (60TE) Wiring Description

OPTO 8

OPTO 7

OPTO 6

OPTO 5

OPTO 4

OPTO 3

OPTO 2

OPTO 1

COMMON
CONNECTION

NOTE 2.

S1

IN

IC

IB

IA

Revision:

Name:

Chkd:

Date: 7/02/2003

Date:

C1

D17
D18

B18

CAD DATA 1:1 DIMENSIONS: mm

DO NOT SCALE

COMMON
CONNECTION

OPTO 24

OPTO 23

OPTO 22

OPTO 21

OPTO 20

OPTO 19

OPTO 18

OPTO 17

COMMON
CONNECTION

OPTO 16

OPTO 15

OPTO 14

OPTO 13

OPTO 12

OPTO 11

OPTO 10

OPTO 9

Lattes

T&G Protection & Controle

ANSI31_7
2. C.T. CONNECTIONS ARE SHOWN 1A CONNECTED AND ARE TYPICAL ONLY.

D16

B17

D15

D14

D13

D12

D11

D10

D9

D8

D7

D6

D5

B16

B15

B14

B13

B12

B11

B10

B9

B8

B7

B6

D4

D3

D1

C18

C17

C16

C15

C14

C13

C12

C11

C10

C9

C8

C7

C6

C5

C4

C3

C2

D2

MiCOM P743 (PART)

B5

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

1A

5A

B4

B3

B2

B1

A12

A11

A10

A9

A8

A7

A6

A5

A4

A3

A2

A1

C
B
PHASE ROTATION

9-WAY & 25-WAY FEMALE D-TYPE SOCKET

50 OHM BNC CONNECTOR

PIN TERMINAL (P.C.B. TYPE)

C.T. SHORTING LINKS

S2

P1

Drg
No:

Title:

SERIAL
PORT

Vx

H10

H9

H8

H7

H2

H1

SK1

SK2

10P74301

BUSBAR POTECTION
PERIPHERAL UNIT P743

CASE
EARTH

48V DC FIELD
VOLTAGE OUT

AC OR DC
AUX SUPPLY

RX2

TX2

RX1

TX1

PAPER
RTS

1
2

14

19,18,22,25

11,12,15,13,
20,21,23,24

2-9

17

16

10

H16
SCN

H18

H17

CTS

0V

RX

TX

NOT
CONNECTED

0V

TO-T7

DO-D7

FIBRE OPTIC
COMMUNICATION
CURR DIFF

TEST/
DOWNLOAD

DOWNLOAD
COMMAND

EXTERNAL
RESET

DATA
ACKNOWLEDGE

DATA READY

MiCOM P743 (PART)

1
2

Sht:

RELAY 21

RELAY 20

RELAY 19

RELAY 18

RELAY 17

RELAY 16

RELAY 15

RELAY 14

RELAY 13

RELAY 12

RELAY 11

RELAY 10

RELAY 9

RELAY 8

RELAY 7

RELAY 6

RELAY 5

RELAY 4

TRIP C

TRIP B

TRIP A

WATCHDOG
CONTACT

WATCHDOG
CONTACT

Next
Sht:

E18

E17

E16

E15

E14

E13

E10

E9

E8

E7

E6

E5

E4

E3

E2

E1

F18

F17

F16

F15

F14

F13

F10

F9

F8

F7

F6

F5

F4

F3

F2

F1

G18

G17

G16

G15

G14

G13

G10

G9

G8

G7

G6

G5

G4

G3

G2

G1

H14

H13

H12

H11

MiCOM P740

Issue:

(b)

NOTES 1.
(a)

P2

DIRECTION OF FORWARD CURRENT FLOW

Connection Diagrams
P740/EN CO/D11
Page 11/12

P740/EN CO/D11
Page 12/12

Connection Diagrams
MiCOM P740

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

RELAY MENU DATABASE

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database


MiCOM P740

Menu Database (COURIER)

Digital Data Bus (DDB)

Default Programmable Scheme Logic (PSL)

This version of P740/EN GC/C11 is specific to the following models


Model number
P741-------01-B
P742-------01-B
P743-------01-B

For other models / software versions, please contact AREVA T&D for the relevant
information.

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

Relay Menu Database


This Chapter is split into several sections, these are as follows:
Menu Database for Courier, User Interface
Digital Data Bus (Internal Digital Signal)
Default Programmable Logic

1.

MENU DATABASE
This database defines the structure of the relay menu for the Courier interface and
the front panel user interface. This includes all the relay settings and measurements.
Indexed strings for Courier and the user interface are cross referenced to the Menu
Datatype Definition section (using a G Number). For all settable cells the setting limits
and default value are also defined within this database.

2.

INTERNAL DIGITAL SIGNALS (DDB)


This table defines all of the relay internal digital signals (opto inputs, output contacts
and protection inputs and outputs). A relay may have up to 512 internal signals each
reference by a numeric index as shown in this table. This numeric index is used to
select a signal for the commissioning monitor port. It is also used to explicitly define
protection events produced by the relay.

3.

DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC


This section documents the default programmable logic for the various models of the
relay is supply with the MiCOM S1 Scheme Logic Editor PC support software.

References
Introduction Chapter: User Interface operation and connections to relay
Courier User Guide R6512

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database


MiCOM P740

Relay Menu Database


MiCOM P740

A - MENU DATABASE

P740/EN GC/D11

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-1

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col
00

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

00 SYSTEM DATA
1

Language

Indexed String

G19

English

Setting

Password

ASCII Password(4 bytes)

G20

AAAA

Setting

65

90

Description

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

MiCOM P741

Setting

32

163

Plant Reference

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ALSTOM

Setting

32

163

Model Number

ASCII Text(32 bytes)

Model Number

Data

Serial Number

ASCII Text(7 bytes)

Serial Number

Data

Frequency

Unsigned Integer(1 byte)

50

Setting

0A Comms Level

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Data

0B

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Setting

Relay Address

0C Plant Status

Binary Flags(16 bits)

Data

0D Control Status

Binary Flags(16 or 32 bits)

Data

0E

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Active Group

G1

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Data

20 Opto I/P Status

Binary Flag(32 bits)


Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String

Data

22 Alarm Status

Cortec Code 18 characters

50

60

10

Rear Courier Address available via LCD


Address=255 with default settings

Data

11 Software Ref. 1

21 Relay O/P Status

01

Courier Data Type

Row

Data

D0 Access Level

Binary Flag(32 bits)


Indexed String
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Data
G1

D1 Password Control

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

G22

Setting

D2 Password Level 1

ASCII Password(4 characters)

G20

AAAA

Setting

65

90

D3 Password Level 2

ASCII Password(4 characters)

G20

AAAA

Setting

65

90

Setting

249

(From Record)

Data

(From Record)

Data

Data

00 VIEW RECORDS
1

Last Record

Unsigned Integer(2)

Menu Cell Ref

Cell Reference

Time & Date

IEC870 Time & Date

N/A

Max value is oldest record


Indicates type of event
See Event sheet

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-2

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Row

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

Record Text

Ascii String(32)

Data

See Event sheet

Record Value

Binary Flag(32)/UINT32

Data

Select Fault

Unsigned Integer

Setting

Note DTL depends on event type


See Event sheet of Spreadsheet
Allows Fault Record to be selected

Active Group

Unsigned Integer

Data

Faulted Phase

Binary Flags (8 Bits)

N/A

GXX

Data

Started phases + tripped phases

Start Elements

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

N/A

GXX

Data

Started elements

0A Trip Elements

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

N/A

GXX

Data

Tripped elements 1

0C Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

G12

Data

0D Fault Alarms

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

G87

Data

0E

System Frequency

Courier Number (frequency)

Data

0F

Fault Duration

Courier Number (time)

Data

11 IA diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

12 IB diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

13 IC diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

14 IN diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

15 IA bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

16 IB bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

17 IC bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

18 IN bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

19 IA CZ diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

1A IB CZ diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

1B

IC CZ diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

1C IN CZ diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

1D Faulted Zone

Binary Flags (16 Bits)

G212

Data

F0

Unsigned Integer

Select Report

Manual override to
select a fault record.

Setting

Faullt Alarms/Warnings

Allows Self Test Report to be selected

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-3

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

02

03

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

F1

Report Text

Ascii String(32)

Data

F2

Type

UINT32

Data

F3

Data

UINT32

Data

FF

Reset Indication

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

00 MEASUREMENTS 1
1

IA Diff CZ

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IB Diff CZ

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IC Diff CZ

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IN Diff CZ

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

00 MEASUREMENTS 2

Visibility depend of the number of the zone configured

Zx1: IA diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IB diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IC diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IN diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IA bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IB bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IC bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IN bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

79 Zx16: IA diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

7A Zx16: IB diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

7B

Zx16: IC diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

7C Zx16: IN diff

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

7D Zx16: IA bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

7E

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

,,,

Zx16: IB bias

Ligne = 8*Numzone - 7

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-4

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

7F

04

05

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

Zx16: IC bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

80 Zx16: IN bias

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

01 Current Node 01

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

02 Current Node 02

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

03 Current Node 03

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

04 Current Node 04

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

05 Current Node 05

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

06 Current Node 06

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

07 Current Node 07

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

08 Current Node 08

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

09 Current Node 09

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

0A Current Node 10

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

0B

Current Node 11

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

0C Current Node 12

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

0D Current Node 13

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

0E

Current Node 14

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

0F

Current Node 15

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

10 Current Node 16

Binary Flag (16 bits)

G212

Data

Visible if <> 0

01 Current Node 01

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

02 Current Node 02

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

03 Current Node 03

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

04 Current Node 04

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

05 Current Node 05

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

00 TOPOLOGY 1

00 TOPOLOGY 2

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-5

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

06

08

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Row

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

06 Current Node 06

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

07 Current Node 07

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

08 Current Node 08

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

09 Current Node 09

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

0A Current Node 10

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

0B

Current Node 11

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

0C Current Node 12

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

0D Current Node 13

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

0E

Current Node 14

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

0F

Current Node 15

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

10 Current Node 16

Binary Flag (32 bits)

G217

Data

Visible if <> 0

01 PU in service

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

G213

02 PU connected

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

G213

Data

PU synchronised

03 PU topo valid

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

G213

Data

PU with topology parameters valid

04 Reset Circt Flt

Indexed String

G11

05 CircuitryFfault

Binary Flags (16 Bits)

G212

Data

Circuitry Fault by zone

06 Circ Fault Phase

Binary Flags (4 Bits)

GXX

Data

Circuitry Fault by phase

G12

Setting

00 PU CONF & STATUS


0

No

Setting

Command 0

0xFFFFFFFF

PU declared in service

Reset command after circuitry fault

00 DATE AND TIME


1

Date/Time

N/A Date
36892
N/A Time
0.5
4 IRIG-B Sync

IEC870 Time & Date

N/A

0
Front Panel Menu only
ADU if 1/1/2001 possible
Front Panel Menu only

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

IRIG-B Status

ASCII String

G17

Data

Battery Status

Indexed String

G59

Data

Master CU : visibe if IRIG-B Fitted


Slave CU : 0804=0 (invisible)
Master CU : visible if 0804=1
Slave CU : 0805=0 (invisible)

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-6

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

7
09

0B

Courier Data Type

Row
Battery Alarm

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

Indexed String

G37

Enabled

Setting

00 CONFIGURATION
1

Restore Defaults

Indexed String

G53

No Operation

Command 0

Setting Group

Indexed String

G61

Select via Menu

Setting

Active Settings

Indexed String

G90

Group 1

Setting

Save Changes

Indexed String

G62

No Operation

Command 0

Copy From

Indexed String

G90

Group 1

Setting

Copy to

Indexed String

G98

No Operation

Command 0

Setting Group 1

Indexed String

G37

Enabled

Setting

Setting Group 2

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

Setting Group 3

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

0A Setting Group 4

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

10 Diff Busbar Prot

Indexed String

G37

Enabled

Setting

11 Optos Setup

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

25 Input Labels

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

26 Output Labels

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

29 Recorder Control

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2A Disturb Recorder

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2B

Measure't Setup

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2C Comms Settings

Indexed String

G80

Invisible

Setting

2D Commission Tests

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2E

Indexed String

G54

Secondary

Setting

Setting Values

00 RECORD CONTROL
1

Clear Events

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

Clear Faults

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

Comment

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-7

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

3
0C

Courier Data Type

Row
Clear Maint

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

00 DISTURB RECORDER
1

Duration

Courier Number (time)

G2

1.2

Setting

1.2

1.2

Trigger Position

Courier Number (%)

G2

50

Setting

50

FIXED VALUE: 1.2s


Cell not modifiable
Ffixed step: 200ms

Trigger Mode

Indexed String

G34

Single

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

Analog Channel 1

Indexed String

G214

IA diff

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

Analog Channel 2

Indexed String

G214

IB diff

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

Analog Channel 3

Indexed String

G214

IC diff

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

Analog Channel 4

Indexed String

G214

IN diff

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

Analog Channel 5

Indexed String

G214

IA bias

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

Analog Channel 6

Indexed String

G214

IB bias

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

0A Analog Channel 7

Indexed String

G214

IC bias

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

0B

Indexed String

G214

IN bias

Setting

Function not available => cell not modifiable

0C Digital Input 1

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

0D Digital Input 2

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

0E

Digital Input 3

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

0F

Digital Input 4

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

10 Digital Input 5

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

11 Digital Input 6

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

12 Digital Input 7

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

13 Digital Input 8

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

14 Digital Input 9

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

15 Digital Input 10

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

16 Digital Input 11

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

17 Digital Input 12

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

Analog Channel 8

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-8

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

0D

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

18 Digital Input 13

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

19 Digital Input 14

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1A Digital Input 15

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1B

Digital Input 16

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1C Digital Input 17

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1D Digital Input 18

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1E

Digital Input 19

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1F

Digital Input 20

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

20 Digital Input 21

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

21 Digital Input 22

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

22 Digital Input 23

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

23 Digital Input 24

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

24 Digital Input 25

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

25 Digital Input 26

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

26 Digital Input 27

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

27 Digital Input 28

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

28 Digital Input 29

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

29 Digital Input 30

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

2A Digital Input 31

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

2B

Digital Input 32

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

2C Manual Trigger

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

2D Zone To Record

Binary Flags (16 Bits)

G212

Setting

0x8000

01 Default Display

Indexed String

G52

Setting

Aff; Total Zone

Indexed String

G54

Secondary

Setting

Local Measurement Values

00 MEASURE'T SETUP

Local Values

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-9

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Remote Values

04 Ibp Base Cur Pri

0F

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Row

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

Indexed String

G54

Primary

Setting

Courier Number (Current)

G1

1000

Setting

10000

Remote Measurement Values

00 COMMISSION TESTS
1

Opto I/P Status

Relay O/P Status

Test Port Status

LED Status

Binary Flag(16 bits)


Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flags(8 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flags(8 bits)

Monitor Bit 1

Unsigned Integer

Relay 1

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 2

Unsigned Integer

Relay 2

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 3

Unsigned Integer

Relay 3

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 4

Unsigned Integer

Relay 4

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 5

Unsigned Integer

Relay 5

Setting

511

0A Monitor Bit 6

Unsigned Integer

Relay 6

Setting

511

0B

Monitor Bit 7

Unsigned Integer

Relay 7

Setting

511

0C Monitor Bit 8

Unsigned Integer

Relay 8

Setting

511

0D Test Mode

Indexed String

G215

Disabled

Setting

0E

Test Pattern

G9

Setting

20

0F

Contact Test

Binary Flags (21bits)


Indexed String
Indexed String

G93

No Operation

Command 0

G94

No Operation

Command 0

12 87BB monitoring

Binary Flags (8bits)


Indexed String
Binary Flags (16bits)

G212

0xFFFF

Setting

0xFFFF

13 87BB&50BF disabl

Binary Flags (16bits)

G212

0xFFFF

Setting

0xFFFF

14 87BBTrip Pattern

Binary Flags (16bits)

G212

Setting

0xFFFF

15 87BB Trip Order

Indexed String

G94

No Operation

Command 0

20 DDB 0-31

Binary Flag (32 bits)

10 Test LEDs

Data
Data
Data
0-7

N/A

Data

Data

Relay
Visible by Courier

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-10

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Row

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Comment

Password

Level

21 DDB 32-63

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

22 DDB 64-95

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

23 DDB 96-127

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

24 DDB 128-159

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

25 DDB 160-191

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

26 DDB 192-223

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

27 DDB 224-255

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

28 DDB 256-287

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

29 DDB 288-319

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2A DDB 320-351

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2B

DDB 352-383

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2C DDB 384-415

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2D DDB 415-447

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2E

DDB 448-479

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2F

DDB 480-511

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

Opto
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier
Visible by Courier

11

00 OPTOS SETUP
1

Global Nominal V

Indexed String

G200

Setting

02 Opto Input 1

Indexed String

G201

Setting

03 Opto Input 2

Indexed String

G201

Setting

04 Opto Input 3

Indexed String

G201

Setting

05 Opto Input 4

Indexed String

G201

Setting

06 Opto Input 5

Indexed String

G201

Setting

07 Opto Input 6

Indexed String

G201

Setting

08 Opto Input 7

Indexed String

G201

Setting

09 Opto Input 8

Indexed String

G201

Setting

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-11

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

GROUP 1
PROTECTION SETTINGS
30

00 GROUP 1
DIFF BUSBAR PROT
01 Diff Phase Fault

(Sub-Heading)

02 Current Is

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,1*Ibp

Setting

0,02*Ibp

1*Ibp

0,01*Ibp

03 Phase Slope k

Courier Number (%)

G2

40

Setting

20

90

04 ID>2 Current

Courier Number (Current)

G2

1,2*Ibp

Setting

0,1*Ibp

4*Ibp

0,01*Ibp

05 ID>1 Current

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,05*Ibp

Setting

0,01*Ibp

0,5*Ibp

0,01*Ibp

06 ID>1 Alarm Timer

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.1

100

0.1

07 Diff Earth Fault

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

08 IBiasPh> Cur.

Courier Number (Current)

G2

2*Ibp

Setting

0,2*Ibp

10*Ibp

0,1*Ibp

09 Earth Cur. IsN

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,1*Ibp

Setting

0,02*Ibp

1*Ibp

0,01*Ibp

0A Earth Slope kN

Courier Number (%)

G2

20

Setting

20

90

0B

IDN>2 Current

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,1*Ibp

Setting

0,05*Ibp

2*Ibp

0,05*Ibp

0C IDN>1 Current

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,05*Ibp

Setting

0,01*Ibp

0,5*Ibp

0,01*Ibp

0D IDN>1 Alarm Tim.

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.1

100

0.1

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 01

Setting

32

39

DIFF BUSBAR PROT


4A

00 GROUP 1
INPUT LABELS
1 Opto Input 1
2

Opto Input 2

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 02

Setting

32

39

Opto Input 3

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 03

Setting

32

39

Opto Input 4

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 04

Setting

32

39

Opto Input 5

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 05

Setting

32

39

Opto Input 6

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 06

Setting

32

39

Opto Input 7

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 07

Setting

32

39

Opto Input 8

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Label 08

Setting

32

39

Comment

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-12

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P741 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col
4B

Courier Data Type

Row
00 GROUP 1
OUTPUT LABELS
1 Relay 1

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 01

Setting

Relay 2

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 02

Setting

Relay 3

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 03

Setting

Relay 4

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 04

Setting

Relay 5

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 05

Setting

Relay 6

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 06

Setting

Relay 7

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 07

Setting

Relay 8

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Relay Label 08

Setting

01 Topology Size

Unsigned integer

Data

02 Topology Element 1

Binary Flag (32bits)

Data

03 Topology Element 2

Binary Flag (32bits)

Data

04 Topology Element 3

Binary Flag (32bits)

Data

50

GROUP 2
PROTECTION SETTINGS
00 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

70

GROUP 3
PROTECTION SETTINGS
00 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

90

GROUP 4
PROTECTION SETTINGS
00 Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

C0

00 TOPO SETTINGS

Comment

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-13

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Row

00

00

01

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

SYSTEM DATA

Language

Indexed String

G19

English

Setting

Password

ASCII Password(4 bytes)

G20

AAAA

Setting

65

90

Description

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

MiCOM P742/P743

Setting

32

163

Plant Reference

ASCII Text(16 bytes)

ALSTOM

Setting

32

163

Model Number

ASCII Text(32 bytes)

Model Number

Data

Serial Number

ASCII Text(7 bytes)

Serial Number

Data

Frequency

Unsigned Integer(1 byte)

50

Setting

0A

Comms Level

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Data

0B

Relay Address

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

Setting

0C

Plant Status

Binary Flags(16 bits)

Data

0D

Control Status

Binary Flags(16 or 32 bits)

Data

0E

Active Group

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

G1

10

CB Trip/Close

Indexed String(2)

G55

11

Software Ref. 1

ASCII Text(16 characters)

Data

20

Opto I/P Status

Data

21

Relay O/P Status

22

Alarm Status

G96

Data

D0

Access Level

Binary Flag(32 bits)


Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String
Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

G1

Data

D1

Password Control

Unsigned Integer(2 bytes)

G22

Setting

D2

Password Level 1

ASCII Password(4 characters)

G20

AAAA

Setting

65

90

D3

Password Level 2

ASCII Password(4 characters)

G20

AAAA

Setting

65

90

00

VIEW RECORDS
G1

Setting

249

G13

(From Record)

Data

Last Record

Unsigned Integer(2)

Menu Cell Ref

Cell Reference

Cortec / 18 characters

50

60

10

102

1
1

Rear Courier Address available via LCD


Address=255 with default settings

Visible to Rear Port


(command Bks & isolators)

Data
No Operation

Command 0

ADU extension 24 ou 32 bits

Data

N/A

Max value is oldest record


Indicates type of event

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-14

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Row

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level
See Event sheet

Time & Date

IEC870 Time & Date

G12

(From Record)

Record Text

Ascii String(32)

Record Value

Binary Flag(32)/UINT32

G27

Select Fault

Unsigned Integer

G1

Setting

Active Group

Unsigned Integer

G1

Data

Faulted Phase

Binary Flags (8 Bits)

N/A

G16

Data

Started phases + tripped phases

Start Elements

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

N/A

GXX

Data

Started elements

0A

Trip Elements

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

N/A

GXX

Data

Tripped elements 1

0C

Time Stamp

IEC870 Time & Date

G12

Data

0D

Fault Alarms

Binary Flags (32 Bits)

G87

Data

0E

System Frequency

Courier Number (frequency)

G25

Data

10

Relay Trip Time

Courier Number (time)

G24

Data

11

IA

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

12

IB

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

13

IC

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

14

IN

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

15

VA

Courier Number(voltage)

G24

Data

Build = Option Transfo Tension

16

VB

Courier Number(voltage)

G24

Data

Build = Option Transfo Tension

17

VC

Courier Number(voltage)

G24

Data

Build = Option Transfo Tension

18

VN

Courier Number(voltage)

G24

Data

Build = Option Transfo Tension

F0

Select Report

Unsigned Integer

G27

F1

Report Text

Ascii String(32)

F2

Type

UINT32

G27

Data

F3

Data

UINT32

G27

Data

FF

Reset Indication

Indexed String

G11

Manual override to
select a fault record.

Data
Data

See Event sheet

Data

Note DTL depends on event type


See Event sheet of Spreadsheet
Allows Fault Record to be selected

Setting

Faullt Alarms/Warnings

Command 0

Data

No

Allows Self Test Report to be selected

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-15

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Row

02

00

04

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

MEASUREMENTS 1

IA Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IA Phase Angle

Courier Number (angle)

G30

Data

IB Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IB Phase Angle

Courier Number (angle)

G30

Data

IC Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IC Phase Angle

Courier Number (angle)

G30

Data

IN Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

IN Phase Angle

Courier Number (angle)

G30

Data

IN Derived Magn

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

0A

IN Derived Angle

Courier Number (angle)

G30

Data

0B

I1 Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

0C

I2 Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

0D

I0 Magnitude

Courier Number (current)

G24

Data

00

TOPOLOGY
G212

Data

G24

Data

Link CT / zone

Zx1: IA diff

Binary Flag(32 bits)


Indexed String
Courier Number (Current)

Zx1: IB diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IC diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IN diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IA bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IB bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IC bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zx1: IN bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

0A

Zx2: IA diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

Zones connected to CT
Isolator and/or breaker closed
x1=n of zone connected to isolator 1
IF xx=255, no zone connected

x2=n of zone connected to isolator 2

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-16

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level
IF xx=255, no zone connected

07

0B

Zx2: IB diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

0C

Zx2: IC diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

0D

Zx2: IN diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

0E

Zx2: IA bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

0F

Zx2: IB bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

10

Zx2: IC bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

11

Zx2: IN bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

12

Zx3: IA diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

13

Zx3: IB diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

14

Zx3: IC diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

15

Zx3: IN diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

16

Zx3: IA bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

17

Zx3: IB bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

18

Zx3: IC bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

19

Zx3: IN bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

1A

Zx4: IA diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

1B

Zx4: IB diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

1C

Zx4: IC diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

1D

Zx4: IN diff

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

1E

Zx4: IA bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

1F

Zx4: IB bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

20

Zx4: IC bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

21

Zx4: IN bias

Courier Number (Current)

G24

Data

00

CB CONTROL

x3=n of zone connected to isolator 3


IF xx=255, no zone connected

x4=n of zone connected to isolator 4


IF xx=255, no zone connected

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-17

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

08

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

Prot Trip Pulse

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.2

Setting

0.05

0.01

Protection trip pulse time

Trip Latched

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

To hold relay closed after trip

Reset Trip Latch

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

Cde to reset upholding

CB Control by

Indexed String

G99

Disabled

Setting

Man Close Pulse

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.5

Setting

0.1

0.1

Man Trip Pulse

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.5

Setting

0.1

0.1

Man Close Delay

Courier Number (Time)

G2

10

Setting

60

00

DATE and TIME

Date/Time

N/A Date
35807
N/A Time
0.5
6 Battery Status
7

09

Courier Data Type

Row

00

Battery Alarm

IEC870 Time & Date

N/A

G12

Setting

0
Front Panel Menu only
Front Panel Menu only

Indexed String

G59

Data

Indexed String

G37

Enabled

Setting

CONFIGURATION

Restore Defaults

Indexed String

G53

No Operation

Command 0

Setting Group

Indexed String

G61

Select via Menu

Setting

Active Settings

Indexed String

G90

Group 1

Setting

Save Changes

Indexed String

G62

No Operation

Command 0

Copy From

Indexed String

G90

Group 1

Setting

Copy to

Indexed String

G98

No Operation

Command 0

Setting Group 1

Indexed String

G37

Enabled

Setting

Setting Group 2

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

Setting Group 3

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

0A

Setting Group 4

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-18

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

0A

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

10

BB Trip Confirm

Indexed String

G37

Enabled

Setting

11

Optos Setup

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

12

Overcurrent Prot

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

13

Earth Fault Prot

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

14

CB Fail & I<

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

25

Input Labels

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

26

Output Labels

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

28

CT & VT Ratios

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

29

Recorder Control

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2A

Disturb Recorder

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2B

Measure't Setup

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2D

Commission Tests

Indexed String

G80

Visible

Setting

2E

Setting Values

Indexed String

G54

Secondary

Setting

00

CT AND VT RATIOS

07

Phase CT Primary

Courier Number (Current)

G35

1000

Setting

30000

08

Phase CT Sec'y

Courier Number (Current)

G2

Setting

20

CT Class

Indexed String

G205

Setting

21

RBPh / RBN

Unsigned Integer

G1

Setting

0.5

10

0.1

23

Power Parameters

(Sub-Heading)

24

Standard Input

Indexed String

G206

British

Setting

British->0 / IEC->1

25

Knee Voltage Vk

Courier Number (Voltage)

G2

250

Setting

20

5000

10

0A24=0 => British

26

Rated Burden VA

Courier Number (VA)

G1

25

Setting

200

27

Rated Burden Ohm

Courier Number(Ohms)

G35

25 / I1^2

Data

5 / I1^2

200 / I1^2 5 / I1^2

28

KSCC

Unsigned Integer

G1

10

Setting

10

50

29

RCT Sec'y

Courier Number(Ohms)

G35

0.5

Setting

0.1

50

0.1

I1=Phase CT secondary rating

Label M4=0A07/0A08
Label M17=(0A07/0A08)^2

0A24=1 => IEC


2

0A24=1 => IEC


Calculated not modifiable
0A24=1 => IEC

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-19

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

0B

0C

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

2B

Eff. Burden Ohm

Courier Number(Ohms)

G35

25 / I1^2

Setting

0,1 / I1^2

200 / I1^2 0,01 / I1^2 2

2C

Eff. Burden VA

Courier Number (VA)

G1

25

Data

0.1

200

0.01

00

RECORD CONTROL

Calculaled not modifiable

Clear Events

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

Clear Faults

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

Clear Maint

Indexed String

G11

No

Command 0

00

Comment

Level

DISTURB RECORDER

Duration

Courier Number (time)

1.5

Setting

0.1

10.5

0.01

Trigger Position

Courier Number (%)

33.3

Setting

100

0.1

Trigger Mode

Indexed String

G34

Single

Setting

Analog Channel 1

Indexed String

G31

IA

Setting

Analog Channel 2

Indexed String

G31

IB

Setting

Analog Channel 3

Indexed String

G31

IC

Setting

Analog Channel 4

Indexed String

G31

IN

Setting

Analog Channel 5

Indexed String

G31

Unused

Setting

Build = Option Transfo Tension

Analog Channel 6

Indexed String

G31

Unused

Setting

Build = Option Transfo Tension

0A

Analog Channel 7

Indexed String

G31

Unused

Setting

Build = Option Transfo Tension

0B

Analog Channel 8

Indexed String

G31

Unused

Setting

Build = Option Transfo Tension

0C

Digital Input 1

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

DDB Size different for each model

0D

Input 1 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

0E

Digital Input 2

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

0F

Input 2 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

10

Digital Input 3

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

11

Input 3 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

12

Digital Input 4

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-20

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

13

Input 4 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

14

Digital Input 5

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

15

Input 5 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

16

Digital Input 6

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

17

Input 6 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

18

Digital Input 7

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

19

Input 7 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

1A

Digital Input 8

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1B

Input 8 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

1C

Digital Input 9

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1D

Input 9 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

1E

Digital Input 10

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

1F

Input 10 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

20

Digital Input 11

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

21

Input 11 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

22

Digital Input 12

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

23

Input 12 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

24

Digital Input 13

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

25

Input 13 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

26

Digital Input 14

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

27

Input 14 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

28

Digital Input 15

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

29

Input 15 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

2A

Digital Input 16

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

2B

Input 16 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-21

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

2C

Digital Input 17

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

2D

Input 17 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

2E

Digital Input 18

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

2F

Input 18 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

30

Digital Input 19

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

31

Input 19 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

32

Digital Input 20

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

33

Input 20 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

34

Digital Input 21

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

35

Input 21 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

36

Digital Input 22

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

37

Input 22 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

38

Digital Input 23

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

39

Input 23 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

3A

Digital Input 24

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

3B

Input 24 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

3C

Digital Input 25

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

3D

Input 25 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

3E

Digital Input 26

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

3F

Input 26 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

40

Digital Input 27

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

41

Input 27 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

42

Digital Input 28

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

43

Input 28 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

44

Digital Input 29

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

45

Input 29 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-22

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

0D

0F

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

46

Digital Input 30

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

47

Input 30 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

48

Digital Input 31

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

49

Input 31 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

4A

Digital Input 32

Indexed String

G32

Unused

Setting

DDB Size

4B

Input 32 Trigger

Indexed String

G66

No Trigger

Setting

00

MEASURE'T SETUP

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

DDB Size different for each model

Default Display

Indexed String

G52

Setting

Local Values

Indexed String

G54

Secondary

Setting

Local Measurement Values

Remote Values

Indexed String

G54

Primary

Setting

Remote Measurement Values

00

COMMISSION TESTS

Opto I/P Status

Relay O/P Status

Test Port Status

LED Status

Binary Flag(16 bits)


Indexed String
Binary Flag(32 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flags(8 bits)
Indexed String
Binary Flags(8 bits)

Data

Monitor Bit 1

Unsigned Integer

Relay 1

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 2

Unsigned Integer

Relay 2

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 3

Unsigned Integer

Relay 3

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 4

Unsigned Integer

Relay 4

Setting

511

Monitor Bit 5

Unsigned Integer

Relay 5

Setting

511

0A

Monitor Bit 6

Unsigned Integer

Relay 6

Setting

511

0B

Monitor Bit 7

Unsigned Integer

Relay 7

Setting

511

0C

Monitor Bit 8

Unsigned Integer

Relay 8

Setting

511

0D

Test Mode

Indexed String

G215

Disabled

Setting

0E

Test Pattern

Binary Flags (21bits)

G9

Setting

20

Data
Data
0-7

Data

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-23

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Row
0F

Contact Test

10

Test LEDs

12

Indexed String
Indexed String

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

G94

No Operation

Command 0

G94

No Operation

Command 0

Position Pattern

Binary Flags (8bits)


Indexed String
Binary Flags (7bits)

G216

Setting

79

13

Position Test

Indexed String

G93

No Operation

Command 0

20

DDB 0-31

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

21

DDB element 32-63

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

22

DDB element 64-95

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

23

DDB element 96-127

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

24

DDB element 128-159

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

25

DDB element 160-191

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

26

DDB element 192-223

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

27

DDB element 224-255

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

28

DDB element 256-287

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

29

DDB element 288-319

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2A

DDB element 320-351

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2B

DDB element 352-383

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2C

DDB element 384-415

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2D

DDB element 415-447

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2E

DDB element 448-479

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

2F

DDB element 480-511

Binary Flag (32 bits)

N/A

Data

Forced Position for Isolators and Circuit Breaker

Relay
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Opto
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus
Visible by Courier and Modbus

11

00

OPTOS SETUP

Global Nominal V

Indexed String

G200

Setting

02

Opto Input 1

Indexed String

G201

Setting

Opto Input 2

Indexed String

G201

Setting

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-24

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

Opto Input 3

Indexed String

G201

Setting

Opto Input 4

Indexed String

G201

Setting

06

Opto Input 5

Indexed String

G201

Setting

Opto Input 6

Indexed String

G201

Setting

08

Opto Input 7

Indexed String

G201

Setting

Opto Input 8

Indexed String

G201

Setting

0A

Opto Input 9

Indexed String

G201

Setting

0B

Opto Input 10

Indexed String

G201

Setting

0C

Opto Input 11

Indexed String

G201

Setting

0D

Opto Input 12

Indexed String

G201

Setting

0E

Opto Input 13

Indexed String

G201

Setting

0F

Opto Input 14

Indexed String

G201

Setting

10

Opto Input 15

Indexed String

G201

Setting

11

Opto Input 16

Indexed String

G201

Setting

12

Opto Input 17

Indexed String

G201

Setting

13

Opto Input 18

Indexed String

G201

Setting

14

Opto Input 19

Indexed String

G201

Setting

15

Opto Input 20

Indexed String

G201

Setting

16

Opto Input 21

Indexed String

G201

Setting

17

Opto Input 22

Indexed String

G201

Setting

18

Opto Input 23

Indexed String

G201

Setting

19

Opto Input 24

Indexed String

G201

Setting

Courier Number (Current)

G2

1,2*I1

Setting

0,05*I1

4*I1

0,01*I1

GROUP 1
BUSBAR ELEMENT
30

00
01

GROUP 1
BB TRIP CONFIRM
I>BB Current Set

Comment

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-25

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row
02

IN>BB Current

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,2*I1

Setting

0,05*I1

4*I1

0,01*I1

01

GROUP 1
BACKUP OVERCURRENT
I>1 Function

Indexed String

G43

Disabled

Setting

10

02

I>1 Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

3*I1

Setting

0,10*I1

32*I1

0,01*I1

03

I>1 Time Delay

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

100

0.01

04

I>1 TMS

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.025

1.2

0.025

05

I>1 Time Dial

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.5

15

0.1

06

I>1 Reset Char

Indexed String

G60

DT

Setting

07

I>1 tReset

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

100

0.1

08

I>2 Function

Indexed String

G209

Disabled

Setting

09

I>2 Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

20*I1

Setting

0,10*In

32*I1

0,01*I1

0A

I>2 Time Delay

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

100

0.01

01

GROUP 1
EARTH FAULT
IN>1 Function

Indexed String

G43

Disabled

Setting

10

02

IN>1 Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,3*I1

Setting

0,10*I1

32*I1

0,01*I1

03

IN>1 Time Delay

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

100

0.01

04

IN>1 TMS

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.025

1.2

0.025

05

IN>1 Time Dial

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.5

15

0.1

06

IN>1 Reset Char

Indexed String

G60

DT

Setting

07

IN>1 tReset

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

100

0.1

08

IN>2 Function

Indexed String

G209

Disabled

Setting

09

IN>2 Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

20*I1

Setting

0,10*I1

32*I1

0,01*I1

0A

IN>2 Time Delay

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

100

0.01

BB TRIP CONFIRM
35

00

5 >= 3501 >=2

5 >= 3501 >=1 OR (3506 = 0 AND 3501 >= 6)

OVERCURRENT
38

00

5 >= 3801 >=2

5 >= 3801 >=1 OR (3806 = 0 AND 3801 >= 6)

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-26

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Row

45

00

Courier Data Type

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Comment

Level

EARTH FAULT

01

GROUP 1
CB FAIL
Control by

Indexed String

G210

I<

Setting

02

I< Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,05*I1

Setting

0,05*I1

1*I1

0,01*I1

03

I> Status

Indexed String

G37

Disabled

Setting

04

I> Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

1,2*I1

Setting

0,05*I1

4*I1

0,01*I1

4503<>0 and 4501<>1

05

IN> Current Set

Courier Number (Current)

G2

0,2*I1

Setting

0,05*I1

4*I1

0,01*I1

4503<>0 and 4501<>1

06

INTERNAL TRIP

(Sub Heading)

07

CB Fail Timer 1

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.05

Setting

10

0.01

08

CB Fail Timer 2

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.2

Setting

10

0.01

09

EXTERNAL TRIP

(Sub Heading)

0A

CB Fail Timer 3

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.05

Setting

10

0.01

0B

CB Fail Timer 4

Courier Number (Time)

G2

0.2

Setting

10

0.01

I<, 52a, I< & 52a

4508 > 4507

450B > 450A

CB FAIL
46

00
0D

GROUP 1
SUPERVISION
I0 SUPERVISION

(Sub Heading)

0E

Error Factor Kce

Courier Number (%)

G2

40

Setting

100

0F

Alarm Delay Tce

Courier Number (Time)

G2

Setting

0.1

10

0.1

SUPERVISION
4A

00
1

GROUP 1
INPUT LABELS
Opto Input 1

Product Dependent
ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Opto Label 01

Setting

32

55

Opto Input 2

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Opto Label 02

Setting

32

Opto Input 3

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Opto Label 03

Setting

Opto Input 4

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

etc..

Opto Input 5

ASCII Text (16 chars)

Opto Input 6

ASCII Text (16 chars)

55

1
1
1

32

55

Setting

32

55

G3

Setting

32

55

G3

Setting

32

55

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-27

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Cell Type

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

Opto Input 7

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

Opto Input 8

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

Opto Input 9

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

0A

Opto Input 10

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

0B

Opto Input 11

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

0C

Opto Input 12

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

0D

Opto Input 13

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

0E

Opto Input 14

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

0F

Opto Input 15

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

10

Opto Input 16

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

11

Opto Input 17

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

12

Opto Input 18

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

13

Opto Input 19

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

14

Opto Input 20

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

15

Opto Input 21

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

16

Opto Input 22

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

17

Opto Input 23

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

18

Opto Input 24

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

32

55

INPUT LABELS
4B

00
1

GROUP 1
OUTPUT LABELS
Relay 1

Product Dependent
ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Relay Label 01

Setting

23

Relay 2

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Relay Label 02

Setting

23

Relay 3

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Relay Label 03

Setting

23

Relay 4

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

etc

Setting

23

Relay 5

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

Comment

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-28

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

70

90
C0

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

Relay 6

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

Relay 7

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

Relay 8

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

Relay 9

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

0A

Relay 10

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

0B

Relay 11

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

0C

Relay 12

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

0D

Relay 13

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

0E

Relay 14

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

0F

Relay 15

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

10

Relay 16

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

11

Relay 17

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

12

Relay 18

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

13

Relay 19

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

14

Relay 20

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

15

Relay 21

ASCII Text (16 chars)

G3

Setting

23

OUTPUT LABELS
GROUP 2
50

Cell Type

00

PROTECTION SETTINGS
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

00

GROUP 3
PROTECTION SETTINGS
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

00

GROUP 4
PROTECTION SETTINGS
Repeat of Group 1 columns/rows

00

TOPO SETTINGS

01

Topology Size

Unsigned integer

Data

02

Topology Element 1

Binary Flag (32bits)

Data

Comment

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11
Page A-29

MiCOM P740
A - Menu database for Courier, User Interface (MiCOM P742 and P743 only)
Courier Ref
Courier Text
Col

Courier Data Type

Row

LCD ref

Data
Courier

Default Setting

Topology Element 250

Binary Flag (32bits)

Min

Max

Step

Password

Level

,,,
FB

Cell Type

Data

Comment

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database


MiCOM P740

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

B - DIGITAL DATA BUS

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11

MiCOM P740

Page B-1

B - Digital Data Bus (For P741 Only)


DDB N

Source

Description

English Text

Relay Label 01
Relay Label 02
Relay Label 03
Relay Label 04
Relay Label 05
Relay Label 06
Relay Label 07
Relay Label 08
Opto Label 01
Opto Label 02
Opto Label 03
Opto Label 04
Opto Label 05
Opto Label 06
Opto Label 07
Opto Label 08
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
SG Bit LSB
SG Bit MSB

Output Label 01
Output Label 02
Output Label 03
Output Label 04
Output Label 05
Output Label 06
Output Label 07
Output Label 08
Opto Input 1
Opto Input 2
Opto Input 3
Opto Input 4
Opto Input 5
Opto Input 6
Opto Input 7
Opto Input 8
Led 1
Led 2
Led 3
Led 4
Led 5
Led 6
Led 7
Led 8
LSB Setting Group
MSB Setting Group

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73

Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)

74
75
76
77
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112

PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
Virtual Relay
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection

Reset Circt Flt


Ext. Start DR
Ext. CZ confirm.
Reset Latches
Virtual Relay 01
Virtual Relay 02
Virtual Relay 03
Virtual Relay 04
Virtual Relay 05
Virtual Relay 06
Virtual Relay 07
Virtual Relay 08
Virtual Relay 09
Virtual Relay 10
Virtual Relay 11
Virtual Relay 12
Virtual Relay 13
Virtual Relay 14
Virtual Relay 15
Virtual Relay 16
Minor Syst Error
Alarm User 1
Alarm User 2
Alarm User 3
Alarm User 4
Alarm User 5
Alarm User 6
Alarm User 7
Alarm User 8
Fault 87BB zone 16

Reset Circuitry Fault


Starting Disturbance Recorder
External CZ confirmation (0=confirmed)
Reset Relays and Led latched in PSL
Virtual Relays 01
Virtual Relays 02
Virtual Relays 03
Virtual Relays 04
Virtual Relays 05
Virtual Relays 06
Virtual Relays 07
Virtual Relays 08
Virtual Relays 09
Virtual Relays 10
Virtual Relays 11
Virtual Relays 12
Virtual Relays 13
Virtual Relays 14
Virtual Relays 15
Virtual Relays 16
Minor System Error
Self Reset User Alarm 1
Self Reset User Alarm 2
Self Reset User Alarm 3
Self Reset User Alarm 4
Self Reset User Alarm 5
Self Reset User Alarm 6
Self Reset User Alarm 7
Self Reset User Alarm 8
Fault current in zone 16

113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133

PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection


PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection

Fault 87BB zone 15


Fault 87BB zone 14
Fault 87BB zone 13
Fault 87BB zone 12
Fault 87BB zone 11
Fault 87BB zone 10
Fault 87BB zone 09
Fault 87BB zone 08
Fault 87BB zone 07
Fault 87BB zone 06
Fault 87BB zone 05
Fault 87BB zone 04
Fault 87BB zone 03
Fault 87BB zone 02
Fault 87BB zone 01
Circt Flt zone 16
Circt Flt zone 15
Circt Flt zone 14
Circt Flt zone 13
Circt Flt zone 12
Circt Flt zone 11

Fault current in zone 15


Fault current in zone 14
Fault current in zone 13
Fault current in zone 12
Fault current in zone 11
Fault current in zone 10
Fault current in zone 9
Fault current in zone 8
Fault current in zone 7
Fault current in zone 6
Fault current in zone 5
Fault current in zone 4
Fault current in zone 3
Fault current in zone 2
Fault current in zone 1
Circuitry fault in zone 16
Circuitry fault in zone 15
Circuitry fault in zone 14
Circuitry fault in zone 13
Circuitry fault in zone 12
Circuitry fault in zone 11

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11

MiCOM P740

Page B-2

B - Digital Data Bus (For P741 Only)


DDB N
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210

Source
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test

Description

English Text

Circt Flt zone 10


Circt Flt zone 09
Circt Flt zone 08
Circt Flt zone 07
Circt Flt zone 06
Circt Flt zone 05
Circt Flt zone 04
Circt Flt zone 03
Circt Flt zone 02
Circt Flt zone 01
Trp 87BB zone 16
Trp 87BB zone 15
Trp 87BB zone 14
Trp 87BB zone 13
Trp 87BB zone 12
Trp 87BB zone 11
Trp 87BB zone 10
Trp 87BB zone 09
Trp 87BB zone 08
Trp 87BB zone 07
Trp 87BB zone 06
Trp 87BB zone 05
Trp 87BB zone 04
Trp 87BB zone 03
Trp 87BB zone 02
Trp 87BB zone 01
Trp 50BF zone 16
Trp 50BF zone 15
Trp 50BF zone 14
Trp 50BF zone 13
Trp 50BF zone 12
Trp 50BF zone 11
Trp 50BF zone 10
Trp 50BF zone 09
Trp 50BF zone 08
Trp 50BF zone 07
Trp 50BF zone 06
Trp 50BF zone 05
Trp 50BF zone 04
Trp 50BF zone 03
Trp 50BF zone 02
Trp 50BF zone 01
Man.Trip zone 16
Man.Trip zone 15
Man.Trip zone 14
Man.Trip zone 13
Man.Trip zone 12
Man.Trip zone 11
Man.Trip zone 10
Man.Trip zone 09
Man.Trip zone 08
Man.Trip zone 07
Man.Trip zone 06
Man.Trip zone 05
Man.Trip zone 04
Man.Trip zone 03
Man.Trip zone 02
Man.Trip zone 01
Lck Lev.1 zone16
Lck Lev.1 zone15
Lck Lev.1 zone14
Lck Lev.1 zone13
Lck Lev.1 zone12
Lck Lev.1 zone11
Lck Lev.1 zone10
Lck Lev.1 zone09
Lck Lev.1 zone08
Lck Lev.1 zone07
Lck Lev.1 zone06
Lck Lev.1 zone05
Lck Lev.1 zone04
Lck Lev.1 zone03
Lck Lev.1 zone02
Lck Lev.1 zone01
Lck Lev.2 zone16
Lck Lev.2 zone15
Lck Lev.2 zone14

Circuitry fault in zone 10


Circuitry fault in zone 9
Circuitry fault in zone 8
Circuitry fault in zone 7
Circuitry fault in zone 6
Circuitry fault in zone 5
Circuitry fault in zone 4
Circuitry fault in zone 3
Circuitry fault in zone 2
Circuitry fault in zone 1
Busbar trip in zone 16
Busbar trip in zone 15
Busbar trip in zone 14
Busbar trip in zone 13
Busbar trip in zone 12
Busbar trip in zone 11
Busbar trip in zone 10
Busbar trip in zone 9
Busbar trip in zone 8
Busbar trip in zone 7
Busbar trip in zone 6
Busbar trip in zone 5
Busbar trip in zone 4
Busbar trip in zone 3
Busbar trip in zone 2
Busbar trip in zone 1
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 16
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 15
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 14
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 13
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 12
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 11
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 10
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 9
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 8
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 7
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 6
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 5
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 4
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 3
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 2
Breaker failure trip (50BF) in zone 1
Manual trip zone 16
Manual trip zone 15
Manual trip zone 14
Manual trip zone 13
Manual trip zone 12
Manual trip zone 11
Manual trip zone 10
Manual trip zone 9
Manual trip zone 8
Manual trip zone 7
Manual trip zone 6
Manual trip zone 5
Manual trip zone 4
Manual trip zone 3
Manual trip zone 2
Manual trip zone 1
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 16
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 15
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 14
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 13
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 12
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 11
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 10
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 9
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 8
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 7
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 6
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 5
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 4
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 3
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 2
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring in zone 1
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 16
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 15
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 14

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11

MiCOM P740

Page B-3

B - Digital Data Bus (For P741 Only)


DDB N
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296

Source
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System

Description

English Text

Lck Lev.2 zone13


Lck Lev.2 zone12
Lck Lev.2 zone11
Lck Lev.2 zone10
Lck Lev.2 zone09
Lck Lev.2 zone08
Lck Lev.2 zone07
Lck Lev.2 zone06
Lck Lev.2 zone05
Lck Lev.2 zone04
Lck Lev.2 zone03
Lck Lev.2 zone02
Lck Lev.2 zone01
Trip 87BB
Trip 87BB block
Trip Manual zone
Trip 50BF
Trip 50BF block
Dead Zone Signal
Fault phase A
Fault phase B
Fault phase C
Earth fault
Circuitry Fault
Alm Lck Level 1
Alm Lck Level 2
Config. valid
Topology valid
Main System Er.
1st CU main err.
2nd CU main err.
Fault Check Zone
Circt Flt ph A
Circt Flt ph B
Circt Flt ph C
Circt Flt Earth
Err Chan A Com 1
Err Chan B Com 1
Err Chan C Com 1
Err Chan D Com 1
Err Chan A Com 2
Err Chan B Com 2
Err Chan C Com 2
Err Chan D Com 2
Err Chan A Com 3
Err Chan B Com 3
Err Chan C Com 3
Err Chan D Com 3
Err Chan A Com 4
Err Chan B Com 4
Err Chan C Com 4
Err Chan D Com 4
Err Chan A Com 5
Err Chan B Com 5
Err Chan C Com 5
Err Chan D Com 5
Err Chan A Com 6
Err Chan B Com 6
Err Chan C Com 6
Err Chan D Com 6
Err Chan A Com 7
Err Chan B Com 7
Err Chan C Com 7
Err Chan D Com 7
Err Chan A Com 8
Err Chan B Com 8
Err Chan C Com 8
Err Chan D Com 8
PU Adr 38 error
PU Adr 37 error
PU Adr 36 error
PU Adr 35 error
PU Adr 34 error
PU Adr 33 error
PU Adr 32 error
PU Adr 31 error
PU Adr 30 error

Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 13


Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 12
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 11
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 10
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 9
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 8
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 7
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 6
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 5
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 5
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 3
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 2
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled in zone 1
Busbar trip order (87BB)
Busbar trip order blocked by commissioning mode
Manual Trip Order
Breaker fail trip order (50BF)
Breaker fail trip order blocked by commissioning mode
Fault in dead zone
Fault current in phase A
Fault current in phase B
Fault current in phase C
Sensitive earth fault current
Circuitry fault on 1 or several zones
Commissioning mode 87BB monitoring
Commissioning mode 87BB & 50BF disabled
Valid configuration
Topology file valid
Main system error
CU main error
Remote CU main error
Busbar fault detected by both CZ (internal & external)
Circuitry fault in phase A
Circuitry fault in phase B
Circuitry fault in phase C
Residual circuitry fault
PU communication error: com A board 1
PU communication error: com B board 1
PU communication error: com C board 1
PU communication error: com D board 1
PU communication error: com A board 2
PU communication error: com B board 2
PU communication error: com C board 2
PU communication error: com D board 2
PU communication error: com A board 3
PU communication error: com B board 3
PU communication error: com C board 3
PU communication error: com D board 3
PU communication error: com A board 4
PU communication error: com B board 4
PU communication error: com C board 4
PU communication error: com D board 4
PU communication error: com A board 5
PU communication error: com B board 5
PU communication error: com C board 5
PU communication error: com D board 5
PU communication error: com A board 6
PU communication error: com B board 6
PU communication error: com C board 6
PU communication error: com D board 6
PU communication error: com A board 7
PU communication error: com B board 7
PU communication error: com C board 7
PU communication error: com D board 7
PU communication error: com A board 8
PU communication error: com B board 8
PU communication error: com C board 8
PU communication error: com D board 8
Error: several PU adresse 38
Error: several PU adresse 37
Error: several PU adresse 36
Error: several PU adresse 35
Error: several PU adresse 34
Error: several PU adresse 33
Error: several PU adresse 32
Error: several PU adresse 31
Error: several PU adresse 30

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11

MiCOM P740

Page B-4

B - Digital Data Bus (For P741 Only)


DDB N
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
367
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413

Source
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) Disturbance Recorder
PSL (OUT) Disturbance Recorder
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
Virtual Opto
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL

Description

English Text

PU Adr 29 error
PU Adr 28 error
PU Adr 27 error
PU Adr 26 error
PU Adr 25 error
PU Adr 24 error
PU Adr 23 error
PU Adr 22 error
PU Adr 21 error
PU Adr 20 error
PU Adr 19 error
PU Adr 18 error
PU Adr 17 error
PU Adr 16 error
PU Adr 15 error
PU Adr 14 error
PU Adr 13 error
PU Adr 12 error
PU Adr 11 error
PU Adr 10 error
PU Adr 09 error
PU Adr 08 error
PU Adr 07 error
1st CU minor er.
2nd CU minor er.
Minor Err COM1
Minor Err COM2
Minor Err COM3
Minor Err COM4
Minor Err COM5
Minor Err COM6
Minor Err COM7
Minor Err COM8
Operating Mode 1
Operating Mode 2
Pre-fault
Post-fault
Virtual Opto 01
Virtual Opto 02
Virtual Opto 03
Virtual Opto 04
Virtual Opto 05
Virtual Opto 06
Virtual Opto 07
Virtual Opto 08
Virtual Opto 09
Virtual Opto 10
Virtual Opto 11
Virtual Opto 12
Virtual Opto 13
Virtual Opto 14
Virtual Opto 15
Virtual Opto 16
CommTest Enabled
87BB Enabled
87BBN Enabled
Reset Circt Flt
Topo/Set Changed
Manual Start DR
PU Topo no valid
Alarm Field Volt
Ext. CZ confirm.
General alarm
Relay 01
Relay 02
Relay 03
Relay 04
Relay 05
Relay 06
Relay 07
Relay 08
Relay 09
Relay 10
Relay 11
Relay 12
Relay 13
Relay 14

Error: several PU adresse 29


Error: several PU adresse 28
Error: several PU adresse 27
Error: several PU adresse 26
Error: several PU adresse 25
Error: several PU adresse 24
Error: several PU adresse 23
Error: several PU adresse 22
Error: several PU adresse 21
Error: several PU adresse 20
Error: several PU adresse 19
Error: several PU adresse 18
Error: several PU adresse 17
Error: several PU adresse 16
Error: several PU adresse 15
Error: several PU adresse 14
Error: several PU adresse 13
Error: several PU adresse 12
Error: several PU adresse 11
Error: several PU adresse 10
Error: several PU adresse 9
Error: several PU adresse 8
Error: several PU adresse 7
CU minor error
Remote CU minor error
Minor error in COM 1 board
Minor error in COM 2 board
Minor error in COM 3 board
Minor error in COM 4 board
Minor error in COM 5 board
Minor error in COM 6 board
Minor error in COM 7 board
Minor error in COM 8 board
Expert Only

Virtual Opto 01
Virtual Opto 02
Virtual Opto 03
Virtual Opto 04
Virtual Opto 05
Virtual Opto 06
Virtual Opto 07
Virtual Opto 08
Virtual Opto 09
Virtual Opto 10
Virtual Opto 11
Virtual Opto 12
Virtual Opto 13
Virtual Opto 14
Virtual Opto 15
Virtual Opto 16
Commissionning Test enable
Busbar protection enable
Busbar earth enable
Reset after fault
Change on topology or configuration
Disturbance recorder - Manual start
Topology file error for one or several PU
Alarm field voltage
External CZ confirmation
General alarm
Output relay 1 condition
Output relay 2 condition
Output relay 3 condition
Output relay 4 condition
Output relay 5 condition
Output relay 6 condition
Output relay 7 condition
Output relay 8 condition
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/C11

MiCOM P740

Page B-5

B - Digital Data Bus (For P741 Only)


DDB N
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456

Source
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
FRT

Description

English Text

Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 20
Relay 21
Relay 22
Relay 23
Relay 24
Relay 25
Relay 26
Relay 27
Relay 28
Relay 29
Relay 30
Relay 31
Relay 32
LED Cond IN 1
LED Cond IN 2
LED Cond IN 3
LED Cond IN 4
LED Cond IN 5
LED Cond IN 6
LED Cond IN 7
LED Cond IN 8
Timer IN 1
Timer IN 2
Timer IN 3
Timer IN 4
Timer IN 5
Timer IN 6
Timer IN 7
Timer IN 8
Timer OUT 1
Timer OUT 2
Timer OUT 3
Timer OUT 4
Timer OUT 5
Timer OUT 6
Timer OUT 7
Timer OUT 8
Fault_REC_TRIG

Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Led 1 condition
Led 2 condition
Led 3 condition
Led 4 condition
Led 5 condition
Led 6 condition
Led 7 condition
Led 8 condition
Input timer 1
Input timer 2
Input timer 3
Input timer 4
Input timer 5
Input timer 6
Input timer 7
Input timer 8
Output timer 1
Output timer 2
Output timer 3
Output timer 4
Output timer 5
Output timer 6
Output timer 7
Output timer 8
Fault Recorder Trigger

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/B11
Page B-6

MiCOM P740

B - Digital Data Bus (For P742 and P743 Only)


DDB No

Source

Description

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
32
33
34
35

Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto

Relay Label 01
Relay Label 02
Relay Label 03
Relay Label 04
Relay Label 05
Relay Label 06
Relay Label 07
Relay Label 08
Relay Label 09
Relay Label 10
Relay Label 11
Relay Label 12
Relay Label 13
Relay Label 14
Relay Label 15
Relay Label 16
Relay Label 17
Relay Label 18
Relay Label 19
Relay Label 20
Relay Label 21
Opto Label 01
Opto Label 02
Opto Label 03
Opto Label 04

English Text

Relay 4
Relay 5
Relay 6
Relay 7
Relay 8 - Setting P742
Relay 9
Relay 10
Relay 11
Relay 12
Relay 13
Relay 14
Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 20
Relay 21 - Setting P743
Opto Input 1
Opto Input 2
Opto Input 3
Opto Input 4

36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74

Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Opto
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
Led
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position

Opto Label 05
Opto Label 06
Opto Label 07
Opto Label 08
Opto Label 09
Opto Label 10
Opto Label 11
Opto Label 12
Opto Label 13
Opto Label 14
Opto Label 15
Opto Label 16
Opto Label 17
Opto Label 18
Opto Label 19
Opto Label 20
Opto Label 21
Opto Label 22
Opto Label 23
Opto Label 24
LED 1
LED 2
LED 3
LED 4
LED 5
LED 6
LED 7
LED 8
Q1 Open
Q1 Closed
Q2 Open

Opto Input 5
Opto Input 6
Opto Input 7
Opto Input 8
Opto Input 9
Opto Input 10
Opto Input 11
Opto Input 12
Opto Input 13
Opto Input 14
Opto Input 15
Opto Input 16 - Setting P742
Opto Input 17
Opto Input 18
Opto Input 19
Opto Input 20
Opto Input 21
Opto Input 22
Opto Input 23
Opto Input 24 - Setting P743
Led 1
Led 2
Led 3
Led 4
Led 5
Led 6
Led 7
Led 8
Isolator 1 - Auxiliary contact open
Isolator 1 - Auxiliary contact closed
Isolator 2 - Auxiliary contact open

75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95

PSL (IN) Isolator Position


PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) CB Fail
PSL (IN) CB Fail
PSL (IN) CB Fail
PSL (IN) CB Fail
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control

Q2 Closed
Q3 Open
Q3 Closed
Q4 Open
Q4 Closed
Q5 Open
Q5 Closed
Q6 Open
Q6 Closed
Ext. 3 ph Trip
External Trip A
External Trip B
External Trip C
Man.CB Close Cmd
CB not available
Ext. CB Fail
CB Aux. 3ph(52a)
CB Aux. 3ph(52b)
CB Aux. A (52a)
CB Aux. A (52b)
CB Aux. B (52a)

Isolator 2 - Auxiliary contact closed


Isolator 3 - Auxiliary contact open
Isolator 3 - Auxiliary contact closed
Isolator 4 - Auxiliary contact open
Isolator 4 - Auxiliary contact closed
Isolator 5 - Auxiliary contact open
Isolator 5 - Auxiliary contact closed
Isolator 6 - Auxiliary contact open
Isolator 6 - Auxiliary contact closed
Integrated breaker failure logic - 3 phase initialisation
Integrated breaker failure logic - Initialisation Phase A
Integrated breaker failure logic - Initialisation Phase B
Integrated breaker failure logic - Initialisation Phase C
CB Closing order (used in topology processing)
CB auxiliary Contact not available
External breaker failure logique, input to send backtrip order to CU
CB Auxiliary contact open 3ph (52a)
CB Auxiliary contact closed 3ph (52b)
CB Auxiliary contact open Phase A (52a)
CB Auxiliary contact closed Phase A (52b)
CB Auxiliary contact open Phase B (52a)

Relay 1 - Trip Phase A / Relay 2 - Phase B / Relay 3 - Phase C


87BB, 50BF(CU), I> and IN> trip are directly connected even they don't
appear in PSL

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/B11
Page B-7

MiCOM P740

B - Digital Data Bus (For P742 and P743 Only)


DDB No
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177

Source

Description

English Text

PSL (IN) CB Control


PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
PSL (IN)
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
Virtual relay
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) Isolator Position
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (IN) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) CB Fail
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Earth Fault
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Earth Fault
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Earth Fault
PSL (OUT) Phase Overcurrent
PSL (OUT) Earth Fault
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection

CB Aux. B (52b)
CB Aux. C (52a)
CB Aux. C (52b)
Reset Lockout
SG Bit LSB
SG Bit MSB
Reset All values
Reset Latches
User Alarm 1
User Alarm 2
User Alarm 3
User Alarm 4
User Alarm 5
User Alarm 6
User Alarm 7
Aux Volt Superv
Virtual Relay 01
Virtual Relay 02
Virtual Relay 03
Virtual Relay 04
Virtual Relay 05
Virtual Relay 06
Virtual Relay 07
Virtual Relay 08
Virtual Relay 09
Virtual Relay 10
Virtual Relay 11
Virtual Relay 12
Virtual Relay 13
Virtual Relay 14
Virtual Relay 15
Virtual Relay 16
Man.Close Q1 Cmd
Man.Close Q2 Cmd
Man.Close Q3 Cmd
Man.Close Q4 Cmd
Man.Close Q5 Cmd
Man.Close Q6 Cmd
Man. Close CB
Man. Trip CB
Ext. Retrip Ph A
Ext. Retrip Ph B
Ext. Retrip Ph C
Int retrip 3 ph
CBF Int Backtrip
CBF ext Backtrip
CB Fail Alarm
I>1 Start A
I>1 Start B
I>1 Start C
IN>1 Start
I>1 Trip
IN>1 Trip
I>2 Start A
I>2 Start B
I>2 Start C
IN>2 Start
I>2 Trip
IN>2 Trip
Zone 16 Off
Zone 15 Off
Zone 14 Off
Zone 13 Off
Zone 12 Off
Zone 11 Off
Zone 10 Off
Zone 09 Off
Zone 08 Off
Zone 07 Off
Zone 06 Off
Zone 05 Off
Zone 04 Off
Zone 03 Off
Zone 02 Off
Zone 01 Off
Trip Zone 16
Trip Zone 15

CB Auxiliary contact closed Phase B (52b)


CB Auxiliary contact open Phase C (52a)
CB Auxiliary contact closed Phase C (52b)
Reset trip relays 1, 2, 3
LSB Setting Group
MSB Setting Group
Reset relays and leds latched in PSL
Self Reset User Alam 1
Self Reset User Alam 2
Self Reset User Alam 3
Self Reset User Alam 4
Self Reset User Alam 5
Self Reset User Alam 6
Self Reset User Alam 7
Auxiliary voltage supervision
Virtual Relay 1
Virtual Relay 2
Virtual Relay 3
Virtual Relay 4
Virtual Relay 5
Virtual Relay 6
Virtual Relay 7
Virtual Relay 8
Virtual Relay 9
Virtual Relay 10
Virtual Relay 11
Virtual Relay 12
Virtual Relay 13
Virtual Relay 14
Virtual Relay 15
Virtual Relay 16
Isolator 1 - Closing order (used in topology processing)
Isolator 2 - Closing order(used in topology processing)
Isolator 3 - Closing order (used in topology processing)
Isolator 4 - Closing order (used in topology processing)
Isolator 5 - Closing order (used in topology processing)
Isolator 6 - Closing order (used in topology processing)
CB Control : manual closing order
CB Control : manual opening order
CBF Phase A external retrip (TBF3)
CBF Phase B external retrip (TBF3)
CBF Phase C external retrip (TBF3)
CBF 3Ph internal retrip (TBF1)
CBF backtrip - internal (TBF2)
CBF backtrip - external (TBF4)
CB Fail Alarm (TBF1 + TBF2 + TBF3 + TBF4)
Overcurrent Start I>1 phase A
Overcurrent Start I>1 phase B
Overcurrent Start I>1 phase C
Overcurrent Start I>1 phase N
Overcurrent Phase Trip 3Ph I>1
Overcurrent Earth Trip 3Ph I>1
Overcurrent Start I>2 phase A
Overcurrent Start I>2 phase B
Overcurrent Start I>2 phase C
Overcurrent Start I>2 phase N
Overcurrent Phase Trip 3Ph I>2
Overcurrent Earth Trip 3Ph I>2
Zone 16 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 15 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 14 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 13 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 12 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 11 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 10 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 9 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 8 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 7 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 6 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 5 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 4 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 3 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 2 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Zone 1 in commissioning mode or circuitry fault
Trip zone 16 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
Trip zone 15 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/B11
Page B-8

MiCOM P740

B - Digital Data Bus (For P742 and P743 Only)


DDB No

Source

Description

English Text

178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223

PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection


PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) Monitoring
PSL (OUT) Monitoring

Trip Zone 14
Trip Zone 13
Trip Zone 12
Trip Zone 11
Trip Zone 10
Trip Zone 09
Trip Zone 08
Trip Zone 07
Trip Zone 06
Trip Zone 05
Trip Zone 04
Trip Zone 03
Trip Zone 02
Trip Zone 01
I>BB Start A
I>BB Start B
I>BB Start C
IN>BB Start
I>BB Block Ph A
I>BB Block Ph B
I>BB Block Ph C
IN>BB Block
Saturation ph A
Saturation ph B
Saturation ph C
Current Overflow
Max Flux ph A
Max Flux ph B
Max Flux ph C
Alarm OffsetABCN
Predict err ph A
Predict err ph B
Predict err ph C
Sat ADC ph A
Sat ADC ph B
Sat ADC ph C
Sat ADC Neutral
Delta IA
Delta IB
Delta IC
Delta IN
Fibre Com Error
PU Main Error
Acq Error 3Io
CT Fail Alarm

Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone
Trip zone

224

PSL (OUT) All Protection

Internal Trip

225
226
227
228
229
230
232
233
234
235
236
237
256
257
258
264
265
266
273
274
275
276
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287

PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection


PSL (OUT) 87BB Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) System
PSL (OUT) Overcurrent Protection
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) Overcurrent Protection
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) 50BF Protection
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT) CT Saturation
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)

Trip 87BB
Trip 87BB Block
Trip 50BF (CU)
Man.Trip zone
Dead Zone Fault
Circuitry Fault
Operating mode 1
Operating mode 2
Operating mode 3
Config. valid
Topology valid
Topo/Set valid
I> Any Trip
CBAvailabToTrip
BF Trip Request
I> No Trip
CBNotAvailToTrip
BFTripNoRequest
Ctrl CB Trip
Ctrl CB Close
PU OutOfService
PU I/O Disabled
Reset Flux
Restart Flux
Comm Test Enable
I>BB Enabled
Trip Rel Latched
I>2 Block BB ON
IN>2 Block BB ON
Reset Trip Relay
Topo/Set Changed

14 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone


13 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
12 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
11 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
10 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
9 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
8 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
7 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
6 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
5 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
4 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
3 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
2 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone
1 from 87BB, 50BF or manual trip zone

Overcurrent Ia>BB - Busbar Trip Confirmation


Overcurrent Ib>BB - Busbar Trip Confirmation
Overcurrent Ic>BB - Busbar Trip Confirmation
Overcurrent In>BB - Busbar Confirmation
Overcurrent Ia>BB - Blocking Busbar on external fault
Overcurrent Ib>BB - Blocking Busbar on external fault
Overcurrent Ic>BB - Blocking Busbar on external fault
Overcurrent In>BB - Blocking Busbar on external fault
Saturation Phase A
Saturation Phase B
Saturation Phase C
Optical fibre current format > Max
Max flux presomption Phase A
Max flux presomption Phase B
Max flux presomption Phase C
Offset Analog board Phase A, B, C or N
Variation error Phase A (from derived current)
Variation error Phase B (from derived current)
Variation error Phase C (from derived current)
ADC saturation Phase A
ADC saturation Phase B
ADC saturation Phase C
ADC saturation Phase N
Variation Phase A
Variation Phase B
Variation Phase C
Variation Phase N
PU/CU communication error
PU main error
Sample acquisition error - 3*Io=In
3*Io=In error with Tce timer
Trip 3ph from 87BB, 50BF(CU), I>, IN> or manual zone trip (CU). Trip
command directly apply to relay 1, 2, 3 without PSL
Busbar trip in one zone, not especially on this PU
Busbar trip blocked by commissioning mode
50BF backtrip from CU in one zone, not especially on this PU
Manual trip in one zone, not especially on this PU
Dead zone alarm
Circuitry fault on dead zone
for expert only
Valid configuration
Topology file valid
Configuration & Topology valid
Overcurrent Trip (phase or earth fault)
Circuit Breaker available to trip
Internal or external 50BF (backtrip order to CU)
Overcurent trip - complement
CB available to trip - complement
Internal or external 50BF - complement
Manual trip for local Circuit Breaker
Manual closing for local Circuit Breaker
Commissioning Mode - PU out of service
Commissioning Mode - I/O disabled
for expert only
for expert only
Activation Commissionning Test
Activation OC Busbar Confirmation
Activation latched trip relay
Activation OC Busbar Blocking Phase
Activation OC Busbar Blocking Residual
Reset latched trip relay 1,2 and 3
Setting or topology change

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/B11
Page B-9

MiCOM P740

B - Digital Data Bus (For P742 and P743 Only)


DDB No
288
290
292
294
296
298
300
301
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397

Source

Description

English Text

PSL (OUT) Isolator Position


PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) CB Position
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) Isolator Position
PSL (OUT) CB Position
PSL (OUT) Commissioning Test
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT)
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) CB Control
PSL (OUT) All Protection
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
PSL
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer

Q1 Closed
Q2 Closed
Q3 Closed
Q4 Closed
Q5 Closed
Q6 Closed
CB Closed
CB Healthy
Q1 Status Forced
Q2 Status Forced
Q3 Status Forced
Q4 Status Forced
Q5 Status Forced
Q6 Status Forced
CB Status Forced
Forced Mode ON
CB Aux. 52a
CB Aux. 52b
CB Trip 3 ph
CB Trip phase A
CB Trip phase B
CB Trip phase C
Alarm Field Volt
General Alarm
CB Status Alarm
Man CB Trip Fail
Man CB Cls Fail
Ctrl Cls in Prog
Control Close
Control Trip
Any Trip
Relay 01
Relay 02
Relay 03
Relay 04
Relay 05
Relay 06
Relay 07
Relay 08
Relay 09
Relay 10
Relay 11
Relay 12
Relay 13
Relay 14
Relay 15
Relay 16
Relay 17
Relay 18
Relay 19
Relay 20
Relay 21
Relay 22
Relay 23
Relay 24
Relay 25
Relay 26
Relay 27
Relay 28
Relay 29
Relay 30
Relay 31
Relay 32
LED Cond IN 1
LED Cond IN 2
LED Cond IN 3
LED Cond IN 4
LED Cond IN 5
LED Cond IN 6
LED Cond IN 7
LED Cond IN 8
Timer IN 1
Timer IN 2
Timer IN 3
Timer IN 4
Timer IN 5
Timer IN 6

Isolator 1 closed (used for topology processing)


Isolator 2 closed (used for topology processing)
Isolator 3 closed (used for topology processing)
Isolator 4 closed (used for topology processing)
Isolator 5 closed (used for topology processing)
Isolator 6 closed (used for topology processing)
Cicuit breaer closed (used for topology processing)
Circuit Breaker 1 available (used for topology processing)
Isolator 1 - Forced position
Isolator 2 - Forced position
Isolator 3 - Forced position
Isolator 4 - Forced position
Isolator 5 - Forced position
Isolator 6 - Forced position
Circuit Breaker 1 - Forced position
Forced position enable
Circuit Breaker open
Circuit Breaker closed
Circuit Breaker trip 3 phases
Circuit Breaker trip phase A
Circuit Breaker trip phase B
Circuit Breaker trip phase C
Alarm field voltage
General alarm
CB status alarm - CB auxiliary contact supevision
CB control alarm - trip error
CB control alarm - closed error
Circuit Breaker closed in progress
Circuit Breaker closed control
Circuit Breaker open control
OR between DDB 136, 137, 138, 139, 224
Output relay 1 condition
Output relay 2 condition
Output relay 3 condition
Output relay 4 condition
Output relay 5 condition
Output relay 6 condition
Output relay 7 condition
Output relay 8 condition
Output relay 9 condition
Output relay 10 condition
Output relay 11 condition
Output relay 12 condition
Output relay 13 condition
Output relay 14 condition
Output relay 15 condition
Output relay 16 condition
Output relay 17 condition
Output relay 18 condition
Output relay 19 condition
Output relay 20 condition
Output relay 21 condition
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Led 1 condition
Led 2 condition
Led 3 condition
Led 4 condition
Led 5 condition
Led 6 condition
Led 7 condition
Led 8 condition
Input timer 1
Input timer 2
Input timer 3
Input timer 4
Input timer 5
Input timer 6

abcd

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/B11
Page B-10

MiCOM P740

B - Digital Data Bus (For P742 and P743 Only)


DDB No
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408

Source

Description

English Text

Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
Aux Timer
FRT

Timer IN 7
Timer IN 8
Timer OUT 1
Timer OUT 2
Timer OUT 3
Timer OUT 4
Timer OUT 5
Timer OUT 6
Timer OUT 7
Timer OUT 8
Fault_REC_TRIG

Input timer 7
Input timer 8
Output timer 1
Output timer 2
Output timer 3
Output timer 4
Output timer 5
Output timer 6
Output timer 7
Output timer 8
Fault recorder trigger

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

C - DEFAULT PROGRAMMABLE
SCHEME LOGIC (PSL)

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database


MiCOM P740

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

Page C-1

MiCOM P741
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (01) FOR CENTRAL UNIT

Input-Opto Couplers

Opto Label 01
DDB #032

Reset Latches
DDB #077

Opto Label 02
DDB #033

Ext. Start DR
DDB #075

Opto Label 03
DDB #034

Reset Circt Flt


DDB #074

Opto Label 04
DDB #035

Ext. CZ confirm
DDB #076

TRIP 87BB
DDB #224

20
TRIP 50BF
DDB #227

Dead Zone signal


DDB #229

Dwell
0

FAULT_REC_TRIG
DDB #456

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database

Page C-2

MiCOM P740

MiCOM P741
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (01) FOR CENTRAL UNIT

Output Contact

0
Fault phase A
DDB #230

Pick-Up

Relay Label 01
DDB #000

0
Fault phase B
DDB #231

Pick-Up

Relay Label 02
DDB #001

0
Fault phase C
DDB #232

Trp 87BB Zone 01


DDB #159
Trp 50BF Zone 01
DDB #175

Pick-Up

Trp 50BF Zone 02


DDB #174

Relay Label 03
DDB #002

Pick-Up

Man. Trip Zone 01


DDB #191

Trp 87BB Zone 02


DDB #158

Relay Label 04
DDB #003

Pick-Up

Man. Trip Zone 02


DDB #190

Relay Label 05
DDB #004

0
Circuitry Fault
DDB #234

Crct Flt Zone 01


DDB #143
Lck Lev.1 Zone01
DDB #207

Pick-Up
0

Pick-Up
0

Lck Lev.2 Zone01


DDB #223

Crct Flt Zone 02


DDB #142
Lck Lev.1 Zone02
DDB #206
Lck Lev.2 Zone02
DDB #222

Relay Label 06
DDB #005

Relay Label 07
DDB #006

Pick-Up
0

Relay Label 08
DDB #007

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

Page C-3

MiCOM P741
PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (01) FOR CENTRAL UNIT

Leds Front Panel

Fault phase A
DDB #230

Latching

Output_led_01
DDB #064

Phase A

Fault phase B
DDB #231

Latching

Output_led_02
DDB #065

Phase B

Fault phase C
DDB #232

Latching

Output_led_03
DDB #066

Phase C

Latching

Output_led_04
DDB #067

Busbar Trip

Latching

Output_led_05
DDB #068

Breaker Fail

Latching

Output_led_06
DDB #069

Circuitry Fault

Trip 87BB
DDB #224

Trip 50BF
DDB #227

Circuitry Fault
DDB #234

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database

Page C-4

MiCOM P740

MiCOM P742 & P743


PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (01) FOR PERIPHERAL UNITS

Input-Opto Couplers

Opto Label 01
DDB #032

Reset Latches
DDB #103

Opto Label 02
DDB #033

Reset Lockout

DDB #099

Opto Label 03
DDB #034

Q1 Closed
DDB #073

Opto Label 04
DDB #035

DDB #072

Opto Label 05
DDB #036

Q2 Closed
DDB #075

Opto Label 06
DDB #037

DDB #074

Q1 Open

Q2 Open

Opto Label 07
DDB #038

CB Aux. 3ph (52a)


DDB #091

Opto Label 08
DDB #039

CB Aux. 3ph (52b)


DDB #092

Opto Label 09
DDB #040

Q3 Closed
DDB #077

Opto Label 10
DDB #041

Q3 Open

Opto Label 12
DDB #043

Ext. 3 ph Trip

DDB #076

DDB #084

Opto Label 13
DDB #044

CB not available
DDB #089

Opto Label 14
DDB #045

Ext. CB Fail

DDB #090

Opto Label 15
DDB #046

Dead Zone Fault


DDB #229

Man.CB Close Cmd


DDB #088

20
Fault_REC_TRIG
DDB #408

Dwell
0
Any Trip
DDB #326

P3721ENa

Relay Menu Database

P740/EN GC/D11

MiCOM P740

Page C-5

MiCOM P742 & P743


PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (01) FOR PERIPHERAL UNITS

Output Contact

Ext. Retrip Ph A
DDB #136
Ext. Retrip Ph B
DDB #137

0
Relay Label 06
DDB #005

Pick-Up
0

Ext. Retrip Ph C
DDB #138

Int retrip 3 ph
DDB #139

0
CB Fail Alarm

Relay Label 04
DDB #003

Pick-Up

DDB #142

0
0
Relay Label 05
DDB #004

Pick-Up

Opto Label 13
DDB #044

Internal Trip
DDB #224

0
Relay Label 07
DDB #006

Pick-Up
0

Dead Zone Fault


DDB #229

CB Status Alarm

DDB #320

Opto Label 03
DDB #034
Opto Label 04
DDB #035

Relay Label 08
DDB #007

Pick-Up

&

5000

Dwell

Opto Label 03
DDB #034

Opto Label 04
DDB #035
Opto Label 05
DDB #036
Opto Label 06
DDB #037

&

5000

Dwell

Opto Label 05
DDB #036

Opto Label 06
DDB #037
Opto Label 09
DDB #040
Opto Label 10
DDB #041
Opto Label 09
DDB #040
Opto Label 10
DDB #041

&

5000

Dwell
0

User Alarm 1
DDB #104

P740/EN GC/D11

Relay Menu Database

Page C-6

MiCOM P740

MiCOM P742 & P743


PROGRAMMABLE SCHEME LOGIC (01) FOR PERIPHERAL UNITS

Leds Front Panel

Q1 Closed
DDB #288

Latching

Output_led_01
DDB #064

Isolator 1

Q2 Closed
DDB #290

Latching

Output_led_02
DDB #065

Isolator 2

Q3 Closed
DDB #292

Latching

Output_led_03
DDB #066

Isolator 3

Latching

Output_led_05
DDB #068

Breaker Fail

Latching

Output_led_06
DDB #069

Latching

Output_led_07
DDB #070

CB Fail Alarm
DDB #142

Opto Label 13
DDB #044

Internal Trip
DDB #224

Trip 87BB
DDB #225

Dead Zone Fault


DDB #229

&

Busbar Trip

Dead Zone

Menu Content Tables

P740/EN HI/D11

MiCOM P740

MENU CONTENT TABLES

abcd

Menu Content Tables


MiCOM P740

P740/EN HI/D11
Page 1

MiCOM P741 - Central Unit


SYSTEM DATA

VIEW RECORDS

MEASUREMENTS 1

Language
English

Last Record

IA bias

Password
AAAA

Menu Cell Ref


(From Record)

IB bias

Description
MiCOM P741

Time & Date


(From Record)

IC bias

Plant Reference
ALSTOM

Record Text

Serial Number
Serial Number

Record Value

IA CZ diff

Relay Address

Faulted Phase
1

Plant Status

Start Elements

Control Status

Trip Elements

Active Group
0

Zx16: IA diff
0

Select Report

Fault Alarms

0
Zx16: IB diff
0

Report Text
0

Opto I/P Status

System Frequency

Relay O/P Status

Type

Fault Duration

0
Access Level

IB diff

IC diff

Password Level 2
AAAA

IN diff

0
Zx16: IB bias

0
Reset Indication
No

0
Zx16: IC bias
0
Zx16: IN bias

0
Password Level 1
AAAA

Zx16: IA bias

Data

IA diff

0
Alarm Status

Zx16: IC diff
0

Software Ref. 1

Password Control

Zx1: IN bias

Faulted Zone

Time Stamp

Time
0

PU topo valid

IRIG-B Sync
Disabled

Reset Circt Flt

IRIG-B Status

0
Current Node 16
0

CircuitryFfault

Battery Status

0
Circ Fault Phase

0
Zx1: IC bias

IN CZ diff

PU connected

Current Node 03
0

Current Node 16
0

Zx1: IB bias

IC CZ diff

Date/Time

Zx1: IN diff
0 A

Current Node 02

Current Node 03

Zx1: IA bias

IB CZ diff

PU in service

DATE AND TIME

Current Node 02

Zx1: IC diff
0 A

Current Node 01
0

PU CONF &
STATUS

TOPOLOGY 2

Current Node 01

Zx1: IB diff

IN Diff CZ
0

TOPOLOGY 1

0 A
IC Diff CZ

IN bias

Active Group
50

IB Diff CZ

Zx1: IA diff
0 A

Frequency

IA Diff CZ
0

MEASUREMENTS 2

Battery Alarm
Enabled

abcd

Menu Content Tables


MiCOM P740

P740/EN HI/D11
Page 2

MiCOM P741 - Central Unit


CONFIGURATION

RECORD CONTROL

DISTURB RECORDER

Restore Defaults
No Operation

Clear Events
No

Duration

Setting Group
Select via Menu

Clear Faults
No

Trigger Position

Active Settings
Group 1

Clear Maint
No

MEASURE'T SETUP

Default Display

OPTOS
SETUP

COMMISSION TESTS

Opto I/P Status


0

1.2

0
Local Values
Secondary

Relay O/P Status

50
Trigger Mode
Single

Remote Values
Primary

Test Port Status

Save Changes
No Operation

Analog Channel 1
IA diff

Ibp Base Cur Pri

Copy From
Group 1

Analog Channel 2
IB diff

Copy to
No Operation

Analog Channel 3
IC diff

Setting Group 1
Enabled

Analog Channel 4
IN diff

Setting Group 2
Disabled

Analog Channel 5
IA bias

Setting Group 3
Disabled

Analog Channel 6
IB bias

Setting Group 4
Disabled

Analog Channel 7
IC bias

Diff Busbar Prot


Enabled

Analog Channel 8

Optos Setup
Visible

Digital Input 1
Unused

Global nominal V
2

Current Is

Opto Input 1
2

Phase Slope k

LED Status

Monitor Bit 1
Relay 1

Relay 1
Relay Label 01

Opto Input 2
Opto Label 02

Relay 2
Relay Label 02

Opto Input 3
Opto Label 03

Relay 3
Relay Label 03

ID>1 Current
0,05*Ibp mA

Opto Input 4
Opto Label 04

Relay 4
Relay Label 04

ID>1 Alarm Timer


5 s

Opto Input 5
Opto Label 05

Relay 5
Relay Label 05

Diff Earth Fault


Enabled

Opto Input 6
Opto Label 06

Relay 6
Relay Label 06

IBiasPh> Cur.
2*Ibp mA

Opto Input 7
Opto Label 07

Relay 7
Relay Label 07

Earth Cur. IsN


0,1*Ibp mA

Opto Input 8
Opto Label 08

Relay 8
Relay Label 08

Earth Slope kN
20 mA

Virtual Opto 1
Virtual Opto 01

Virtual Relay 1
Virtual Relay 01

IDN>2 Current
0,1*Ibp mA

Virtual Opto 2
Virtual Opto 02

Virtual Relay 2
Virtual Relay 02

Virtual Opto 16
Virtual Opto 16

Virtual Relay 16
Virtual Relay 16

Opto Input 6

Opto Input 7
Test Pattern

Opto Input 1
Opto Label 01

mA

Opto Input 5

Test Mode
Disabled

OUTPUT LABELS
GROUP 1

ID>2 Current
1,2*Ibp

Opto Input 4

Monitor Bit 8
Relay 8

INPUT LABELS
GROUP 1

2
Opto Input 3

0,1*Ibp

40 %

Opto Input 2
0

1000

DIFF BUSBAR PROT


GROUP 1

0
Opto Input 8
Contact Test
No Operation
Test LEDs
No Operation
0

Input Labels
Visible
Output Labels
Visible
Recorder Control
Visible

Comms Settings
Invisible

Disturb Recorder
Visible

Commission Tests
Visible

Measure't Setup
Visible

Setting Values
Secondary

IDN>1 Current
0,05*Ibp mA

87BB monitoring
0xFFFF

IDN>1 Alarm Tim.


5 s

87BB&50BF disabl
0xFFFF

Digital Input 32
Unused

87BBTrip Pattern

Manual Trigger
No

87BB Trip Order

Zone To Record

DDB 0-31
0

DDB 480-511
0

Idem GROUP
2,3 & 4

abcd

Menu Content Tables


MiCOM P740

P740/EN HI/D11
Page 3

MiCOM P742/3 - Peripheral Units


SYSTEM DATA

VIEW RECORDS

MEASUREMENTS 1

Language
English

Last Record

IA Magnitude

Password
AAAA

Menu Cell Ref


(From Record)

IA Phase Angle

Description
MiCOM P742/P743

Time & Date


(From Record)

IB Magnitude

Plant Reference
ALSTOM

Record Text

Model Number
Model Number

Record Value

Serial Number
Serial Number

Select Fault

IB Phase Angle

Relay Address

Plant Status

Control Status

Active Group

CB Trip/Close
No Operation
Software Ref. 1

Alarm Status

System Frequency

Select Report
0

Opto I/P Status

Access Level

Relay Trip Time


2

Relay O/P Status


0

Report Text
0

Password Control
2

IA

Password Level 1
AAAA

IB

Password Level 2
AAAA

IC

Type
0

Zx2: IC diff
Group 1

Zx4: IC diff

Zx2: IN diff

Zx4: IN diff

0 A
Zx2: IA bias
0 Hz

0
Zx4: IA bias
0
Zx4: IB bias

0
Zx2: IC bias

0
Zx4: IC bias

0
Zx2: IN bias

No

0
Reset Indication

Zx2: IB bias

Data

Zx4: IB diff

0 A

Frequency
0

Zx4: IA diff
0

Zx2: IB diff

I0 Magnitude
0

0 A
I2 Magnitude

Zx3: IN bias

Zx2: IA diff
0

I1 Magnitude

0
Zx4: IN bias

Man Close Delay


0

Zx3: IB bias

Zx1: IN bias

IN Derived Angle

Fault Alarms

Zx3: IA bias

0 A

Man Trip Pulse


0.5

Zx1: IC bias

IN Derived Magn

Time Stamp

Zx3: IN diff

Man Close Pulse


0.5

Zx1: IB bias

IN Phase Angle

Trip Elements

Zx3: IC diff

0 A

Battery Alarm
Enabled

Zx1: IA bias

IN Magnitude

Start Elements

CB Control by
Disabled

Zx3: IB diff

Zx1: IN diff

IC Phase Angle

Faulted Phase

Reset Trip Latch


No

Battery Status

Zx3: IA diff

0 A

Trip Latched
Disabled

Time

Zx1: IC diff

IC Magnitude

Active Group
50

Date

Prot Trip Pulse


0.2

Zx1: IB diff
0 A

DATE and TIME

0
Zx1: IA diff

0 A

CB CONTROL

Link CT / zone
0 A

Frequency

TOPOLOGY

10

abcd

Menu Content Tables


MiCOM P740

P740/EN HI/D11
Page 4

MiCOM P742/3 - Peripheral Units


CONFIGURATION

RECORD CONTROL

CT AND VT RATIOS

Restore Defaults
No Operation

Phase CT Primary

Setting Group
Select via Menu

Phase CT Sec'y

Active Settings
Group 1

CT Class
X

Save Changes
No Operation

RBPh / RBN

Copy From
Group 1

Power Parameters

Copy to
No Operation

Standard Input
British

Setting Group 1
Enabled

Knee Voltage Vk

Setting Group 2
Disabled

Rated Burden VA

Setting Group 3
Disabled

Rated Burden Ohm


25 / I1^2

Setting Group 4
Disabled

KSCC

BB Trip Confirm
Enabled

RCT Sec'y

DISTURB RECORDER

Clear Events
No

Duration

1000

Clear Faults
No

Trigger Position
33.3 %

Clear Maint
No

Trigger Mode
Single

MEASUR'T SETUP

Default Display

COMMISSION TEST

Opto I/P Status


0

Global Level
2

Local Values
Secondary

Relay O/P Status


0

Opto Input 1
2

Remote Values
Primary

Test Port Status


0

Opto Input 2
0

1.5 s

Analog Channel 1
IA

LED Status

Analog Channel 2
IB

Monitor Bit 1
Relay 1

0
Opto Input 24
2

Analog Channel 3
IC

250

Analog Channel 4
IN

Monitor Bit 8
Relay 8

25

Analog Channel 5
Unused

Test Mode
Disabled

Analog Channel 6
Unused

Test Pattern

Analog Channel 7
Unused

Contact Test
No operation

0.5

Analog Channel 8
No Trigger

Test LEDs
No Operation

Digital Input 1
Unused

Position Pattern
0

Input 1 Trigger
No Trigger

Position Test
No Operation

Optos Setup
Visible

CT & VT Ratios
Visible

Eff. Burden Ohm


25 / I1^2

Overcurrent Prot
Disabled

Recorder Control
Visible

Eff. Burden VA

Earth Fault Prot


Disabled

Disturb Recorder
Visible

CB Fail & I<


Disabled

Measure't Setup
Visible

Digital Input 32
Unused

Input Labels
Visible

Commission Tests
Enabled

Input 32 Trigger
No Trigger

Output Labels
Visible

Setting Values
Secondary

25

OPTOS SETUP

DDB 0-31
0

DDB element 480-511


0

abcd

Menu Content Tables


MiCOM P740

P740/EN HI/D11
Page 5

MiCOM P742/3 - Peripheral Units


BB TRIP CONFIRM
GROUP1

BACKUP
OVERCURRENT
GROUP1

O/C EARTH FAULT


GROUP1

CB FAIL
GROUP1

SUPERVISION
GROUP1

I>BB Current Set


1,2*I1

I>1 Function
Disabled

IN>1 Function
Disabled

Control by
I<

IN>BB Current
0,2*I1

I>1 Current Set


3*I1

IN>1 Current Set


3*I1

I< Current Set


0,05*I1

Error Factor Kce


40

I>1 Time Delay


1

IN>1 Time Delay


1

I> Status
Disabled

Alarm Delay Tce


5

I>1 TMS
1

IN>1 TMS
1

I> Current Set


1,2*I1

I>1 Time Dial


7

IN>1 Time Dial


7

IN> Current Set


0,2*I1

I>1 Reset Char


DT

IN>1 Reset Char


DT

I>1 tReset
0

IN>1 tReset
0

CB Fail Timer 1
0.05

I>2 Function
Disabled

IN>2 Function
Disabled

CB Fail Timer 2
0.2

I>2 Current Set


20*I1

IN>2 Current Set


20*I1

I>2 Time Delay


1

IN>2 Time Delay


1

I0 SUPERVISION

INPUT
LABELS
GROUP1

OUTPUTS
LABELS
GROUP1

Opto Input 1
Opto Label 01

Relay 1
Relay Label 01

Opto Input 2
Opto Label 02

Relay 2
Relay Label 02

Opto Input 24
Opto Input 24

Relay 21
Relay Label 21
Virtual Relay 01
Virtual Relay 01

INTERNAL TRIP

EXTERNAL TRIP
CB Fail Timer 3
0.05
CB Fail Timer 4
0.2

Virtual Relay 16
Virtual Relay 16

Idem
GROUP
2,3 & 4

Version Compatibility

P740/EN VC/D11

MiCOM P740

VERSION COMPATIBILITY

P740/EN VC/D11

Version Compatibility
MiCOM P740

Software
Version

Date of
Issue

Full Description of Changes

00
02/2003 First release to Production
Refer to manual P740/EN xx/B11 for software version 00 and hardware version B
01
07/2003 Update of default settings in the four languages
Refer to manual P740/EN xx/C11 for software version 01 and hardware version B

S1
Compatibility

Backward Compatibility
PSL

Setting Files

Menu Text
Files

Version Compatibility

MiCOM P740

Relay type: P740

V2.07
V2.07

ABCD
P740/EN VC/D11

Page 1/2

P44x/EN VC/D11
Page 2/2

ABCD

Menu Content Tables


MiCOM P441, P442 & P444